Subaru 2009 Tribeca Special Edition User Manual

Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in

excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control

system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read

this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and

its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,

such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact

the dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest

SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifi cations and illustrations found in this

manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY

INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and

designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any

obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles

previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and

covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some

explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your

vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The

next owner will need the information found herein.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

Warranties

& Warranties for U.S.A.

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by

Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail

by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the

United States come with the following

warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranty

. Emission Control Systems Warranty

. Emissions Performance Warranty

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty an d Maint enance B ooklet”.

Please read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties for Canada

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by

Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by

an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada

come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranty

. Anti-Corrosion Warranty

. Emission Control Warranty

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please

read these warranties carefully.

CAUTION

. If your vehicle is equipped with a

navigation system and/or Rear

Seat Entertainment System, the

displays contain mercury. There-

fore, the displays of the naviga-

tion system and/or Rear Seat

Entertainment System must be

removed before vehicle disposal.

Once the displays have be en

removed, please reuse, recycle

or dispose of them as hazardous

waste.

. If your vehicle is equipped with

High Intensity Discharge (HID)

headlights, the HID headlights

contain mercury. Therefore, it is

necessary to remove HID head-

lights before vehicle disposal.

Once removed, please reuse, re-

cycle or dispose of the HID head-

lights as hazardous waste.

How to use this Owner’s

Manual

& Using your Owner’s Manual

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully

read this manual. To protect yourself and

extend the service life of your vehicle,

follow the instr uctions in this manual.

Failure to observe these instructions may

result in serious injury and damage to your

vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen

chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief

table of contents, so you can usually tell at

a glance if that chapter contains the

information you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS

airbags

This chapter informs you how to use the

seat and seatbelt and contains precau-

tions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and doors

This chapter informs you how to operate

the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and controls

This chapter informs you about the opera-

tion of instrument panel indicators and

how to use the instruments and other

switches.

– CONTINUED –

Chapter 4: Climate control

This chapter informs you how to operate

the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you how to operate

your audio system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate

interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start and

operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your

SUBARU in various conditions and ex-

plains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you

have a problem while driving, such as a

flat tire or engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep your

SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service

This chapter informs you when you need

to take your SUBARU to the dealer for

scheduled maintenance and informs you

how to keep your SUBARU running

properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about the dimen-

sions and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer information and

Reporting safety defects

This chapter informs you about Tire

information, Uniform tire quality grading

standards and Reporting safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’sin

this manual. You can use it to quickly find

something you want to read.

& Safety warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to poten-

tial hazards that could result in injury to

you or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well

as all other portions of this manual care-

fully in order to gain a better understand-

ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle

safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which serious injury or death could

result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which injury or damage to your

vehicle, or both, could result if the

caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or sugges-

tions how to make better use of your

vehicle.

& Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means “ Do

not”, “Do not do this”,or“Do not let this

happen”, depending upon the context.

Vehicle symbols

There are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to

“Warning and indicator lights” in the

illustrated index section in this chapter.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Passengers’ windows lock

Fuel

Front fog lights

Parking lights

Hazard warning flasher

Seat heater

Mark Name

Child restraint lower an-

chorages

Child restraint top tether an-

chorages

Horn

Windshield wiper deicer

Wiper intermittent

Windshield wiper and washer

Windshield wiper mist (for

single wipe)

Rear window wiper

Rear window washer

Lights

Headlight beam leveler

Mark Name

Parking lights, tail lights, li-

cense plate lights and instru-

ment panel illumination

Headlights

Turn signal

Illumination brightness

Engine hood

Fan speed

Instrument panel outlets

Instrument panel outlets and

foot outlets

Foot outlets

Windshield defroster and foot

outlets

Windshield defroster

– CONTINUED –

Mark Name

Rear window defogger/Out-

side mirror defogger

Air recirculation

Outside air

Engine oil

Washer

Door lock (transmitter)

Door unlock (transmitter)

Rear gate (transmitter)

Power folding mirror

Safety precautions when

driving

& Seatbelt and SRS airbag

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers in the

vehicle should always wear seat-

belts when the vehicle is moving.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System) airbag does not do away

with the need to fasten seatbelts.

In combination with the seat-

belts, it offers the best combined

protection in case of a serious

accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerabl e speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

Carefully read the “Seatbelts” and “*SRS

airbag (Supplemental Restraint System

airbag)” sections in chapter 1 for instruc-

tions and precautions concerning the

seatbelt system and SRS airbag system.

& Child safety

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap or

in your arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a

collision, because the child will

be caught between the passen-

ger and objects inside the vehi-

cle.

. While riding in the vehicle, in-

fants and small children should

always be placed in one of the

rear seating positions recom-

mended in this Owner ’s Manual

in an infant or child restraint

system which is appropriate for

the child’s age, height and

weight. If a child is too big for a

child restraint system, the child

should sit in a REAR seat and be

restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seat-

ing positions. Never allow a child

to stand up or kneel on the seat.

. Put children aged 12 and under in

a REAR seat properly restrained

at all times in a child restraint

device or in a seatbelt. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if

they are 12 years of age and

under and are not restrained or

improperly restrained. Because

children are lighter and weaker

than adults, their risk of being

injured from deployment is great-

er.

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN

THE FRONT SEAT. DO ING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Always use the child safety locks

whene ver a child rides in the

rear. Serious injury could result

if a child accidentally opened the

door and fell out. Refer to the

“Child safety locks” section in

chapter 2.

. Always lock the passenger’s win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child

operating the power window. Re-

fer to the “Power windows” sec-

tion in chapter 2.

. Never leave unattended children

in the vehicle. They could acci-

dentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, temperature

in a closed vehicle could quickly

become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries

to them.

Carefully read the sections “Child restraint

systems”, “Seatbelts”, and “*SRS airbag

(Supplemental Restraint System airbag)”

in chapter 1 of this Owner’s Manual for

instructions and precautions concerning

the child restraint system, seatbelt system

and SRS airbag system.

& Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorle ss

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

– CONTINUED –

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from enter-

ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked

vehicle for a lengthy time while

the engine is running. If that is

unavoidable, then use the venti-

lation fan to force fresh air into

the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

& Drinking and driving

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very

dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-

stream delays your reaction and

impairs your perception, judgment

and attentiveness. If you drive after

drinking - even if you drink just a

little - it will increase the risk of

being involved in a serious or fatal

accident, injuring or killing yourself,

your passengers and others. In

addition, if you are injured in the

accident, alcohol may increase the

severity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken driving i s one of th e most

frequent causes of accidents. Since alco-

hol affects all people differently, you may

have consumed too much alcohol to drive

safely even if the level of alcohol in your

blood is below the legal limit. The safest

thing you can do is never drink and drive.

However if you have no choice but to

drive, stop drinking and sober up comple-

tely before getting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and driving

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the

counter and prescription) that can

delay your reaction time and impair

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness. If you drive after taking

them, it may increase your, your

passengers’ and other persons’ risk

of being involved in a serious or

fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with

your doctor or pharmacist or read the

literature that accompanies the medication

to determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive

after taking any medications that can

make you drowsy or otherwise affect your

ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If

you have a medical condition that requires

you to take drugs, please consult with

your doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence

of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your

own health and well-being, we urge you

not to take illegal drugs in the first place

and to seek treatment if you are addicted

to those drugs.

& Driving when tired or sleepy

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your

reaction will be delayed and your

perception, judgment and attentive-

ness will be impaired. If you drive

when tired or sleepy, your, your

passengers’ and other persons’

chances of being involved in a

serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive b ut

instead find a safe place to rest if you

are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you

should make periodic rest stops to refresh

yourself before continuing on your journey.

When possible, you should share the

driving with others.

& Car phone/cell phone and

driving

CAUTION

Do not use a car phone/cell phone

while driving; it may distract your

attention from driving and can lead

to an accident. If you use a car

phone/cell phone, pull off the road

and park in a safe place before

using your phone. In some States/

Provinces, only hands-free phones

may legally be used while driving.

& Modification of your vehicle

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified

other than with genuine SUBARU

parts and accessories. Other types

of modifications could affect its

performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or

performance problems resulting

from modification may not be cov-

ered under warranties.

& Driving a vehicle equipped

with a navigation system

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distract

your attention from driving. Also, do

not operate the controls of the

navigation system while driving.

The loss of attention to driving

could lead to an accident. If you

wish to operate the controls of the

navigation system, first take the

vehicle off the road and stop it in a

safe place.

& Driving with pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your

driving and distract your attention from

driving. In a collision or sudden stop,

unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and hurt you or

your passengers. Besides, the pets can

be hurt under these situations. It is also for

their own safety that pets should be

properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-

strain a pet with a special traveling

harness which can be secured to the rear

seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier

which can be secured to the rear seat by

routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s

– CONTINUED –

handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers

in the front passenger’s seat. For further

information, consu lt your veterinarian,

local animal protection society or pet

shop.

& Tire pressures

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

Check and, if necessary, a djust the

pressure of each tire (including the spare)

at least once a month and before any long

journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are

cold.

Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire

pressures to the values shown on the tire

placard.

Refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in

chapter 11 for detailed information.

& California proposition 65

warning

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its consti-

tuents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids in vehicles and

certain components of product wear

contain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm.

& On-pavement and off-road

driving

This vehicle is classified as a utility

vehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantly

higher rollover rate than other types of

vehicles. Your vehicle has a higher ground

clearance and higher center of gravity,

making it more likely to roll over than

ordinary passenger cars. It also handles

and maneuvers differently from other

passenger cars. For this reason, please

read carefully the “On-pavement and off

road driving” section in chapter 8 of this

Owner’s Manual and follow the instruc-

tions and precautions in order to prevent

serious injury or death due to loss of

control, rollover and other accidents.

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Keys and doors

Instruments and controls

Climate control

Audio

Interior equipment

Starting and operating

Driving tips

In case of emergency

Appearance care

Maintenance and service

Specifications

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

Illustrated index

& Exterior

1) Engine hood lock release (page 11-4)

2) Headlight switch (page 3-26)

3) Bulb replacement (page 11-41)

4) Wiper switch (page 3-34)

5) Moonroof (page 2-24)

6) Roof rail (if equipped) (page 8-13)

7) Door locks (page 2-4)

8) Tire pressure (page 11-25)

9) Flat tires (page 9-6)

10) Tire chains (page 8-11)

11) Fog light switch (page 3-32)

12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-15)

13) Towing hook (page 9-15)

1) Rear gate (page 2-22)

2) Rear wiper switch (page 3-35)

3) Rear window defogger button

(page 3-37)

4) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-3)

5) Child safety locks (page 2-19)

6) Tie-down hooks (page 9-15)

7) Bulb replacement (page 11-41)

8) Towing hook (page 9-15)

– CONTINUED –

& Interior

! Passenger compartment area

1) Seatbelt (page 1-16)

2) Lower anchorages for chil d restraint

system (page 1-38)

3) Center console (page 6-6)

4) Front seat (page 1-2)

5) Second-row seat (page 1-7)

6) Third-row seat (page 1-13)

1) Cargo area light (page 6-2)

2) Dome lights (page 6-2)

3) Rear center seatbelt (page 1-23)

4) Sun visors (page 6-4)

5) Map light (page 6-3)

6) Top tether anchorages (rear seat/

second-row seat) (page 1-41)

7) Top tether anchorages (third-row seat)

(page 1-41)

– CONTINUED –

1) Selector lever (page 7-13)

2) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-5)

3) Multi function display (page 3-23)

4) Glove box (page 6-5)

5) Audio (page 5-1)

6) Climate control (page 4-1)

7) Cup holder (page 6-7)

& Instrument panel

1) Door locks (page 2-4)

2) Illumination brightness control

(page 3-28)

3) Remote control mirror switch (page 3-40)

Power folding mirror switch (if equipped)

(page 3-41)

4) Windshield wiper deicer (page 3-36)

5) Traction Control system OFF switch

(page 7-26)

6) Headligh t beam leveler (if equip ped)

(page 3-29)

7) Light control switch (page 3-26)

8) Combination meter (page 3-5)

9) Wiper control lever (page 3-33)

10) Cruise control (page 7-30)

11) Horn (page 3-42)

12) SRS airbag (page 1-44)

13) Tilt steering (page 3-41)

14) Hood lock release knob (page 11-4)

15) Fuse box (page 11-38)

16) Power windows (page 2-20)

– CONTINUED –

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches

1) Parking light switch (page 3-32)

2) Windshield wiper (page 3-33)

3) Mist (page 3-34)

4) Windshield washer (page 3-35)

5) Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 3-35)

6) Wiper intermittent time control switch

(page 3-34)

7) Wiper control lever (page 3-34)

8) Light control switch (page 3-26)

9) Fog light switch (page 3-32)

10) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-26)

11) Headlight flasher High/Low beam

change (page 3-27)

12) Turn signal (page 3-28)

& Combination meter

! U.S.-spec. vehicles

1) Temperature gauge (page 3-9)

2) Tachometer (page 3-7)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)

5) Trip meter and odometer

(page 3-6/page 3-7)

6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-7)

7) Selector lever/Gear position indicator

(page 3-20)

– CONTINUED –

! Except U.S.-spec. vehicles

1) Temperature gauge (page 3-9)

2) Tachometer (page 3-7)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)

5) Trip meter and odometer

(page 3-6/page 3-7)

6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-7)

7) Selector lever/Gear position ind icator

(page 3-20)

& Warning and indicator lights

Mark Name Page

Driver’s seatbelt warning

light

3-10

Front passenger’s seat-

belt warning light

3-10

SRS airbag system

warning light

3-11

CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction indi-

cator lamp

3-12

Charge warning light 3-13

Oil pressure warning light 3-13

AT OIL TEMP warning

light

3-13

/ ABS warning light 3-15

Brake system warning

light

3-16

Door open warning light

3-17

Mark Name Page

Low fuel warning light 3-17

All-Wheel Drive warning

light

3-18

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol operation indicator

light

3-18

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol warning light/Traction

Control system OFF in-

dicator light

3-18

Security indicator light 3-19

Turn signal indicator

lights

3-20

High beam indicator light 3-20

Front fog light indicator

light

3-21

Headlight indicator light 3-21

Cruise control indicator

light

3-20

Mark Name Page

Cruise control set indica-

tor light

3-21

Low tire pressure warn-

ing light

3-14

Passenger airbag ON in-

dicator light

3-12

Passenger airbag OFF

indicator light

3-12

SPORT mode indicator

light

3-20

Windshield washer fluid

warning light

3-18

Rear differential oil tem-

perature warning light

3-14

– CONTINUED –

& Cargo area

! 7-seater models

1) Jack handle (page 9-19)

2) Maintenance tools (page 9-19)

3) Jack (page 9-19)

4) Spare tire (page 9-5)

! 5-seater models

1) Jack handle (page 9-19)

2) Jack (page 9-19)

3) Maintenance tools (page 9-19)

4) Spare tire (page 9-5)

Function settings

A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine SUBARU navigation system, the settings for some of

these functions can be changed using the monitor. For details, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the navigation

system.

Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page

Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-15

Monitoring start delay time (after closure of

doors)

0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds 2-16

Impact sensor operation (only vehicles with

shock sensors (dealer option))

Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-19

Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-18

Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-8

Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-10

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-6

Rear window defogger Rear window defogger Operation for 15 minutes/Continuous

operation

Operation for 15

minutes

3-37

Windshield wiper deicer Windshield wiper deicer Operation for 15 minutes/Continuous

operation

Operation for 15

minutes

3-36

Map light/Dome light Operation in interlock with remote keyless

entry system

OFF/Short/Normal/Long Normal 6-2

Battery drainage prevention

function

Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-6

Front seats........................................................... 1-2

Power seat.......................................................... 1-3

Memory function (driver’s seat – if equipped)....... 1-4

Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-5

Active head restraint ........................................... 1-5

Lumbar support .................................................. 1-6

Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-6

Rear seats (5-seater models)/Second-row

seats (7-se ater models) ................................... 1-7

Forward and backward adjustment ...................... 1-8

Reclining the seatback ........................................ 1-9

Folding down the seatback.................................. 1-9

Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-11

Armrest ............................................................. 1-12

Third-row seat (7-seater models) ...................... 1-13

Access to the third-row seat ............................... 1-13

Folding down the seatback................................. 1-14

Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-15

Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-16

Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-16

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-17

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor

(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-17

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-18

Fastening the seatbelt........................................ 1-19

Seatbelt maintenance......................................... 1-27

Front seatbelt pretensioners............................. 1-28

System monitors ............................................... 1-29

System servicing ............................................... 1-30

Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-30

Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-31

Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-32

Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-33

Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR

seatbelt ........................................................... 1-34

Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-37

Installation of child restraint systems by use of

lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-38

Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-41

*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)................................................ 1-44

Your vehicle’s SRS configuration ....................... 1-44

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-48

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-58

SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-69

SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-70

Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-70

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing to avoid the possibility of

loss of vehicle control and of

personal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands and feet of rear

seat passengers or luggage are

clear of the adjusting mechan-

ism.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the fr ont seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

WARNING

Put children aged 12 and under in a

rear seat properly restrained at all

times. The SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force and

can injure or even kill children,

especially if they are 12 years of

age and under and are not re-

strained or improperly restrained.

Because children are lighter and

weaker than adults, their risk of

being injured from deployment is

greater. Consequently, we strongly

recommend that ALL children (in-

cluding those in child seats and

those that have outgrown child re-

straint devices) sit in a REAR seat

properly restrained at all times in a

child restraint device or in a seat-

belt, whichever is appropriate for

the child’s age, height and weight.

Always secure ALL types of child

restraint devices (including forward

facing child seats) in one of the rear

seating positions recommended in

this Owner’s Manual.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properl y

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning child restraint sys-

tems, refer to the “Child restraint

systems” section in this chapter.

& Power seat

! Forward and backward adjustment

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or back-

ward.

NOTE

During backward-forward adjustment

of the seat, you cannot adjust the seat

cushion angle or seat height.

! Reclining the seatback

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do not

place objects such as cushions

between the passenger and the

seatback. If you do so, the risk of

sliding under the lap belt and of the

lap belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

To adjust the angle of the seatback, move

the control switch.

! Seat cushion angle adjustment

(driver’s seat)

To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up

or push down the front end of the control

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3

– CONTINUED –

1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

switch.

! Seat height adjustment (driver’s

seat)

To adjust the seat height, pull up or push

down the rear end of the control switch.

& Memory function (driver’s

seat – if equipped)

Two of your favorite seat positions can be

registered. Register the seat position with

button “1” or “2” and retrieve the seat

position by pressing either button.

The following seat positions can be

registered:

. Forward/backward position of the seat

. Angle of seatback

. Angle of seat cushion

. Height of seat

! Registration of seat position

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing to avoid the possibility of

loss of vehicle control and of

personal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands and feet of rear

seat passengers or luggage are

clear of the adjusting mechan-

ism.

1. With the selector lever in the “P”

position, adjust the seat position.

2. While pressing the “SET” button, press

the desired button “1” or “2”.

3. The chime sounds once, and the seat

position is registered.

! Retrieval of seat position

WARNING

. Never retrieve the seat position

while driving to avoid the possi-

bility of loss of vehicle control

and of personal injury.

. Perform the seat position retrie-

val before driving. Be sure to

confirm that the selector lever

position is in the “P” position. Do

not drive until the retrieval of the

seat position is complete.

. Be sure to press the correct

button to retrieve your registered

seat position. If the seat position

is not optimum for you, it may

adversely affect your driving and

may reduce the effectiveness of

the seatbelt. That could result in

an accident involving serious

injury or death.

. When retrieving a registered seat

position, make sure the hands,

feet and possessions of rear seat

passengers are clear of the seat

adjusting mechanism.

. When any trouble or a malfunc-

tion occurs during the retrieval of

the seat position, stop the retrie-

val of the seat position using any

of the control switches for man-

ual adjustment, seat memory set

button, seat memory registered

button 1 or 2.

1. With the selector lever in the “P”

position, press the desired button “1” or

“2”.

2. The chime sounds once and the seat

moves to the registered position.

3. When the seat moves to the registered

position, the chime sounds twice.

NOTE

. If a new position is registered for the

same button, the previous seat posi-

tion is deleted.

. Even if the battery is disconnected,

the registered seat position is not

deleted.

& Head restraint adjustment

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while

pressing the release button on the top of

the seatback.

The head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the risk

of serious neck injury in the event

that the vehicle is struck from the

rear.

& Active head restraint

The front seats of your vehicle are

equipped with active head restraints. They

automatically tilt forward slightly in the

event the vehicle is struck from the rear,

decreasing the amount of rearward head

movement and thus reducing the risk of

whiplash. For maximum effectiveness the

head restraint should be adjusted so that

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5

– CONTINUED –

1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

the center of the head restraint is closest

to the top of the occupant’s ears.

CAUTION

. Each active head restraint is

effective only when its height is

properly adjusted and the driver/

passenger sits in the correct

position on the seat.

. If your vehicle is involved in a

rear-end collision, have an

authorized SUBARU dealer in-

spect the active head restraints.

. The active head restraints may

not operate in the event the

vehicle experiences only a slight

impact in the rear.

. The active head restraints may be

damaged if they are pushed hard

from behind or subjected to

shock. As a result, they may not

function if the vehicle suffers a

rear impact.

& Lumbar support

Pull the lever forward or backward.

Pulling the lever forward will increase the

amount of support for your lower back.

Pulling the lever backward will decrease

the amount of support for your lower back.

Seat heater (if equipped)

The seat heater is equipped in the front

seats.

The seat heater operates when the igni-

tion switch is in the “ON” position.

The seat heater can be adjusted in three

levels. Press the button to activate the

seat heater. Each subsequent press of the

button will reduce the level. Pushing the

button four times or keeping the button

pressed for approximately 1 second will

turn the heater off. While the seat heater is

operating, its operating level is shown by

the number of illuminated indicators. To

warm the seat as quickly as possible, set

the heater with three indicators illumi-

nated.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed

enough or before you leave the vehicle,

be sure to turn the switch off.

CAUTION

. There is a possibility that people

with delicate skin may suffer

slight burns even at low tempera-

tures if they use the seat heater

for a long period of time. When

using the heater, always be sure

to warn the persons concerned.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates against heat,

such as a blanket, cushion, or

similar items. This may cause the

seat heater to overheat.

NOTE

Use of the seat heater for a long period

of time while the engine is not running

can cause battery discharge.

Rear seats (5-seat er models)/

Second-row seats (7-seater

models)

WARNING

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

Do not put cushions or any other

materials between occupants

and seatbacks or seat cushions.

If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap

belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result

in serious internal injury or

death.

. Before adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands and feet of the

rear seat passengers are clear of

the adjusting mechanism (7-sea-

ter models only).

CAUTION

Never adjust the seat while driving.

Doing so is dangerous as the seat

could move rapidly and you could

be injured.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

because it could tumble forward and

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7

– CONTINUED –

1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

injure passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

& Forward and backward ad-

justment

! 5-seater models

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to

the desired position. Then release the

lever and move the seat back and forth to

make sure that it is securely locked into

place.

! 7-seater models

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to

the desired position.

When the right seat or the left seat pair is

slid rearward, it stops partway at the lock

point so as not to trap the legs of

passengers sitting on the third-row seat.

It is possible to slide the seat or seat pair

further rearward by releasing the lock that

stops it. To do this, simultaneously pull the

lever under the outboard seat cushion and

turn the lever on the side of the seat

cushion outward when sliding the seat or

seat pair.

Once you have released the lock, you can

slide the seat or seat pair back and forth

with only the lever under the seat cushion

pulled. If you slide the seat or seat pair

forward of the lock point, you will need to

release the lock again before you can

slide it behind the point.

Then release the lever and move the seat

back and forth to make sure that it is

securely locked into place.

CAUTION

If you slide the seat or seat pair aft

of the lock point while the third-row

seat is occupied, be careful not to

trap the legs of the third-row pas-

sengers.

& Reclining the seatback

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do not

place objects such as cushions

between the passenger and the

seatback. If you do so, the risk of

sliding under the lap belt and of the

lap belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

CAUTION

. In a 7-seater model vehicle, never

allow the third-row seat passen-

gers to adjust the seatback of the

second row. Doing so is danger-

ous as the seatback will tilt

rapidly and could injure the pas-

sengers.

. If the cargo area cover is

equipped, be careful not to pinch

your hand between the headrest

and the cargo area cover when

you recline the rear seat.

Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback

to the desired position.

Then release the lever and make sure the

seatback is securely locked into place.

& Folding down the seatback

WARNING

. After returning the seat to its

original position, be certain to

place all of the seatbelts and the

tab attached to the seat cushion

above the seat cushion. And

make certain that the shoulder

belts are fully visible.

. Never allow passengers to ride

on the folded seatback or in the

cargo area. Doing so may result

in serious injury or death.

. Secure skis and other lengthy

items properly to prevent them

from being thrown around inside

the vehicle and causing serious

injury during a sudden stop, a

sudden steering maneuver or a

rapid acceleration.

. If passengers are sitting on the

third-row seat, never drive while

folding the second-row seat. It

can be a serious interference at

the time of braking and impact.

. If passengers are sitting on the

third-row seat, never drive while

the center seatback of the sec-

ond-row seat is folded. Doing so

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9

– CONTINUED –

1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

may result in serious injury in the

event of a hard braking or an

impact.

1. Slide the seat or seat pair to its

rearmost position.

2. Lower the head restraint to its lowest

position. Refer to the “Head restraint

adjustment” in this section.

3. Unlock the seatback by pulling the

lever and then fold the seatback down.

4. To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it locks

into place. Make sure it is securely locked.

By pulling the tab on the center seat, you

can fold only the seatback of the center

seat.

To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it locks

into place. Make sure it is securely locked.

1) Bar

CAUTION

. Folding the seatback of the cen-

ter seat will expose the bar that

retains it in the raised position.

Be careful not to hurt yourself on

it. Especially, do not rest your

finger on the bar. Otherwise,

when the seatback is raised, your

finger could be pinched between

the bar and seatback and thus

injured.

. Raise the seatback of the center

seat while taking care not to trap

your hands or other parts of the

body between the center seat

and window-side seat.

NOTE

1) Holder

With the seatback folded, attach the

tongue plate of each rear/second-row

seatbelt to the corresponding holder.

Do the same also before someone gets

into the third-row seat.

& Head restraint adjustment

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the risk

of serious neck injury in the event

that the vehicle is struck from the

rear.

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to

be used at the l owest position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to an appropriate

position depending on your sitting

height.

! Window side seats

A) When not used (retracted position)

B) When used (extended position)

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11

– CONTINUED –

1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

To lower:

Push the head re straint down while

pressing the release button on the top of

the seatback.

The head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

When the seats are not occupied, lower

the head restraints to improve rearward

visibility.

! Center seat

A) When not used (retracted position)

B) When used (extended position)

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while

pressing the release button on the top of

the seatback.

The head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

When the center seat is not occupied,

lower the head restraint to improve rear-

ward visibility.

& Armrest

To lower the armrest, pull on the strap of

the armrest.

WARNING

To avoid the possibility of serious

injury, passengers must never be

allowed to sit on the center armrest

while the vehicle is in motion.

Third-row seat (7-seater

models)

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits well

back and upright in the seat. Do not

put cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks

or seat cushions. If you do so, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both can

result in serious internal injury or

death.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

because it could tumble forward and

injure passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

& Access to the third-row seat

There are levers on both sides of the

second-row seat. Each lever is used to

facilitate access to the third-row seat.

WARNING

In its slid-forward position with the

seatback tipped forward, the sec-

ond-row seat is not locked and free

to move. Do not drive the vehicle

with the seat in this state or allow

anyone to sit on the seat unless it is

completely locked. Doing so may

result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION

When getting into or out of the third-

row seat, make sure the second-row

seat is in the completely slid-for-

ward position and be sure to watch

your step.

! To access the third-row seat

Raise the lever. The seatback of the

second-row seat will tip forward and the

seat will slide forward.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13

– CONTINUED –

1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/

aft position of the second-row seat, raise

the seatback, and make sure the seatback

is securely locked in position.

! To get out from the third-row seat

Raise the lever from the third-row seat.

The seatback of the second-row seat will

tip forward and the seat will slide forward.

Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/

aft position of the second-row seat, raise

the seatback, and make sure the seatback

is securely locked in position.

& Folding down the seatback

WARNING

. After returning the seat to its

original position, be certain to

place all of the seatbelts and the

tab attached to the seat cushion

above the seat cushion. And

make certain that the shoulder

belts are fully visible.

. Never allow passengers to ride

on the folded seatback or in the

cargo area. Doing so may result

in serious injury or death.

. Secure skis and other lengthy

items properly to prevent them

from being thrown around inside

the vehicle and causing serious

injury during a sudden stop, a

sudden steering maneuver or a

rapid acceleration.

Place the head restraint in its lowest

position, pull up the lever to release the

seatback lock, and fold down the seat-

back. Refer to “Head restraint adjustment”

in this section.

To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it locks

into place. Make sure it is securely locked.

NOTE

1) Holder

. Before folding or raising the seat-

back of the third-row seat, confirm that

the seatbelt is flat against the sidewall

at the lower point and the webbing is

attached to the holder.

. When raising the seatback of the

third-row seat, if the seatbelt catches

on the seatback, hold the belt forward

of the seatback while latching the

seatback.

& Head restraint adjustment

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the risk

of serious neck injury in the event

that the vehicle is struck from the

rear.

A) When not used (retracted position)

B) When used (extended position)

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while

pressing the release button on the top of

the seatback.

The head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

When the seats are not occupied, lower

the head restraints to improve rearward

visibility.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15

– CONTINUED –

1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to

be used at the lowest position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to an appropriate

position depending on your sitting

height.

Seatbelts

& Seatbelt safety tips

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. All belts should fit snugly in order

to provide full restraint. Loose

fitting belts are not as effective in

preventing or reducing injury.

. E ach seatbelt is designed to

support only one person. Never

use a single belt for two or more

persons – even children. Other-

wise, in an accident, serious

injury or death could result.

. Replace all seatbelt assemblies

including retractors and attach-

ing hardware worn by occupants

of a vehicle that has been in a

serious accident. The entire as-

sembly should be replaced even

if damage is not obvious.

. Put children aged 12 and under in

a rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag de -

ploys with considerable speed

and force and can injure or even

kill children, especially if they are

12 years of age and under and

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is gre ater. Conse-

quently, we strongly recommend

that ALL children (including

those in child seats and those

that have outgrown child re-

straint devices) sit in a REAR

seat properly restrained at all

times in a child restraint device

or in a seatbelt, whichever is

appropriate for the child’s height

and weight.

Always secure ALL types of child

restraint devices (including for-

ward facing child seats) in one of

the rear seating positions recom-

mended in this Owner’s Manual.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE

FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seat-

ing positions. For instructions

and precautions concerning the

child restraint system, refer to

the “Child restraint systems”

section in this chapter.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the

driver and front passenger when any of

the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags

deploy.

! Infants or small children

Use a child restraint system that is

suitable for your vehicle. Refer to the

information on “ Child restraint systems” in

this chapter.

! Children

If a child is too big for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear seat

and be restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions. Never allow a child to

stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses

the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt

anchor height (window-side seating posi-

tions only) and then if necessary move the

child closer to the belt buckle to help

provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must

be taken to securely place the lap belt as

low as possible on the hips and not on the

child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the

belt cannot be properly positioned, a child

restraint system should be used. Never

place the shoulder belt under the child’s

arm or behind the child’s back.

! Expectant mothers

Expectant mothers also need to use the

seatbelts. They should consult their doctor

for specific recommendations. The lap belt

should be worn securely and as low as

possible over the hips, not over the waist.

& Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ELR)

The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows

normal body movement but the retractor

locks automatically during a sudden stop,

impact or if you pull the belt very quickly

out of the retractor.

& Automatic/Emergency Lock-

ing Retractor (A/ELR)

Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-

matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/

ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking

Retractor normally functions as an Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/

ELR has an additional locking mode

“Auto matic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode” intended to secure a child restraint

system. When the seatbelt is once drawn

out completely and is then retracted even

slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in

that position and the seatbelt cannot be

extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks

will be heard which indicate the retractor

functions as ALR. When the seatbelt is

retracted fully, ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system on

the passengers’ seats, the seatbelt must

be changed over to the Automatic Locking

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17

– CONTINUED –

1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Retractor (ALR) mode.

When the child restraint system is re-

moved, make sure that the retractor is

restored to the Emergency Locking Re-

tractor (ELR) functi on by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

For instructions on how to convert the

retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to

the ELR mode, refer to the “Installing child

restraint systems with A/EL R seatbelt”

section in this chapter.

& Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver

and front passenger to fasten their seat-

belts by illuminating the warning lights in

the locations indicated in the following

illustrations and sounding a chime.

Driver’s warning light

Front passenger’s warning light

! Operation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/

has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will

flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the

seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-

ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will

also sound simultaneously.

NOTE

. If the driver’s and/or front passen-

ger’s seatbelt(s) is/are still not fastened

6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning

device operates as follows according

to the vehicle speed.

. At speeds lower th an approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

steady illumination and flashing at

15-second intervals. The chime will

not sound.

. At speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

flashing and steady illumination at

15-second intervals and the chime

will sound while the warning light(s)

is/are flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warning

operation tha t follows the 6-sec ond

warning after turning ON the ignition

switch . When the ignition switch is

turned ON next time, however, the

complete sequence of the warning

operation resumes. For further details

about canceling the warning operation,

please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If there is no passenger on the front

passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning

device for the front passenger’s seat will

be deactivated. The fr ont passenger’s

occupant detection system monitors

whether or not there is a passenger on

the front passenger’s seat.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may prevent the device from

functioning correctly or cause the device

to fail.

. Do not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat/second-row

seat occupant to place his/her hands or

legs on the front passenger’s seatback, or

allow him/her to pull the seatback.

If the seatbelt warning device for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is

deactivated even when the front passen-

ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),

take the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system

and the child occupant.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

If the seatbelt warning device for front

passenger’s seat still does not function

correctly after taking relevant corrective

actions described above, immediately

contact you r SUB ARU dea ler f or an

inspection.

& Fastening the seatbelt

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury.

. Keep the lap belt as low as

possible on your hips. In a colli-

sion, this spreads the force of the

lap belt over stronger hip bones

instead of acr oss the weaker

abdomen.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the front seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

. Do not put cushions or any other

materials between occupants

and seatbacks or seat cushions.

If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap

belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result

in serious internal injury or

death.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-19

– CONTINUED –

1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt under

the arm or behind the back. If an

accident occurs, this can increase

the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can

become very hot in a vehicle that

has been closed up in sunny weath-

er; they could burn an occupant. Do

not touch such hot parts until they

cool.

! Front seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position:

Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the

upright position. Move the seatback as far

from the steering wheel as practical while

still maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-

back to the upright position. Move the seat

as far back as possible.

2. Sit well back in the seat.

3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If

the belt stops before reaching the buckle,

return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips, not on your waist.

! Adjusting the front seat shoulder

belt anchor height

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for the

driver/front passenger. Always adjust the

anchor height so that the shoulder belt

passes over the middle of the shoulder

without touching the neck.

To raise:

Slide the anchor up.

To lower:

Push the release button and slide the

anchor down.

Pull down on the anchor to make sure that

it is locked in place.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoulder portion of the

webbing does not pass over your

neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt

anchor to a lower position. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that

the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear seatbelts (5-seater models)/

Second-row seatbelts (7-seater

models) – excluding center seatbelt

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If

the belt stops before reaching the buckle,

return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after giving a

strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly

again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21

– CONTINUED –

1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips, not on your waist.

! Adjusting the shoulder belt anchor

height (rear seats of 5-seater mod-

els/second-row seats of 7-seater

models)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for the

passenger. Always adjust the anchor

height so that the shoulder belt passes

over the middle of the shoulder without

touching the neck.

To raise:

Slide the anchor up.

To lower:

Push the release button and slide the

anchor down.

Pull down on the anchor to make sure that

it is locked in place.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoulder portion of the

webbing does not pass over your

neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt

anchor to a lower position. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that

the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

NOTE

1) Holder

With the seatback folded, attach the

tongue plate of each rear/second-row

seatbelt to the corresponding holder.

Do the same also before someone gets

into the third-row seat.

! Rear center seatbelt (5-seater mod-

els)/second-row center seatbelt (7-

seater models)

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate

2) Connector (tongue)

3) Connector (buckle)

4) Center seatbelt buckle

WARNING

Fastening the seatbelt with the web-

bing twisted can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

When fastening the belt after it is

pulled out from the retractor, espe-

cially when inserting the connec-

tor’s tongue plate into the mating

buckle (on right-hand side), always

check that the webbing is not

twisted.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23

– CONTINUED –

1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING

Be sure to fasten both tongue plates

to the respective buckles. If the

seatbelt is used only as a shoulder

belt (with the connector’s tongue

plate not fastened to the connec-

tor’s buckle on the right-hand side),

it cannot properly restrain the wear-

er in position in an accident, possi-

bly resulting in serious injury or

death.

Center seatbelt is stowed in the recess of

the ceiling.

1. Remove the connector (tongue) plate

from the slot located at the front of the

recess by pulling the connector (tongue)

plate rearward.

2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the

overhead retractor.

3. After confirming that the webbing is not

twisted, insert the connector (tongue)

attached at the webbing end into the

buckle on the right-hand side until a click

is heard. Make sure that the “ ” mark on

the connector (tongue) and the “

” mark

on the buckle are aligned.

If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it

out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be

unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after

giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly

again.

4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

in the center seatbelt buckle marked

“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it

clicks.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as

low as possible on your hips, not on your

waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the release button of the center

seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to

unfasten the seatbelt.

1. Insert a key or other hard pointed

object into the slot in the connector

(buckle) on the right-hand side and push

it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will

disconnect from the buckle.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25

– CONTINUED –

1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

2. With the belt held by hand, allow the

retractor to roll up the belt slowly. You

should hold the webbing end and guide it

back into the retractor while it is rolling up.

Neatly store the tongue plate in the recess

on the ceiling and then insert the con-

nector (tongue) plate into the slot located

at the front of the recess.

CAUTION

. Do not allow the retractor to roll

up the seatbelt too quickly.

Otherwise, the metal tongue

plates may hit against the trim,

resulting in damaged trim.

. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up

so that the tongue plates are

neatly stored. A hanging tongue

plate can swing and hit against

the trim during driving, causing

damage to the trim.

! Third-row seatbelt (7-seater mod-

els)

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If

the belt stops before reaching the buckle,

return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after giving a

strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly

again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

NOTE

1) Holder

. Before folding or raising the seat-

back of the third-row seat, confirm that

the seatbelt is flat against the sidewall

at the lower point and the webbing is

attached to the holder.

. When raising the seatback of the

third-row seat, if the seatbelt catches

on the seatback, hold the belt forward

of the seatback while latching the

seatback.

& Seatbelt maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap

and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye

the belts because this could seriously

affect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments

including the webbing and all hardware

periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,

tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.

Replace the seatbelts even if only minor

damage is found.

CAUTION

. Keep the belts free of polishes,

oils, chemicals and particularly

battery acid.

. Never attempt to make modifica-

tions or changes that will prevent

the seatbelt from operating prop-

erly.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27

1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seatbelt pretensioners

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-

belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The

seatbelt pretensioners for the driver’s seat

and front passenger’s seat operate at the

same time as the frontal, and side SRS

airbags. If the vehicle rolls over, they

operate simultaneously with the curtain

airbag.

The front and side airbag sensors and the

rollover sensor are used as the preten-

sioner sensors. If a sensor detects a

certain predetermined amount of force

during a frontal collision, a side impact

collision or a rollover collision of the

vehicle, the front seatbelt is quickly drawn

back in by the retractor to take up the

slack so that the belt more effectively

restrains the front seat occupant.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt retractor remains

locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not

be pulled out and retracted and therefore

must be replaced.

NOTE

. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-

signed to activate in minor frontal

impacts, in minor side impacts or rear

impacts.

. The seatbelt pretensioners for the

driver ’s seat and front passenger’s

seat operate at the same time as the

frontal, and side SRS airbags. If the

vehicle rolls over, they operate simul-

taneously with the curtain airbag.

. Pretensioners are designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis. In the

event that a pretensioner is activated,

both the driver’s and front passenger’s

seatbelt retractor assemblies must be

replaced and only by an authorized

SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-

belt retractor assemblies, use only

genuine SUBARU parts.

. If either front seatbelt does not

retract or cannot be pulled out due to

a malfunction or activation of the

pretensioner, contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-

bly or surrounding area has been

damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to explain to the buyer that it has

seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him

to the contents of this section.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection,

occupants should sit in an up-

right position with their seatbelts

properly fastened. Refer to the

“Seatbelts” section in this chap-

ter.

. Do not modify, remove or strike

the front seatbelt retractor as-

semblies or surrounding area.

This could result in accidental

activation of the seatbelt preten-

sioners or could make the sys-

tem inoperative, possibly result-

ing in serious injury. Seatbelt

pretensioners have no user-ser-

viceable parts. For required ser-

vicing of front seatbelt retractors

equipped with seatbelt preten-

sioners, see your nearest

SUBARU dealer.

. When discarding front seatbelt

retractor assemblies or scrap-

ping the entire vehicle due to

collision damage or for other

reasons, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

& System monitors

SRS airbag system warning light

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner

while the vehicle is being driven. The

seatbelt pretensioners share the control

module with the airbag system. Therefore,

if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt

pretensioner, the SRS airbag system

warning light will illuminat e. The SRS

airbag system w arning light will show

normal system operation by lighting for

approximately 6 seconds when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.

The following components are monitored

by the indicator:

. Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

. Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

. Airbag control module (including im-

pact and rollover sensors)

. Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

. Frontal airbag module (front passen-

ger ’s side)

. Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

. Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-

hand side)

. Side airbag module (driver’s side)

. Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

. Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel

house right-hand side)

. Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel

house left-hand side)

. Curtain airbag module (right side)

. Curtain airbag module (left side)

. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

. Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen -

ger’s side)

. Seatbelt buckle switch (driver’s side)

. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-

ger’s side)

. Driver’s seat position sensor

. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension

sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module

. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator

. All related wiring

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system. Immediately take your vehi-

cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer

to have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will operate improperly (e.g.

SRS airbags may inflate in a very

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29

– CONTINUED –

1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

minor collision or not inflate in a

severe collision), which may in-

crease the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

& System servicing

WARNING

. When discarding a seatbelt re-

tractor assembly or scrapping

the entire vehicle damaged by a

collision, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

. Tampering with or disconnecting

the system’s wiring could result

in ac cidental activation of the

seatbelt pretensioner and/or air-

bag or could make the system

inoperative, which may result in

serious injury. Do not use elec-

trical test equipment on any

circuit rel ated to the seat belt

pretensioner and airbag sys-

tems. For required servicing of

the seatbelt pretensioner, see

your nearest SUBARU dealer.

CAUTION

The front sub sensors are located

on both sides of the radiator panel,

and the airbag control module in-

cluding the impact sensors is lo-

cated under the center console. If

you need service or repair in those

areas or near the front seatbelt

retractors, we recommend that you

have an authorized SUBARU dealer

perform the work.

NOTE

If the front part of the vehicle is

damaged in an accident to the extent

that the seatbelt pretensioner does not

operate, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

& Precautions against vehicle

modification

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts to

your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. S uch modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the seatbelt pretensioners.

. Attach ment of any equipme nt

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the door

pillar or specified for individual

vehicle models in this Owner’s

Manual.

Child restraint systems

While riding in the vehicle, infants and

small children should always be placed in

an infant or child restraint system in one of

the rear seating positions recommended

in this Owner’s Manual.

You should use an infant or child restraint

system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-

cle Safety Standards, is compatible with

your vehicle and is appropriate for the

child’s age and size.

All child restraint systems are designed to

be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or

the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt

(except those covered under the section in

this manual, entitled “Installation of child

restraint systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)” ).

Children could be endangered in an

accident if their child restraints are not

properly secured in the vehicle. When

installing the child restraint system, care-

fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint

system at all times while the vehicle is

moving.

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child

on his or her lap while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot pro-

tect the child from injury in a colli-

sion, because the child will be

caught between the passenger and

objects inside the vehicle. Addition-

ally, holding a child in your lap or

arms in the front seat exposes that

child to another serious danger.

Since the SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force, the

child could be injured or even killed.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31

– CONTINUED –

1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING

Children should be properly re-

strained at all times. Never allow a

child to stand up, or to kneel on any

seat. Unrestrained children will be

thrown forward during sudden stop

or in an accident and can be injured

seriously.

Additionally, children standing up or

kneeling on or in front of the front

seat are exposed another serious

danger. Since the SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed and

force, the child could be injured or

even killed.

& Where to place a child re-

straint system

The following are SUBARU’s recommen-

dations on where to place a child restraint

system in your vehicle.

A: Front passenger’s seat

You should not install a child restraint

system (including a booster seat) due to

the hazard to children posed by the

passenger’s airbag.

B: Rear outboard seats (5-seater mod-

els)/second-row outboard seats (7-sea-

ter models)

Recommended positions for all types of

child restraint systems.

In these positions, Automatic/Emergency

Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and

lower anchorages (bars) are provided for

installing a child restraint system.

Some types of child restraints might not be

able to be secured firmly due to projection

of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Rear center seat (5-seater models)/

second-row center seat (7-seater mod-

els)

Installing a child restraint system is not

recommended, although the A/ELR seat-

belt and a n upper anchorage (tethe r

anchorage) are provided in this position.

Some types of child restraints might not be

able to be secured firmly due to projection

of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

D: Third-row seat (7-seater models)

Installing a child restraint system is not

recommended, although the A/ELR seat-

belt and two upper anchorages (tether

anchorages) are provided in these posi-

tions.

These seating positions are not equipped

with lower anchorages (bars) for installing

LATCH system-type child restraints. How-

ever, child restraint devices can be used in

these position using the A/ELR seatbelts

and upper anchorages (tether an-

chorages) provided.

Some types of child restraints might not be

able to be secured firmly due to projection

of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

WARNING

Put children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill children,

especially if they are 12 years of age

and under and are not restrained or

improperly restrained. Because chil-

dren are lighter and weaker than

adults, their risk of being injured

from deployment is greater.

Consequently, be sure to secure

ALL types of child restraint devices

(including forward facing child

seats) in the REAR seats at all times.

You should choose a restraint de-

vice which is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. Ac-

cording to accident statistics, chil-

dren are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions.

WARNING

SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS

EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S

SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A

REARWARD FACING CHILD

SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-

SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’SHEADTOOCLOSETO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

& Choosing a child restraint

system

Choose a child restraint system that is

appropriate for the child’s age and size

(weight and height) in order to provide the

child with proper protecti on. The chi ld

restraint system should meet all applic-

able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi-

cle Safety Standards for United States or

Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

for Canada. It can be identified by looking

for the label on the child restraint system

or the manufacturer’s statement of com-

pliance in the document attached to the

system. Also it is important for you to

make sure that the child restraint system

is compatible with the vehicle in which it

will be used.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33

– CONTINUED –

1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

& Installing child restraint sys-

tems with A/ELR seatbelt

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

! Installing a rearward facing child

restraint

1. Slide the seat or seat pair to its

rearmost position.

2. Adjust the seatback to the upright

position.

3. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind

into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the

retractor functions as ALR.

8. Push and pull the child restraint

system forward and from side to side to

check if it is firmly secured.

Sometimes a child restraint can be more

firmly secured by pushing it down into the

seat cushion and then tightening the

seatbelt.

9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

10. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’SSEAT.DOINGSO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE

SRS AIRBAG.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by retracting the

seatbelt fully.

! Installing forward facing child re-

straint

1. Sli de the seat or seat pair to i ts

rearmost position.

2. Adjust the seatback to the uprigh t

position.

3. Place the child restraint system in the

seating position.

4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-35

– CONTINUED –

1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind

into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the

retractor functions as ALR.

8. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, move it back and forth

and right and left to check if it is firmly

secured. Sometimes a child restraint can

be more firmly secured by pushing it down

into the seat cushion and then tightening

the seatbelt.

9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

Rear seat (5-seater models)/Second-row

seat (7-seater models)

Third-row seat (7-seater models)

10. If the child restraint system requires a

top tether, latch the hook onto the top

tether anchor and tighten the top tether.

Refer to “Top tether anchorages” for

additional instructions.

11. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

& Installing a booster seat

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

1. Sli de the seat or seat pair to i ts

rearmost position.

2. Place the booster seat in the rear

seating position and sit the child on it. The

child should sit well back on the booster

seat.

3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the booster seat and the child

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click. Take care not to

twist the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the center of child’s shoulder and

that the lap belt is positioned as low as

possible on the child’s hips.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37

– CONTINUED –

1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

5. To remove the booster seat, press the

release button on the seatbelt buckle and

allow the belt to retract.

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury to the child.

. Never place the shoulder belt

under the child’s arm or behind

the child’s back. If an accident

occurs, this can increase the risk

or severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly in

order to provide full restraint.

Loose fitting belts are not as

effective in preventing or redu-

cing injury.

. Place the lap belt as low as

possible on the child’s hips. A

high-positioned lap belt will in-

crease the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen, and

both can result in serious inter-

nal injury or death.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. Placing the

shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sud-

den braking or in a collision.

& Installation of child restraint

systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it i s held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

Some types of child restraint systems can

be installed in a rear seating position of

your vehicle without use of the seatbelts.

Such child restraint systems are secured

to the dedicated anchorages provided on

the vehicle body.

The lower and tether anchora ges are

sometimes referred to as the LATCH

system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren).

Your vehicle is provided with child restraint

system anchors as follows:

. Four lower a nchorages ( bars) and

three upper anchorages (tether an-

chorages) on th e rear sea t (5-seate r

model)/second-row seat (7-seater model)

Lower anchorages for child restraints are

provided in the following locations:

. 5-seater models: on the rear seats

. 7-seater models: on the second-row

seats

For each window-side seating position,

two lower anchorages are provided.

Each lower anchorage is located where

the seat cushion meets the seatback.

The tether anchorages (upper an-

chorages) are provided for all the seating

positions of the rear seat (5-seater mod-

els)/second-row seat (7-seater models).

On each outboard rear/second-row seat,

you will find marks “

” at the bottom of the

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39

– CONTINUED –

1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

seatback.

Each lower anchorage is located where

the seat cushion meets the seatback.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

1. Slide the seat or seat pair to its

rearmost position.

2. Make the clearance between the seat

cushion and seatback a little wider to

locate the two anchorages (bars) for the

position where you want to install the child

restraint system.

3. While following the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint system manu-

facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the

lower anchorages located at “

” marks on

the bottom of the seatback. When the

hooks are connec ted, ma ke sure the

adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

4. [If your child restraint system is of a

flexible attachment type (which uses

tether belts to connect the child restraint

system properly to the lower anchorages)]

While pushing the child restraint into the

seat cushion, pull both left and right lower

tether belts up to secure the child restraint

system firmly by taking up the slack in the

belt.

5. Connect the top tether hook to the

tether anchorage and firmly tighten the

tether.

For information on how to set the top

tether, Refer to the following “Top tether

anchorages” section.

6. Before seating a child in the child

restraint system, try to move seat back

and forth and left and right to verify that it

is held securely in position.

7. To remove the child restraint system,

follow the reverse procedures of installa-

tion.

If you have any question concerning this

type of child restraint system, ask your

SUBARU dealer.

& Top tether anchorages

Your vehicle is equipped with three top

tether anchorages (five in the 7-seater

models) so that a child restraint system

having a top tether can be installed in a

rear seating position. When installing a

child restraint system using top tether,

proceed as follows, while observing the

instructions by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional

stability by offering another connection

between a child restraint system and the

vehicle, we recommend that you use a top

tether whenever one is required or avail-

able.

! Tether anchorage location

! Rear seat (5-seater models)/Second-

row seat (7-seater models)

Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the

right, center and left seats, are already

installed on the back of each seatback.

Open the cover flap to use each ancho-

rage.

! Third-row seat (7-seater models)

Two tether anchorages are attached to the

rear edge of the cargo area.

Open the cover flap to use each ancho-

rage.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-41

– CONTINUED –

1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! To hook the top tether

! Rear seat (5-seater models)/Second-

row seat (7-seater models)

1. Raise the head restraint to the highest

position at the seating position where the

child seat has been installed using the

seatbelt or lower anchorages; lift up the

head restraint while pressing the release

button.

2. Confirm that there are no obstacles

around the anchorages.

3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child

restraint system to the appropriate upper

anchorage.

4. Tighten the top tether securely.

CAUTION

When the child restraint system is to

be secured using the top tether,

pass the top tether under the head

restraint between the head restraint

stay posts.

CAUTION

Be sure to install the top tether with

the head restraint raised to the

highest position. If the head re-

straint is in any of the lower posi-

tions, the top tether will touch the

head restraint and the resulting

slack will prevent its secure installa-

tion.

CAUTION

Do not route the top tether over the

head restraint. It may happen that

the top tether cannot be fastened

tightly.

! Third-row seat (7-seater models)

1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest

position.

2. Open the lid of the cargo area, then

remove the covers for the anchorages.

3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child

restraint system to the appropriate upper

anchorage.

4. Tighten the top tether securely.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43

– CONTINUED –

1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

CAUTION

Do not pass the top tether under the

head restraint. The top tether will

touch the head restraint and the

resulting slack will prevent its se-

cure installation.

CAUTION

Do not use the top tether with the

head restraint in a raised position,

otherwise the top tether cannot be

fastened tightly.

CAUTION

Prevent the top tether from touching

cargo in the cargo area. The top

tether may become slack if the

cargo changes shape or moves.

*SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)

*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-

straint system. This name is used be-

cause the airbag system supplements the

vehicle’s seatbelts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the

driver and front passenger when any of

the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags

deploy.

& Your vehicle’s SRS config-

uration

The driver’s seat, the front passenger’s

seat, and the outboard seats of the rear/

second seating row of your vehicle are

each provided with, in addition to a lap/

shoulder belt, one or more airbags as

follows:

. Frontal airbag (one each for driver’s

seat and front passenger’s seat)

. Side airbag (one each for driver’s seat

and front passenger’s seat)

. Curtain airbag (one each for the out-

board sides of cabin, extending from

driver’s and front passenger’s seats to

rear/second seating row)

These SRS airbags are designed only

as a supplement to the primary protec-

tion provided by the seatbelt.

The system also controls front seatbelt

pretensioners. For operation instructions

and precautions concerning the seatbelt

pretensioner, refer to the “Front seatbelt

pretensioners” section in this chapter.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers in the

vehicle should always wear seat-

belts when the vehicle is moving.

The SRS airbag is designed only

as a supplement to the primary

protection provided by the seat-

belt. It does not do away with the

need to fasten seatbelts. In com-

bination with the seatbelts, it

offers the best combined protec-

tion in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the seatbelt system,

refer to the “Seatbelts” section in

this chapter.

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the SRS airbag. Because

the SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed – faster than

the blink of an eye – and force to

protect in high speed collisions,

the force of an airbag can injure

an occupant whose body is too

close to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid i njuries

that can result when the SRS

airbag contacts an occupant not

in proper position such as one

thrown forward during pre-acci-

dent braking.

Even when properly positioned,

there remains a possibility that

an occupant may suffer minor

injury such as abrasions and

bruises to the face or arms

because of the SRS airbag de-

ployment force.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

. Do not place any objects over or

near the SRS airbag cover or

between you and the SRS airbag.

If the SRS airbag deploys, those

objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle and

cause injury.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45

– CONTINUED –

1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING

. Put children aged 12 and under in

a rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed

and force and can injure or even

kill children, especially if they are

12 years of age and under and

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

Consequently, we strongly re-

commend that ALL children (in-

cluding those in child seats and

those that have outgrown child

restraint devices) sit in a REAR

seat properly restrained at all

times in a child restraint device

or in a seatbelt, whichever is

appropriate for the child’s age,

height and weight.

Always secure ALL types of child

restraint devices (including for-

ward facing child seats) in one of

the rear seating positions recom-

mended in this Owner’s Manual.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seat-

ing positions.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the child restraint

system, refer to the “Child re-

straint systems” section in this

chapter.

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE

FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Never allow a child to stand up,

or to kneel on the front passen-

ger’s seat, or never hold a child

on your lap or in your arms. The

SRS airbag deploys with consid-

erable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

CAUTION

. When the SRS airbag deploys,

some smoke w ill be released.

This smoke could cause breath-

ing problems for people with a

history of asthma or other

breathing trouble. If you or your

passengers have breathing pro-

blems after SRS airbag deploys,

get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releases

hot gas. Occupants could get

burned if they come into direct

contact with the hot gas.

NOTE

When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to explain to the buyer that it is

equipped with SRS airbags by alerting

him or her to the applicable section in

this Owner’s Manual.

! Components

1) Airbag control module (including impact

and rollover sensors)

2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger ’s

side)

4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)

7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand

side)

9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

10) Airbag wiring

11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s

side)

13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side)

14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)

15) Curtain airbag module (right side)

16) Curtain airbag module (left side)

17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s

side)

18) Seatbelt buckle switch (driver’s side)

19) Driver’s seat position sensor

20) Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-

sor

21) Front passenger’s occupant detec tion

system weight sensor

22) Front passenger’s occupant detec tion

control module

23) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator

24) SRS airbag system warning light

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-47

– CONTINUED –

1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

& SUBARU advanced frontal

airbag system

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system that com-

plies with the new advanced frontal airbag

requirements in th e amended Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)

No. 208.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system automatically determines the de-

ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag at the time of deployment as well as

whether or not to activate the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if

activated, the deployment force of the

SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-

ment.

Your vehicle has warning labels on the

driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors

beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH

ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag

attached to the glove box lid beginning

with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air

Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read

the instructions on the warning labels and

tag.

Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system is a

supplemental restraint system and must

be used in combination with a seatbelt. All

occupants should wear a seatbelt or be

seated in an appropriate child restraint

system.

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed

in the center portion of the steering wheel.

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is stowed near the top of the dashboard

under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,

the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags deploy and supplement the

seatbelts by reducing the impact on the

driver’s and front passenger’s head and

chest.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE

FRONTSEAT.DOINGSORISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up, or to

kneel on the front passenger’s seat.

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or in

your arms. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable force and can

injure or even kill the child.

WARNING

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable speed and force. Occu-

pants who are out of proper position

when the SRS airbag deploys could

suffer ver y serious injuries. Be-

cause the SRS airbag needs enough

space for deployment, the driver

should always sit upright and well

back in the seat as far from the

steering wheel as practical while

still maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries that

can result when the SRS airbag

contacts an occupant not in proper

position such as one thrown toward

the front of the vehicle during pre-

accident braking.

WARNING

Do not put any objects over the

steering wheel pad and dashboard.

If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,

those objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be pro-

pelled inside the vehicle and cause

injury.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49

– CONTINUED –

1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING

Do not attach accessories to the

windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-

ror over the rear view mirror. If the

SRS airbag deploys, those objects

could become projectiles that could

seriously injure vehicle occupants.

! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a

dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in

different ways depending on the severity

of impact, backward-forward adjustment

of the driver’s seat position and whether or

not he/she is wearing the seatbelt.

The backward-forward adjustment of the

driver’s seat position is monitored by the

driver’s seat position sensor under the

driver’s seat.

Whether or not the driver is wearing the

seatbelt is monitored by the seatbelt

buckle switch.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may cause the seatbelt buckle

switch and/or the seat position sensor to

malfunction, preventing the SUBARU ad-

vanced frontal airbag system from func-

tioning correctly or causing the system to

fail.

. Do not place articles/metal objects or

install any accessory other than a genuine

SUBARU acces sory under the driver’s

seat. Do not allow the rear seat occupant

to kick the driver’s seat or push up its

bottom surface with his/her feet.

. Do not place a magnet near the

seatbelt buckle or under the driver’s seat.

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or the

driver’s seat position sensor have failed,

the SRS airbag system warning light will

illuminate. Although the driver ’sSRS

frontal airbag can deploy regardless of

the backward-forward adjustment of the

driver ’s seat position e ven when the

warning light illuminates, have the system

inspected by your SUBARU dealer im-

mediately if the SRS airbag system warn-

ing light illuminates.

NOTE

The driver ’s SRS side airbag, SRS

curtain airbag and seatbelt preten-

sioner are not controlled by the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-

tem.

! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator

operates in different ways depending on

the severity of impact.

The total load on the seat is monitored by

the occupant detection system’s weight

sensor located under the seat.

The system has another sensor that

monitors the tension of the front passen-

ger seatbelt. Using the total seat load and

seatbelt tension data from the sensors,

the occupant detection system determines

whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag should or should not be inflated.

The occupant detection system may not

inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys. This is normal.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may prevent the SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system from

functioning correctly or cause the system

to fail.

. Do not apply any strong impact to the

front passenger’s seat such as by kicking.

. Do not spill liquid on the front passen-

ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off

immediately.

. Do not remove or disassemble the front

passenger’s seat.

. Do not install any accessory (such as

an audio amplifier) other than a genuine

SUBARU accessory under the front pas-

senger’s seat.

. Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel-

la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.

. The front passenger’s seat must not be

used with the head restraint removed.

. Do not leave any article including a

child restraint system on the front passen-

ger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue and

buckle engaged when you leave your

vehicle.

. Do not place a magnet near the

seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front

passenger’s occupant detection system

have failed, the SRS airbag system

warning light will illuminate. Have the

system inspected by your SUBARU deal-

er immediately if the SRS airbag system

warning light illuminates.

If your vehicle has sustained impact, this

may affect the proper function of the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.

Have your vehicle i nspected at your

SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

The front passenger’s SRS side airbag,

SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre-

tensioner are not controlled by the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-

tem.

! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicators

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located in the center

portion of the instrument panel.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF

indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators turn

off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the

indicators illuminates depending on the

status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-

vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain off.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the p assenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator will remain off while

the OFF indicator will illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indica-

tors simultaneously remain illuminated or

off even after the system check period, the

system is malfunctioning. Contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-

spection.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51

– CONTINUED –

1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not

activated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will not be activated when any of the

following conditions are met regarding the

front passenger’s seat:

. The seat is empty.

. The seat is equipped with a rearward

facing child restraint system and an infant

is restrained with it. (See WARNING that

follows.)

. The seat is equipped with a forward

facing child restraint system and a small

child is restrained with it. (See WARNING

that follows.)

. The seat is equipped with a booster

seat and a small child is in the booster

seat. (See WARNING that follows.)

. The seat is relieved of the occupant

load for a time exceeding the predeter-

mined monitoring time period.

. The seat is occupied by a child who

has outgrown a child restraint sy stem

(See WARNING that follows.) or by a

small adult.

. The front passenger’s occupant detec-

tion system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE

FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-

TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be

sure to install it in one of the rear

seating positions recommended in

this Owner’s Manual in a correct

manner. Also, it is strongly recom-

mended that any forward facing

child seat or booster seat be in-

stalled in one of the rear seating

positions recommended in this

Owner ’s Manual, and that even

children who have outgrown a child

restraint system be also seated in a

REAR seat. This is because children

sitting in the front passenger’s seat

may be killed or severely injured

should the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats

are the safest place for children.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-

pied by a child, observe the following

precautions. Failure to do so may increase

the load on the front passenger’s seat,

activating the front passenger’sSRS

frontal airbag even though that seat is

occupied by a child.

. Do not place any article on the seat

other than the child occupant and a child

restraint system.

. Do not place more than one child on

the seat.

. Do not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear/second-row seat

occupant to place his/her hands or legs on

the front passenger’s seatback, or allow

him/her to pull the seatback.

! If the front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON indicator illuminates and the

OFF indicator turns off even when

an infant or a small child is in a child

restraint system (including booster

seat)

Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position if the front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator illuminates and the

OFF indicator turns off even when an

infant or a small child is in a child restraint

system (including booster seat). Remove

the child restraint system from the seat. By

referring to the child restraint manufac-

turer’s recommendations as well as the

child restraint system installation proce-

dures in the “Child restraint systems”

section in this chapter, correctly install

the child restraint system. Turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position and make sure

that the front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator turns off and the OFF

indicator illuminates.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off, take the

following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than the child restraint system

and the child occupant.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off after

taking relevant corrective actions de-

scribed above, relocate the child restraint

system to one of the rear seating positions

recommended in this Owner’s Manual and

immediately contact your SUBARU dealer

for an inspection.

NOTE

When a child who has outgrown a child

restraint system or a small adult is

seated in the front passenger’s seat,

the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system may or may not activate the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

depending on the occupant’s seating

posture. If the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag is activated (the ON

indicator remains illuminated while

the OFF indicator turns off), take the

following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on

the seat other than the occupant.

. Ensure that there is no article left in

the seatback pocket.

If the ON indicator still remains illumi-

nated while the OFF indicator turns off

despite the fact that the actions noted

above have been taken, seat the child/

small adult in the rear seat and im-

mediately contact your SUBARU dealer

for an inspection. Even if the system

has passed the dealer inspection, it is

recommended that on subsequent trips

the child/small adult always take the

rear seat.

Children who have outgrown a child

restraint system should always wear the

seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag

is deactivated or activated.

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will be activated for deployment upon

impact when any of the following condi-

tions is met regarding the front passen-

ger ’s seat.

. When the seat is occupied by an adult.

. When a heavy article is placed on the

seat.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-

pied by an adult, observe the following

precautions. Failure to do so may lessen

the load on the front passenger’s seat,

deactivating the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat

is occupied by an adult.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

lift the front passenger’s sea t cushion

using his/her feet.

. Do not place any article under the front

passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article

from behind and under the seat. This may

lift the seat cushion.

. Do not squeeze any article between

the front passenger’s seat and side trim/

pillar, door or center console box. This

may lift the seat cushion.

! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator illuminates and the ON

indicator turns off even when the

front passenger’s seat is occupied

by an adult

This can be caused by the adult incor-

rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.

Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position. Ask the front passenger to set

the seatback to the upright position, sit up

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53

– CONTINUED –

1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

straight in the center of the seat cushion,

correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/

her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to

the rearmost position. Turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF

indicator remains illuminated while the ON

indicator remains off, take the following

actions.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position.

. Ensure that there are no articles,

books, shoes, or other objects trapped

under the seat, at the rear of the seat, or

on the side of the seat.

. Next, turn the ignition switch to the

“ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow

the system to complete self-checking.

Following the system check, both indica-

tors turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON

indicator should illuminate while the OFF

indicator remains off.

If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-

nated while the ON indicator remains off,

ask the occupant to move to the rear seat

and immediately contact your SUBARU

dealer for an inspection.

! Effect vehicle modifications made

for persons with disabilities may

have on SUBARU advanced frontal

airbag system operation (U.S. only)

Changing or moving any parts of the front

seats, seatbelts, front bumper, front side

frame, instrument panel, combination me-

ter, steering wheel, steering column, tire,

suspension or floor panel can affect the

operation of the SUBARU advanced air-

bag system. If you have any questions,

you may contact the following SUBARU

distributors:

<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District

of Columbia>

Subaru of America, Inc.

Customer Dealer Services Department

P.O. Box 6000

Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000

1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii

2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,

HI 96819

808-839-2273

Trebol Motors

P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico

00910

787-793-2828

There are currently no SUBARU distribu-

tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are

in such an area, plea se con tact th e

SUBARU distributor or dealer from which

you bought your vehicle.

! Operation

1) Driver’s side

2) Passenger’s side

The SRS airbag can function only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system is designed to determine the

activation or deactivation condition of the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

depending on the total load on the front

passenger’s seat monitored by the front

passenger’s occupant detection system

weight sensor. For this reason, only the

driver’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in

the event of a collision, but this does not

mean failure of the system.

If the front sub sensors located on both

sides of the radiator panel and the impact

sensors in the airbag control module

detect a predetermined amount of force

during a frontal collision, the control

module sends signals to the airbag

module(s) (only driver’s module or both

driver’s and front passenger’s modules)

instructing the module(s) to inflate the

SRS frontal airbag(s). The driver’s and

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags use

dual stage inflators. The two inflators of

each airbag are triggered either sequen-

tially or simultaneously, depending on the

severity of impact, backward-forward ad-

justment of the driver’s seat position and

fastening/unfastening of the seatbelt in the

case of the driver’s SRS frontal airbag and

depending on the severity of impact and

the total load on the seat in the case of the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-

diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s

vision is not obstructed. The time required

from detecting impact to the deflation of

the SRS airbag after deployment is short-

er than the blink of an eye.

When only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag

deploys and both the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,

the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt

pretensioners operate at the same time.

Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS

airbag would activate in a non-accident

situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag

will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision

and will not interfere with the driver’s

ability to maintain control of the vehicle.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,

fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and

some smoke will be released. The se

occurrences are a normal result of the

deployment. This smoke does not indicate

a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag system

components around the steering

wheel and dashboard with bare

hands right after deployment. Doing

so can cause burns because the

components can be very hot as a

result of deployment.

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-

signed to deploy in the event of an

accident involving a moderate to severe

frontal collision. It is basically not designed

to deploy in lesser frontal impacts be-

cause the necessary protection can be

achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they

are basically not designed to deploy in

side or rear impacts or in rollover acci-

dents because deployment of only the

driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s

and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags

would not help the occupant in those

situations. The driver’s and front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to

function on a one-time-only basis.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the

level of force experienced in the passen-

ger compartment during a collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on

the visible damage done to the vehicle

itself.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55

– CONTINUED –

1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of accidents in which the

driver’s/driver’s and front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most

likely deploy.

A head-on collision against a thick con-

crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19

mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-

vated when the vehicle is exposed to a

frontal impact similar in fashion and

magnitude to the collision described

above.

! Examples of the types of accidents

in which it is possible that the

driver’s/driver’s and front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de-

ploy.

The only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or

both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags may be activated when the

vehicle sustains a hard impact in the

undercarriage area from the road surface

(such as when the vehicle plunges into a

deep ditch, is severely impacted or

knocked hard against an obstacle on the

road such as a curb).

! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s

and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur.

1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a

telephone pole or sign pole.

2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of

a truck.

3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset

frontal impact.

4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal

collision.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require deployment

of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of

accidents like those illustrated, the dri-

ver’s/driver ’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-

ing on the level of accident forces in-

volved.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57

– CONTINUED –

1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents

in which the driver’s/driver’s and

front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will basically not deploy.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags are designed basically not

to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the

side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its

side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-

speed frontal collision.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is

impacted more than once, the driver’s

and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first

impact.

Example: In the case of a double collision,

first with another vehicle, then against a

concrete wall in immediate succession,

once either or both of the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are

activated on the first impact, it/they will not

be activated on the second impact.

& SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door

side of each front seat seatback, which

bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.

Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact

collision, the SRS si de airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the door panel

and supplements the seatbelt by reducing

the impact to the occupant’s chest and

waist. The SRS side airbag operates only

for front seat occupants.

The SRS curtain airbag on each side of

the cabin is stored in the roof side

(between the front pillar and a point over

the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is

located at the top of each center pillar.

Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact

collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the side

window and supplements the seatbelt by

reducing the impact on the occupant’s

head.

In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both

sides of the vehicle deploy between the

occupant and the side window and sup-

plement the seatbelt by reducing the

impact to the occupant’s head.

In a 7-seater model vehicle, the SRS

curtain airbag does not operate for third-

row seat occupants.

WARNING

The SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are designed as only

a supplement to the primary protec-

tion provided by the seatbelt. They

do not do away with the need to

fasten seatbelts. It is also important

to wear your seatbelt to help avoid

injuries that can result when an

occupant is not seated in a proper

upright position.

WARNING

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to either front door. The

SRS side airbag is stored in both

front seat seatbacks next to the

door, and it provides protection

by deploying rapidly (faster than

the blink of an eye) in the event of

a side impact collision. However,

theforceofSRSsideairbag

deployment may cause injuries

if your head or other parts of the

body are too close to the SRS

side airbag.

. Since your vehicle is equipped

with SRS curtain airbags, do not

sit or lean unnecessarily close to

the front or rear door on either

side. Also, do not put your head,

arms and hands out of the win-

dow. The SRS curtain airbag on

each side of the cabin is stored in

the roof side (between the front

pillar and a point over the rear

seat), and it provides protection

by deploying rapidly (faster than

the blink of an eye) in the event of

a side impact or a rollover. How-

ever, the force of its deployment

may cause injuries if your head is

too close to it.

WARNING

Do not rest your arm on either front

door or its internal trim. It could be

injured in the event of SRS side

airbag deployment.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-59

– CONTINUED –

1-60 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING

. Never allow a child to kneel on

the front passenger’s seat facing

the side window or to wrap his/

her arms around the front seat

seatback. In the event of an

accident, the force of the SRS

side airbag deployment could

injure the child seriously be-

cause his/her head or arms or

other parts of the body are too

close to the SRS side airbag.

Since your vehicle is also

equipped with a front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children

aged 12 and under should be

placed in a rear seat anyway and

should be properly restrained at

all times.

. Never allow a child to kneel on

any passenger’s seat facing the

side window or put their head,

arms and hands out of the win-

dow. In the event of an accident,

the force of the SRS curtain

airbag deployment could injure

the child seriously because his/

her head is close to the SRS

curtain airbag.

WARNING

. Do not attach accessories to the

door trim or near either SRS side

airbags and do not place objects

near the SRS side airbags. In the

event of the SRS side airbag

deployment, they could be pro-

pelled dang erously toward the

vehicle’s occupants and cause

injuries.

. Do not attach a hands-free micro-

phone or any other accessory to

a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear

pillar, the windshield, a side win-

dow, an assist grip, or any other

cabin surface that would be near

a deploying SRS curtain airbag.

A hands-free microphone or

other accessory in such a loca-

tion could be propelled through

the cabin with great force by the

curtain airbag, or it could prevent

correct deployment of the curtain

airbag. In either case, the result

could be serious injuries.

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other

hard or pointed objects on the coat

hooks. If such items were hanging

on the coat hooks during deploy-

ment of the SRS curtain airbags,

they could cause serious injuries by

coming off the coat hooks and being

thrown through the cabi n or by

preventing deployment of the cur-

tain airbags.

Before hanging clothing on the coat

hooks, make sure there are no sharp

objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-

ing directly on the coat hooks with-

out using hangers.

WARNING

Do not put any kind of cover or

clothes or other objects over either

front seatback and do not attach

labels or stickers to the front seat

surface on or near the SRS side

airbag. They could prevent proper

deployment of the SRS side airbag,

reducing protection available to the

front seat’s occupant.

! Operation

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag can function only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

side airbags and SRS curtain airbags

deploy independently of each other since

each has its own impact sensor. There-

fore, they may not both deploy in the same

accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and

SRS curtain airbag deploys independently

of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags in the steering wheel and

instrument panel.

An impact sensor is located in each of the

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-61

– CONTINUED –

1-62 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

left and right center pillars and rear wheel

houses. In addition, the rollover sensor is

inside the airbag control module.

If a center pillar impact sensor senses an

impact force above a predetermined level

in a side collision, the control module

causes both the SRS side airbag and

curtain airbag on the impacted side to

inflate regardless of whether the rear

wheel house impact sensor on the same

side senses an impact. If it is a rear wheel

house impact sensor alone that senses a

sufficiently strong impact force, the control

module causes only the SRS curtain

airbag on the impacted side to inflate. If

the rollover sensor detects rollover of the

vehicle, the control module inflates the

curtain airbag.

After deployment, the SRS side airbag

immediately starts to deflate. The time

required from detection of an impact to

deflation of an SRS side airbag after

deployment is shorter than the blink of

an eye.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated

for a while following deployment then

slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag deploy even when no one occupies

the seat on the side on which an impact is

applied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud

inflation noise will be heard and some

smoke will be relea sed. These occur-

rences are a normal result of the deploy-

ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire

in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbag

system components around the

front seat seatback with bare hands

right after deployment. Doing so can

cause burns because the compo-

nents can be very hot as a result of

deployment.

After deployment, do not touch any

part of the SRS curtain airbag

system (from the front pillar to the

part of the roof side over the rear

seat). Doing so can cause burns

because the components can be

very hot as a result of deployment.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are designed to deploy in the event

of an accident involving a moderate to

severe side impact collision. Also, in the

case of a rollover, the SRS curtain airbag

deploys. They are basically not designed

to deploy in a lesser side impact. Also,

they are basically not designed to deploy

in frontal or rear impacts because SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

deployment would not help the occupant

in those situations.

Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are designed to function on a one-

time-only basis.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

deployment depend on the level of force

experienced in the passenger compart-

ment during a side impact collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on

the visible damage done to the vehicle

itself. Also, the SRS curtain airbag de-

ploys depending on the vehicle’s position

and inclination at the time of the rollover.

! Example of the type of accident in

which the SRS side airbag will most

likely deploy.

A severe side impact near the front seat

activates the SRS side airbag.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-63

– CONTINUED –

1-64 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most

likely deploy.

1) A severe side impact near the front seat

or the rear seat activates the SRS curtain

airbag.

2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

3) If the angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal

or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a

curbstone laterally.

! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side

airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy.

1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard

surface

2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

3) Landing hard or vehicle falling

It is possible that the SRS side and curtain

airbags will deploy if a serious impact

occurs to the underside of your vehicle.

Some examples are shown in the illustra-

tion.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-65

– CONTINUED –

1-66 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to

deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS side

airbag deployment. In the event of acci-

dents like those illustrated, the SRS side

airbag may not deploy depending on the

level of accident forces involved.

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely

to deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS curtain

airbag deployment. In the event of acci-

dents like those i llustrated, the SRS

curtain airbag may not deploy depending

on the level of accident forces involved.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-67

– CONTINUED –

1-68 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents

in which the SRS side airbag and

SRS curtain airbag will basically not

deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision

with another vehicle (moving or station-

ary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are basically not de signed to

deploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal

collision or is struck from behind. Exam-

ples of such accidents are illustrated.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

A) SRS curtain airbag

B) SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struck

from the side more than once, the SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy

only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double side

impact collision, first with one vehicle and

immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag are activated on

the first impact, they will not be activated

on the second.

! Example of the type of accident in

which the SRS curtain airbag will

basically not deploy.

The SRS curtain airbags are not basically

designed to deploy if the vehicle pitches

end over end.

& SRS airbag system monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the SRS airbag system

(including front seatbelt pretensioners)

while the vehicle is being driven. The

SRS airbag system warning light “AIR-

BAG” will show normal system operation

by lighting for approximately 6 seconds

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

The following components are monitored

by the indicator:

. Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

. Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

. Airbag control module (including im-

pact and rollover sensors)

. Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

. Frontal airbag module (front passen-

ger ’s side)

. Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

. Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-

hand side)

. Side airbag module (driver’s side)

. Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

. Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel

house right-hand side)

. Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel

house left-hand side)

. Curtain airbag module (right side)

. Curtain airbag module (left side)

. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

. Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-

ger ’s side)

. Seatbelt buckle switch (driver’s side)

. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-

ger ’s side)

. Driver’s seat position sensor

. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension

sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module

. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator

. All related wiring

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system. Immediately take your vehi-

cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer

to have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will operate improperly (e.g.

SRS airbags may inflate in a very

minor collision or not inflate in a

severe collision), which may in-

crease the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-69

– CONTINUED –

1-70 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

& SRS airbag system servicing

WARNING

. When discarding an airbag mod-

ule or scrapping the entire vehi-

cle damaged by a collision, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer.

. The SRS airbag has no user-

serviceable parts. Do not use

electrical test equipment on any

circuit related to the SRS airbag

system. For required servicing of

the SRS airbag, see your nearest

SUBARU dealer. Tampering with

or disconnecting the system’s

wiring could result in accidental

inflation of the SRS airbag or

could make the system inopera-

tive, which may result in serious

injury.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in areas

listed in the following, have an

authorized SUBARU dealer perform

the work. The SRS airbag control

module, impact sensors and airbag

modules are stored in these areas.

. Under the center console

. Inside each front fender

. Steering wheel and column and

nearby areas

. Top of the dashboard on front

passenger’s s ide and nearby

areas

. Each front seat and nearby area

. Inside each center pillar

. In each roof side (from the front

pillar to a point over the rear seat)

. Between the rear seat cushion

and rear wheel house on each

side

In the event that the SRS airbag is

deployed, replacement of the system

should be performed only by an author-

ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-

nents of the SRS airbag system are

replaced, use only genuine SUBARU

parts.

NOTE

In the following cases, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The front part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which only

the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver ’s and front passenger’sSRS

frontal airbags did not deploy.

. The pad of the steering wheel, the

cover over the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag, or either roof side (from

the front pillar to a point over the rear

seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

. Either center pillar and rear wheel

house or a nearby area of the vehicle

was involved in an accident in which

the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag did not deploy.

. The fabric or leather of either front

seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise

damaged.

& Precautions against vehicle

modification

WARNING

. To avoid accidental activation of

the system or rendering the sys-

tem inoperative, which may re-

sult in serious injury, no modifi-

cations should be made to any

components or wiring of the SRS

airbag system.

This includes following modifica-

tions:

. Installation of custom steering

wheels

. Attachment of additional trim

materials to the dashboard

. Installation of custom seats

. Replacement of seat fabric or

leather

. Installation of additional fabric

or leather on the front seat

. Attachment of a hands-free

microphone or any other ac-

cessory to a front pillar, a

center pillar, a rear pillar, the

windshield, a side window, an

assist grip, or any other cabin

surface that would be near a

deploying SRS curtain airbag.

. Installation of additional elec-

trical/electronic equipment

such as a mobile two-way

radio on or near the SRS

airbag system components

and/or wiring is not advisable.

This could interfere with prop-

er operation of the SRS airbag

system.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modificati ons. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the SRS airbag system.

. Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s

door pillar or specified for indivi-

dual vehicle models in this Own-

er’s Manual.

. Attachment of any equipment

(side steps or side sill protectors,

etc.) other than genuine SUBARU

accessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts on

your vehicle.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-71

————————————————————————————————————————

Keys ..................................................................... 2-2

Key number plate................................................ 2-2

Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-3

Security ID plate.................................................. 2-3

Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4

Key replacement ................................................. 2-4

Door locks ........................................................... 2-4

Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-4

Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5

Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-6

Power door locking switches............................. 2-6

Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-7

Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-8

Locking the doors ............................................... 2-9

Unlocking the doors ............................................ 2-9

Unlocking the rear gate ....................................... 2-9

Illuminated entry ................................................. 2-9

Vehicle finder function........................................ 2-10

Sounding a panic alarm...................................... 2-10

Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-10

Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-10

Replacing lost transmitters ................................ 2-12

Alarm system ..................................................... 2-15

System operation............................................... 2-15

Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-15

If you have accidentally triggered the alarm

system ............................................................ 2-16

Arming the system ............................................ 2-16

Disarming the system ........................................ 2-17

Valet mode ........................................................ 2-17

Passive arming.................................................. 2-18

Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-19

Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-19

Child safety locks .............................................. 2-19

Windows............................................................. 2-20

Power windows ................................................. 2-20

Rear gate ............................................................ 2-22

Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-24

Tilt function ....................................................... 2-24

Sliding function ................................................. 2-25

Anti-entrapment function.................................... 2-25

Sun shade ......................................................... 2-25

Keys and doors

2-2 Keys and doors

Keys

1) Master key

2) Submaster key

3) Valet key

4) Key number plate

5) Security ID plate

Three types of keys are provided for your

vehicle.

Master key, submaster key and valet key.

The master key and submaster key fit all

locks on your vehicle.

. Ignition switch

. Driver’s door

. Glove box

The valet key fits only the ignition switch

and door locks. You can keep the glove

box locked when you leave your vehicle

and valet key at a parking facility.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it bangs

against your knees while you are

driving, it could turn the ignition

switch from the “ON” position to the

“Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby

stopping the engine.

& Key number plate

1) Key number plate

2) Security ID plate

The key number is stamped on the key

number plate attached to the key set.

Write down the key number and keep it in

another safe place, not in the vehicle. This

number is needed to make a replacement

key if you lose your key or lock it inside the

vehicle.

For information on making replacement

keys for vehicles with the immobilizer

system, refer to the “Immobilizer” section

in this chapter.

Immobilizer

The immobilizer system is designed to

prevent an unau thorized perso n from

starting the engine. Only keys registered

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can

be used to operate your vehicle. Even if

an unregistered key fits into the ignition

switch and can be turned to the “START”

position, the engine will automatically stop

after several seconds.

Each immobilizer key contains a trans-

ponder in which the key’s ID code is

stored. When a key is inserted into the

ignition switch and turned to the “ON”

position, the transponder transmits the

key’s ID code to the immobilizer system ’s

receiver. If the transmitted ID code

matches the ID code registered in the

immobilizer system, the system allows the

engine to be started. Since the ID code is

transmitted and acted upon almost in-

stantly, the immobilizer system does not

impede normal starting of the engine.

If the engine fails to start, pull out the key

once before trying again. Refer to the

“Ignition switch” section in chapter 3.

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

NOTE

To protect your vehicle from th eft,

please pay close attention to the fol-

lowing security precautions:

. Never leave your vehicle unattended

with its keys inside.

. Before leaving your vehicle, close all

windows and lock the doors and rear

gate.

. Do not leave spare keys or any

record of your key number in the

vehicle.

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under direct

sunlight or anywhere it may

become hot.

. Do not get the key wet. If the key

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

& Security ID plate

1) Key number plate

2) Security ID plate

The security ID is stamped on the security

ID plate attached to the key set. Write

down the security ID and keep it in

another safe place, not in the vehicle.

This number is needed to make a replace-

ment key if you lose your key or lock it

inside the vehicle.

This number is also needed for replace-

ment or repair of the engine control unit,

integrated unit, and combination meter.

Keys and doors 2-3

– CONTINUED –

2-4 Keys and doors

& Security indicator light

The security indicator light deters potential

thieves by indicating that the vehicle is

equipped with an immobilizer system. It

begins flashing approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned from the

“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”

position or immediately after the key is

pulled out.

If the security indicator light does not flash,

the immobilizer system may be malfunc-

tioning. If this occurs, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.

an imitation key), the security indicator

light illuminates.

NOTE

Even if the security indicator light

flashes irregularly or its fuse blows

(the light does not flash if its fuse is

blown), the immobilizer system will

function normally.

& Key replacement

Your key number plate and security ID

plate will be required if you ever need a

replacement key made. Any new key must

be registered for use with your vehicle’s

immobilizer system before it can be used.

Up to four keys can be registered for use

with one vehicle.

For security, all the keys registered with

your vehicle’s immobilizer system will

have their ID codes erase d and re-

registered when a new key is made.

Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys must

be presented when a new key is regis-

tered. Any key that is not re-registered

when a new key is made cannot be used

after the other keys are re-registered. For

information on replacement keys and on

the registration of keys with your immo-

bilizer system, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

Door locks

& Locking and unlocking from

the outside

To lock the driver’s door from the outside

with the key, turn the key toward the front.

To unlock the door, turn the key toward the

rear.

Lift the outside door handle to open an

unlocked door.

Locking without the key

To lock the door from the outside without

the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and

then close the door.

Locking without the key

To lock the door from the outside using the

power door locking switch, push the “

”

sides of the switch and then close the

door. In this case, all closed doors and the

rear gate are locked at the same time.

Always make sure that all doors and the

rear gate are locked before leaving your

vehicle.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside without the key.

& Locking and unlocking from

the inside

WARNING

Keep all doors locked when you

drive, especially when small chil-

dren are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of seat-

belts and child restraints, locking

the doors reduces the chance of

being thrown out of the vehicle in an

accident.

It also helps prevent passengers

from falling out if a door is acciden-

tally opened, and intruders from

unexpectedly opening doors and

entering your vehicle.

To lock the door from the inside, rotate the

lock lever rearward.

Keys and doors 2-5

– CONTINUED –

2-6 Keys and doors

To unlock the door from the inside, rotate

the lock lever forward.

The red mark on the lock lever appears

when the door is unlocked.

Pull the inside door handle to open an

unlocked door.

Always make sure that all doors and the

rear gate are closed and locked before

starting to drive.

& Battery drainage prevention

function

When a door or the rear gate is not

completely closed and the map light,

dome light, ignition switch light, and door

open warning light remain illuminated as a

result, the lights are automatically turned

off by the battery drainage prevention

function after 10 minutes of illumination

to prevent the battery from going dead.

The operational/non-operational setting of

this function can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest

SUBARU dealer if you would like to

change the setting.

NOTE

. When lea ving the vehicle, please

make sure that all doors and the rear

gate are completely closed.

. The battery drainage prevention

function does not operate while the

key is in the ignition switch.

Power door locking switches

Driver’s switch

1) Lock

2) Unlock

Front passenger’s switch

1) Lock

2) Unlock

All doors and the rear gate can be locked

and unlocked by the power door locking

switches located at the driver’s side and

the front passenger’s side doors.

To lock all doors and the rear gate, push

the “

” side of the switch.

To unlock all doors and the rear gate, push

the “

” side of the switch.

When you close the doors after you set

the door locks, the doors remain locked.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside using the power

door locking switches.

& Key lock-in prevention func-

tion

This function prevents the doors from

being locked wi th the key still in the

ignition switch.

! Behavior with key lock-in preven-

tion function operational

With either the driver’s or front passen-

ger ’s door open, the doors automatically

remain unlocked even if the “

” side of the

door locking switch is pushed.

! Behavior with key lock-in preven-

tion function non-operational

. If the lock lever is turned to the rear

(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door

open and the driver ’s door is then closed

with the lock lever in that position, the

driver’s door is locked.

. If the spare key is used to lock the

driver’s door from the outside of the

vehicle, the door is locked.

. It is possible to lock the all doors and

the rear gate by holding the “

” side of the

door locking switch pushed for 3 seconds

with the driver’s door open a nd then

closing the driver’s door.

This function’s operational/non-opera-

tional setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU

dealer for details.

NOTE

When leaving the vehicle, make sure

you are holding the key before locking

the doors.

Keys and doors 2-7

2-8 Keys and doors

Remote keyless entry system

CAUTION

. Do not expose the transmitter to

severe shocks, such as those

experienced as a result of drop-

ping or throwing.

. Do not take the transmitter apart

except when replacing the bat-

tery.

. Do not get the transmitter wet. If it

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

The transmitter for the remote keyless

entry system is located inside the key

head.

The remote keyless entry system has the

following functions.

. Locking and unlocking the doors and

rear gate without a key

. Unlocking the rear gate without key

. Sounding a panic alarm

. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-

tem. Refer to the next section “ Alarm

system” for detailed information.

The operable distance of the remote

keyless entry system is approximately 30

feet (10 meters). However, this distance

will vary depending on envi ronmental

conditions.

The system’s operable distance will be

shorter in areas near a facility or electronic

equipment emitting strong radio waves

such as a power plant, broadcast station,

TV tower, or remote controller of home

electronic appliances.

NOTE

The remote keyless entry system does

not operate when the ignition key is

inserted in the ignition switch or when

any of the doors or the rear gate is not

fully closed.

: Rear gate unlock button

: Unlock/disarm button

: Lock/arm button

A: Panic button

& Locking the doors

Press the “ ” button to lock all doors and

rear gate. An electronic chirp will sound

once and the turn signal lights will flash

once.

If any of the doors or the rear gate is not

fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound

five times and the turn signal lights will

flash five times to alert you that the doors

or the rear gate are not properly closed.

When you close the door, it will automa-

tically lock and then an electronic chirp will

sound once and the turn signal lights will

flash once.

& Unlocking the doors

Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s

door. An electronic chirp will sound twice

and the turn signal lights will flash twice.

To unlock all doors and the rear gate,

briefly press the “

” button a second time

within 5 seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and

second presses of the “

” button (for

unlocking of all of the doors and the

rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-

tem may not respond.

& Unlocking the rear gate

Pressing the “ ” button opens the rear

gate.

An electronic chirp will sound twice and

the turn signal lights will flash twice.

& Illuminated entry

Interior lights such as the map light, dome

light and cargo area light will illuminate

when the “

” button is pressed. These

lights remain illuminated for approximately

30 seconds if any of the doors or the rear

gate is not opened.

If the “

” button is pressed before 30

seconds have elapsed, these lights will

turn off.

To activate this function, set the following

int erior light swit ches to the indicated

Keys and doors 2-9

– CONTINUED –

2-10 Keys and doors

positions:

Map light: OFF position

Dome light: DOOR position

Cargo area light: DOOR position

A SUBARU dealer can change the illumi-

nation period setting of the interior lights in

accordance with your preference. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

& Vehicle finder function

Use this function to fi nd your vehicle

parked among many vehicles in a large

parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet

(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “

”

button three times in a 5-second period

will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound

once and its turn signal lights to flash three

times.

NOTE

If the interval between presses is too

short when you press the “

” button

three times, the system may not re-

spond to the signals from the remote

transmitter.

& Sounding a panic alarm

To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”

button once.

The horn will sound and the turn signal

lights will flash.

To deactivate the panic alarm, press any

button on the remote transmitter. Unless a

button on the remote transmitter is

pressed, the alarm will be deactivated

after approximately 30 seconds.

& Selecting audible signal op-

eration

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn

the audible signal off.

Do the following to deactivate the audible

signal. You can also use the same steps

to restore the function.

1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors and the rear gate.

2. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the

power door locking switch.

3. While holding down the “UNLOCK”

side of the power door locking switch, pull

the key out and re-insert it into the ignition

switch at least 6 times within 10 seconds

after Step 2.

4. Open and close the driver’s door once

within 10 seconds after step 3.

5. The turn signal lights flash 3 times to

indicate completion of the setting.

You may have the above settings done by

your SUBARU dealer.

& Replacing the battery

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the transmitter when repla-

cing the battery.

. Be careful not to damage the

printed circuit board in the trans-

mitter when replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; children could

swallow them.

When the transmitter battery begins to get

weak, transmitter range will begin to

decrease. Replace the battery as soon

as possible.

To replace the battery:

1. Remove the screw on the key head.

2. Open the key head using a flat-head

screwdriver.

3. Remove the transmitter case from the

key head.

4. Open the transmitter case by releasing

the hooks.

5. Remove the old battery from the

holder.

1) Negative (−) side facing up

Keys and doors

2-11

– CONTINUED –

2-12 Keys and doors

6. Replace with a new battery (Type

CR1620 or equivalent) making sure to

install the new battery with the negative

(−) side facing up.

7. Put together the transmitter case by

fitting the hooks on both sides of the case.

8. Put the transmitter case in the key

head and then put together the key head.

9. Reinstall the screw on the key head.

After the battery is replaced, the trans-

mitter must be synchronized with the

remote keyless entry system’s control

unit. Press either the “

” or “ ” button

six times to synchronize the unit.

& Replacing lost transmitters

If you lose a transmi tter or want to

purchase additional transmitters (up to

four can be programmed), you should re-

program all of your transmitters for secur-

ity reasons. It is recommended that you

have your deale r program all of your

transmitters into your system.

! Programming the transmitters

The remote keyless entry system is

equipped with a special code learning

feature that allows you to program new

transmitter codes into the system or to

delete old ones. The system can learn up

to four unique transmitter codes. The four

transmitter codes may be the same or

different.

Programming transmitter code s into

system:

Key tag

Transmitter circuit board

To register a new transmitter with the

remote keyless entry system, it is neces-

sary to program the transmitter’s code

(identification number) into the system. A

tag showing the code is affixed to the key

unit, and another is affixed to the circuit

board inside the transmitter. If there is no

tag, open the transmitter case and make a

note of the eight-digit number. Program

the number into the system in accordance

with the following procedure:

1. Firmly close the doors and the rear

gate.

2. Open the driver’sdoor,sitonthe

driver’s seat, and close the door.

3. Perform the following steps within 45

seconds.

(1) Open and close the driver’s door

once.

1) LOCK

2) ON

(2) Insert the key into the ignition

switch, then turn it from the “LOCK”

position to the “ON” position 10 times

within 15 seconds.

NOTE

. When you complete step (2), an

electronic tone will sound once, a

buzzer will continue to sound and the

interior light will continue to flash until

the transmitter codes are completely

registered.

. If you do not perform steps (1) and

(2) within 45 seconds, an error will

occur. Neither an electronic tone nor

the buzzer will sound, and the interior

lamp will not flash. In this event, per-

form the whole procedure again begin-

ning with part 1.

4. Open and close the door once within

15 seconds.

NOTE

. When part 4 of the procedure is

completed, an electronic tone will

sound for 30 seconds.

. If you do not perform the operations

in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error

will occur and the electronic tone will

not sound. In this event, perform the

registration steps again beginning with

part 3 of the procedure.

5. Before the electronic tone stops

sounding, push the “

” side of the power

door locking switch the same number of

times as the leftmost digit of the transmit-

ter code. For example, push the locking

switch eight times if the leftmost digit of

the code is 8.

NOTE

. The electronic tone will stop sound-

ing when you start entering the num-

ber.

. If you do not start entering the

number using the lock knob before

the electronic tone stops sounding, an

error will occur. In this event, perform

the registration steps again beginning

with part 3 of the procedure.

. If the interval between one push of

the knob and the next exceeds 5

seconds, an error will occur. In this

event, perform the procedure again

beginning with part 4. If an error occurs

six times, perform the procedure again

starting with part 3.

Keys and doors 2-13

– CONTINUED –

2-14 Keys and doors

6. When you have finished entering the

number, push the “

” side of the locking

switch within 5 seconds.

NOTE

. An electronic tone will sound.

. If you push the “

” side of the

lockingswitchwhenmorethan5

seconds have passed, an error will

occur. In this event, perform the proce-

dure again beginning with part 4. If an

error occurs six times, perform the

procedure again starting with part 3.

7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure

for each of the remaining digits of the

transmitter code beginning with the sec-

ond digit (counting from the left) and

finishing with the eighth digit.

NOTE

. When you finish entering the eighth

digit, an electronic tone will sound for

30 seconds.

. If the interval between one push of

the switch and the next exceeds 5

seconds, an error will occur. In this

event, perform the procedure again

beginning with part 4. If an error occurs

six times, perform the procedure again

starting with part 3.

8. Before the electronic tone stops

sounding, use the power door locking

switch to reenter the transmitter code

beginning with the leftmost digit.

NOTE

If you do not start entering the number

using the lock knob before the electro-

nic tone stops sounding, an error will

occur. In this event, perform the proce-

dure again beginning with part 3.

9. When you have finished entering the

code a second time, an electronic tone will

sound for 1 second and automatic door

locking and unlocking operation will take

place once to indicate completion of

registration, provided the code entered

the second time is identical to that entered

the first time.

NOTE

If the code entered the second time is

not identical to the code entered the

first time, an error will occur. In this

event, perform the procedure again

beginning with part 5. If an error occurs

five times, perform the procedure again

starting with part 3.

10. If you wish to program another trans-

mitter code into the system (up to four

transmitter codes can be programmed into

the system), perform the procedure begin-

ning with part 4. When you have finished

programming all of the necessary trans-

mitter codes into the system, remove the

key from the ignition switch.

11. Test every registered transmitter to

confirm correct operation.

! Deleting old transmitter codes

The control unit of the remote keyless

entry system has four memory locations to

store transmitter codes, giving it the ability

to operate with up to four transmitters.

When you lose a transmitter, the lost

transmitter’s code remains in the memory.

For security reasons, lost transmitter

codes should be deleted from the mem-

ory.

To delete old transmitter codes, program

four transmitter codes into the system. If

you have only one current transmitter,

program it four times. If you have two

current transmitters, program each one

twice. If you have three current transmit-

ters, program two of them once and the

third one twice. This process will leave

only current transmitter codes in the

system’s memory.

NOTE

Make sure no one else is operating

their keyless entry system within range

of your vehicle when programming

transmitters. If someone else were to

operate their remote transmitter while

you are programming your transmit-

ters, it is possible that their transmitter

code will be programmed into your

system, allowing them unauthori zed

access to your vehicle.

Alarm system

The alarm system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn

sounds and the turn signal lights flash if

someone attempts to break into your

vehicle.

The system can be armed and disarmed

with the remote transmitter.

The system does not operate when the

key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set

for activation at the time of shipment from

the factory. You can set the system for

deactivation yourself or have it done by

your SUBARU dealer.

& System operation

The alarm system will give the following

alarms when triggered:

. The vehicle’s horn will sound and the

turn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds.

. If any door or the rear gate remains

open after the 30-second period, the horn

will continue to sound for a maximum of 3

minutes. If the door or the rear gate is

closed while the horn is sounding, the

horn will stop sounding with a delay of up

to 30 seconds.

The alarm is triggered by:

. Opening a door or the rear gate

. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as

forced entry (only vehicles with shock

sensors (dealer option))

& Activating and deactivating

the alarm system

To change the setting of your vehicle’s

alarm system for activation or deactiva-

tion, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to

“Disarming the system” in this section.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors and the rear gate.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the

driver’s power door locking switch, open

the driver’s door within the following 1

second, and wait 10 seconds without

releasing the switch. The setting will then

be changed as follows:

If the system was previously activated:

The odometer/trip meter screen displays

“AL oF” and the horn sounds twice,

indicating that the system is now deacti-

vated.

Keys and doors 2-15

– CONTINUED –

2-16 Keys and doors

If the system was previously deacti-

vated:

The odometer/trip meter screen displays

“AL on” and the horn sounds once,

indicating that the system is now acti-

vated.

NOTE

You may have the above setting

change done by your SUBARU dealer.

& If you have accidentally trig-

gered the alarm system

! To stop the alarm

Do any of the following operations:

. Press any button on the remote trans-

mitter.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

& Arming the system

! To arm the system using remote

transmitter

1. Close all windows and the moonroof.

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the

vehicle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

5. Close all doors and the rear gate.

: Press to Arm the system.

: Press to Disarm the system.

6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less

than 2 seconds). All doors and the rear

gate will lock, an electronic chirp will

sound once, the turn signal lights will flash

once and the indicator lights will start

flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30

seconds (standby time), the indicator

lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi-

mately every 2 seconds), indicating that

the system has been armed for surveil-

lance.

If any of the doors or the rear gate is not

fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds

five times, the turn signal lights flash five

times to alert you that the doors or the rear

gate are not properly closed. When you

close the door, the system will automati-

cally arm and doors will automatically lock.

! To arm the system using power

door locking switches

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the

vehicle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

5. Close the doors and the rear gate but

leave only the driver’s door or the front

passenger’s door open.

6. Push the front side (“LOCK” side) of

the power door locking switch to set the

door locks.

7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will

sound once, the turn signal lights will flash

once and the indicator lights will start

flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30

seconds (standby t ime), the indicator

lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi-

mately every 2 seconds), indicating that

the system has been armed for surveil-

lance.

NOTE

. The system can be armed even if the

engine hood, the windows and/or

moonroof are opened. Always make

sure that they are fully closed before

arming the system.

. The 30-second standby time can be

eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-

formed by your SUBARU dealer.

. The system is in the standby mode

for a 30-second period after locking the

doors with the remote transmitter. The

security indicator light will flash at

short intervals during this period.

. If any of the following actions is

done during the standby period, the

system will not switch to the surveil-

lance state.

. Doors are unlocked using the

remote transmitter.

. Any door or the rear gate is

opened.

. Ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

& Disarming the system

Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than

2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The

driver’s door will unlock, an electronic

chirp will sound twice, the turn signal

lights will flash twice and the indicator

light will turn off.

To unlock all other doors and the rear

gate, briefly press the “

” button a

second time within 5 seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and

second presses of the “

” button (for

unlocking of all of the doors and the

rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-

tem may not respond.

! Emergency disarming

If you cannot disarm the system using the

transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,

broken or the transmitter battery is too

weak), you can disarm the system without

using the transmitter.

The system can be disarmed if you turn

the ignition switch from the “LOCK” to the

“ON” position with a registered key.

& Valet mode

When you choose the valet mode, the

alarm system does not operate. In valet

mode, the remote transmitter is used only

for locking and unlocking the doors and

rear gate and panic activation.

To e nter the valet mode , change the

setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for

deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating

and deactivating the alarm system” in this

section. The security indicator light will

continue to flash once every 3 seconds

indicating that the system is in the valet

mode.

Keys and doors 2-17

– CONTINUED –

2-18 Keys and doors

To exit valet mode, change the setting of

your vehicle’s alarm system for activation

mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-

ing the alarm system” in this section.

& Passive arming

When passive arming mode has been

programmed by the dealer, arming of the

system is automatically accomplished

without using the remote transmitter. Note

that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE

MANUALLY LOCKED.

! To enter the passive mode

If you wish to program the passive arming

mode, have it done by your SUBARU

dealer.

! Arming the system

CAUTION

In passive mode, the system will

automatically activate the alarm but

WILL NOT automatically lock the

doors. In order to lock the doors

you must either lock them as in-

dicated in step 4 below or with the

key once they have been closed.

Failure to lock the doors manually

will result in a higher security risk.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

1) LOCK

2) ON

2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to

“LOCK” position and remove the key from

the ignition switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the

vehicle.

4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors

with the inside door lock levers.

5. Close the doors. The system will

automatically arm after 1 minute.

In the passive mode, the system can also

be armed with the remote transmitter or

with the power door locking switches. If

the r emote transmitter or power door

locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,

arming will take place immediately regard-

less of whether or not the passive mode

has been selected.

! Disarming the system

To disarm the system, briefly press the

“

” button on the transmitter.

& Tripped sensor identification

The security indicator light flashes when

the alarm system has been triggered.

Also, the number of flashes indicates the

location of unauthorized intrusion or the

severity of impact on the vehicle.

. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position, the indicator light will

light for 1 second and then flash as

follows:

When a door or rear gate was opened:

5 times

When the ignition switch was turned to

the “ON” position by using a key not

registered with your immobilizer sys-

tem: 3 times

When a strong impact or multiple

impacts were sensed: twice (only

vehicles with shock sensors (dealer

option))

When a light impact was sensed: once

(only vehicles with sho ck sensors

(dealer option))

& Shock sensors (dealer op-

tion)

The shock sensors trigger the a larm

system when they sense impacts applied

to the vehicle and when any of their

electric wires is cut. The alarm system

causes the horn to sound and the turn

signal lights to flash for a short time when

the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of

a strong impact or multiple impacts by

sounding the horn and flashing the turn

signal lights, both lasting approximately 30

seconds.

If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can

connect them and set them for activation

or deactivation.

NOTE

. The shock sensors are not always

able to sense impacts caused by break-

ing in, and cannot sense an impact that

does not cause vibration (such as

breaking the glass using a rescue

hammer).

. The shock sensors may sense vi-

bration like those shown in the follow-

ing and trigger the alarm system.

Select the settings of the alarm system

and shock sensors appropriately de-

pending on where you usually park

your vehicle.

Example:

Vibration from construction site

Vibration in multistory car park

Vibration from trains

. You can have the sensitivity of the

shock sensors adjusted to your pre-

ference by your SUBARU dealer.

Child safety locks

WARNING

Always use the child safety lock

whenever a child rides in the rear.

Serious injury could result if a child

accidentally opened the door and

fell out.

Each rear door has a child safety lock that

prevents the doors from being opened

even if the inside door handle is pulled.

When the child safety lock lever is in the

lock position, the door cannot be opened

from inside regardless of the position of

the inner door handle lock lever. The door

can only be opened from the outside.

Keys and doors 2-19

2-20 Keys and doors

Windows

& Power windows

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, you must

do the following.

. When operating the power win-

dows, be extremely careful to

prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,

neck or head from being caught

in the window.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

. Before leav ing the veh icle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure

to follow this procedure could

result in injury to a child operat-

ing the power window.

The power windows operate only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

! Driver’s side switches

1) Lock switch

2) For driver’s window

3) For front passenger’s window

4) For rear left window

5) For rear right window

All door windows can be controlled by the

power window switch cluster at the driver

side door.

! Operating the driver’s window

1) Open

2) Automatically open

To open:

Push the switch down lightly and hold it.

The window will open as long as the

switch is held.

This switch also has a one-touch auto

down feature that allows the window to be

opened fully without holding the switch.

Push the switch down until it clicks and

release it, and the window will fully open.

To stop the window halfway, pull the

switch up lightly.

To close:

Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The

window will close as long as the switch is

held.

! Operating the passengers’ windows

To open:

Push the appropriate switch down and

hold it until the window reaches the

desired position.

To close:

Pull the switch up and hold it until the

window reaches the desired position.

! Locking the passengers’ windows

Push the lock switch. When the lock

switch is in the “LOCK” position, the

passengers’ windows cannot be opened

or closed.

Pre ss the switch again to cancel the

passengers’ window locking.

NOTE

When the lock switch is pushed to the

“LOCK” position, the indicator lights in

the passenger’s window switches (in-

cluded in the power window switch

cluster on the driver’s door) all turn off.

Keys and doors 2-21

– CONTINUED –

2-22 Keys and doors

! Passengers’ side switches

Front passenger’s window switch

1) Open

2) Close

Rear passengers’ window switches

1) Open

2) Close

To open:

Push the switch down and hold it until the

window reaches the desired position.

To close:

Pull the switch up and hold it until the

window reaches the desired position.

When the lock switch on the p ower

window switch cluster, located on the

driver’s side door, is in the “LOCK”

position, the passengers’ windows cannot

be operated with the passengers’

switches.

Rear gate

The rear gate can be locked and unlocked

using either the remote keyless entr y

system or the power door locking switch.

Refer to the “Power door locking switches”

and “Remote keyless entry system” sec-

tions in this chapter.

To open:

First unlock the rear gate lock then push

the button.

To close:

Lower the rear gate slowly and push down

firmly until the latch engages.

The rear gate can be lowered easily if you

pull it down holding the recessed grip.

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaust

gas fro m entering the vehic le,

always keep the rear gate closed

while driving.

. Do not attempt to shut the rear

gate while holding the recessed

grip. Also avoid closing the rear

gate by pulling on the recessed

grip from inside the cargo space.

There is a danger of your hand

being caught and injured.

CAUTION

. Do not jam a plastic bag in or

place cellophane tape on the rear

gate stays or scratch the stays

while loading or unloading cargo.

That could cause leakage of gas

from the stays, which may result

in their inability to hold the rear

gate open.

. Be careful not to hit your head or

face on the rear gate when open-

ing or closing the rear gate and

when loading or unloading car-

go.

NOTE

Should the rear gate be unable to be

unlocked due to a discharged battery, a

malfunction in the door locking/unlock-

ing system or other causes, you can

unlock it by manually operating the

rear gate lock release lever.

For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate –

if the rear gate cannot be unlocked”

section in chapter 9.

Keys and doors 2-23

2-24 Keys and doors

Moonroof (if equipped)

WARNING

. Never let anyone’s hands, arms,

head or any objects protrude

from the moonroof. A person

could be seriously injured if the

vehicle stops suddenly or turns

sharply or if the vehicle is in-

volved in an accident.

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, you must

do the following.

. Before closing the moonroof,

make sure that no one’s hands,

arms, head or other objects will

be accidentally caught in the

moonroof.

. Before leav ing the veh icle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure

to follow this procedure could

result in injury to a child operat-

ing the moonroof.

. Never try to check the anti-en-

trapment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the

moonroof.

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the open

moonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof if

falling snow or extremely cold

conditions have caused it to

freeze shut.

. The anti-entrapment function

does not operate when the moon-

roof is being tilted down. Be sure

to confirm that it is safe to do so

before tilting the moonroof down.

The moonroof has both tilting and sliding

functions.

The moonroof operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

& Tilt function

1) Tilt switch

2) Raise

3) Lower

The tilting function will only operate when

the moonroof is fully closed.

Push the rear side of the “Tilt” switch to

raise the moonroof.

Push the front side of the “Tilt” switch to

lower the moonroof.

Release the switch after the moonroof has

been raised or has been lowered com-

pletely. Pushing the switch continuously

may cause damage to the moonroof.

NOTE

One-touch operation does not take

place when the moonroof is raised or

lowered. Push the switch continuously

to raise or lower the moonroof.

& Sliding function

1) Open/Close switch

2) Open

3) Close

Push the “Open/Close” switch rearward to

open the moonroof. The sun shade will

also be opened together with the moon-

roof.

Push the “ Open/Close” switch forward to

close the moonroof. The moonroof will

stop halfway. Push it again to close the

moonroof completely.

To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-

way position while opening or closing it,

momentarily push the switch to the

“OPEN” or “CLOSE” side.

After washing the vehicle or after it rains,

wipe away water on the roof prior to

opening the moonroof to prevent drops

of water from falling into the passenger

compartment.

& Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses an object

trapped between its glass and the vehi-

cle’s roof during closure, it automatically

moves back to either of the following

positions according to the point at which

it senses the object:

. When the moonroof senses the object

at a point between the halfway stop

position and fully closed position, it moves

back to the halfway stop position and

stops there.

. When the moonroof senses the object

at a point between the halfway stop

position and fully open position, it moves

back to the fully open position and stops

there.

The anti-entrapment function may also be

activated by a strong shock on the moon-

roof even when there is nothing trapped.

NOTE

For the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with the

moonroof fully opened.

& Sun shade

The sun shade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is

closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade

also moves back.

Keys and doors 2-25

————————————————————————————————————————

Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3

LOCK.................................................................. 3-3

Acc..................................................................... 3-4

ON ...................................................................... 3-4

START ................................................................ 3-4

Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-4

Ignition switch light ............................................. 3-4

Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-5

Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-5

Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-5

Canceling the function for meter needle/gauge

movement and combination meter sequential

illumination upon turning on the ignition

switch............................................................... 3-5

Speedometer....................................................... 3-6

Odometer............................................................ 3-6

Double trip meter ................................................ 3-7

Tachometer ......................................................... 3-7

Fuel gauge.......................................................... 3-8

Temperature gauge ............................................. 3-9

Warning and indicator lights .............................. 3-9

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-10

SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-11

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicators......................................................... 3-12

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator lamp .................................................. 3-12

Charge warning light .......................................... 3-13

Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-13

AT OIL TEMP warning light ................................. 3-13

Rear differential oil temperature warning

light ................................................................ 3-14

Low tire pressure warning light .......................... 3-14

ABS warning light.............................................. 3-15

Brake system warning light................................ 3-16

Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-17

Door open warning light .................................... 3-17

Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 3-18

All-Wheel Drive warning light ............................. 3-18

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator

light ................................................................ 3-18

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Traction

Control system OFF indicator light ................... 3-18

Security indicator light....................................... 3-19

SPORT mode indicator light ............................... 3-20

Selector lever/Gear position indicator ................. 3-20

Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-20

High beam indicator light ................................... 3-20

Cruise control indicator light.............................. 3-20

Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 3-21

Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-21

Front fog light indicator light.............................. 3-21

Clock .................................................................. 3-21

Outside temperature indicator .......................... 3-22

Low outside temperature warning ...................... 3-22

Multi function display (vehicles without a

genuine SUBARU navigation system)........... 3-23

Current fuel consumption .................................. 3-23

Average fuel consumption ................................. 3-24

Driving range on remaining fuel ......................... 3-24

Journey time ..................................................... 3-25

Instruments and controls

Light control switch ........................................... 3-26

Headlights.......................................................... 3-26

High/low beam change (dimmer)......................... 3-27

Headlight flasher ................................................ 3-27

Daytime running light system ............................. 3-27

Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-28

Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-28

Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) ................ 3-29

For 5-seater models ........................................... 3-30

For 7-seater models ........................................... 3-31

Parking light switch ........................................... 3-32

Front fog light switch......................................... 3-32

Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-33

Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-34

Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 3-35

Windshield wiper deicer.................................... 3-36

Rear wind ow defogger button .......................... 3-37

Mirrors ................................................................ 3-38

Inside mirror...................................................... 3-38

Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped) ....... 3-38

Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-39

Tilt steering wheel ............................................. 3-41

Horn.................................................................... 3-42

Ignition switch

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

“LOCK” while the vehicle is

being driven or towed because

that will lock the steering wheel,

preventing steering control. And

when the engine is turned off, it

takes a much greater effort than

usual to steer.

. Before leav ing the veh icle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure

to follow this procedure could

result in injury to a child or

others. Children could operate

the power windows, the moon-

roof or other controls or even

make the vehicle move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it banged

against your knees or hands while

you were driving, it could turn the

ignition switch from the “ON” posi-

tion to the “Acc” or “LOCK” posi-

tion, thereby stopping the engine.

Also, if the key is attached to a

keyholder or to a large bunch of

other keys, centrifugal force may act

on it as the vehicle moves, resulting

in unwanted turning of the ignition

switch.

The ignition switch has four positions:

LOCK, Acc, ON and START.

NOTE

. Keep the ignition switch in the

“LOCK” position when the engine is

not running.

. Using electrical accessories for a

long time with the ignition switch in the

“ON” or “Acc” position can cause the

battery to go dead.

. If the ignition switch will not move

from the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”

position, turn the steering wheel

slightly to the left and right as you turn

the ignition switch.

& LOCK

The key can only be inserted or removed

in this position. The ignition switch will lock

the steering wheel when you remove the

key.

If turning the key is difficult, turn the

steering wheel slightly to the right and left

as you turn the key.

The key can be turned from “Acc” to

“LOCK” only when the selector lever is in

the “P” position.

Instruments and controls 3-3

– CONTINUED –

3-4 Instruments and controls

& Acc

In this position the electrical accessories

(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can

be used.

& ON

This is the normal operating position after

the engine is started.

& START

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position while the engine

is running.

The engine is started in this position. The

starter cranks the engine to start it. When

the key is released (after the engine has

started), the key automatically returns to

the “ON” position.

If your registered key fails to start the

engine, pull out the key once (the security

indicator light will blink), and then insert

the key in the ignition switch and turn it to

the “START” position and again try to start

the engine.

NOTE

The engine may not start in the follow-

ing cases:

. The key grip is touching another key

or a metallic key holder.

. The key is near another key that

contains an immobilizer transponder.

. The key is near or touching another

transmitter.

& Key reminder chime

The reminder chime sounds when the

driver’s door opens and the key is in the

“LOCK” or “Acc” positions. The chime

stops when the key is removed from the

ignition switch.

& Ignition switch light

For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-

nates when the driver’s door is opened.

The light remains illuminated for a several

seconds and gradually turns off after the

driver’s door is closed.

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher is used to

warn other drivers when you have to park

your vehicle under emergency conditions.

The hazard warning flasher works with the

ignition switch in any position.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

push the hazard warning button on the

instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,

push the button again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Meters and gauges

NOTE

Liquid-crystal displays are used in

some of the meters and gauges on

the combination meter. You will find

their indications hard to see if you wear

polarized glasses.

& Combination meter illumina-

tion

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the various parts of the

combination meter are illuminated in the

following sequence:

1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter

rims, meter needles, odometer, trip meter,

and gauge back lights illuminate.

2. Meter needles and gauges each show

MAX reading.

3. Meter needles and gauges each show

MIN reading.

4. Meter and gauge dials illuminate.

5. Regular illumination (for driving) be-

gins.

NOTE

The above sequence of operations may

not take place if you quickly turn the

ignition switch to start the engine. This

is not a malfunction.

& Canceling the function for

meter needle/gauge move-

ment and combination meter

sequential illumination upon

turning on the ignition switch

It is possible to activate or deactivate the

movement of the meter needles and

gauges and sequential illumination of the

combination meter that takes place when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc”

position. With the A trip meter indication

selected, briefly press the trip knob twice.

You can now establish the activated/

deactivated setting for movement of the

Instruments and controls 3-5

– CONTINUED –

3-6 Instruments and controls

meter needles and gauges when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position. To change the current setting,

press the trip knob for at least 2 seconds.

: Activated

: Deactivated

With the function deactivated, the combi-

nation meter illuminates as follows:

1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter

rims, meter needles, odometer, trip meter,

and gauge back lights illuminate.

2. Meter and gauge dials illuminate.

3. Regular illumination (for driving) be-

gins.

Briefly press the trip knob again. You can

now establish the activated/deactivated

setting for sequential illumination of the

combination meter when the ign ition

switch is turned to the “ON” position. To

change the current setting, press the trip

knob for at least 2 seconds.

: Activated

: Deactivated

Briefly press the knob to return to the A trip

meter indication.

If you turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position, turn the ignition switch

to the “ON” position, or open and close the

driver’s door during the setting procedure,

the new setting will be canceled.

Also, if you do not press the trip knob for a

period of 10 seconds, the new setting will

be canceled.

NOTE

. It is not possible to cancel sequen-

tial illumination of the combination

meter while sequential illumination is

actually taking place. Cancel sequen-

tial illumination when regular illumina-

tion (for driving) has begun.

. When you open the driver’s door

with the ignition switch in the “ LOCK”

position, the meters’ needles and rims

are lit. The illumination stops working

when you shut the driver’s door or

automatically after 30 seconds.

& Speedometer

The speedometer shows the vehicle

speed.

& Odometer

This meter displays the odometer when

the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “ Acc”

or “ON” position.

The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

If you press the trip knob when the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,

the odometer/trip meter will light up. If you

do not press the trip knob within 10

seconds of illumination of the odometer/

trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn

off.

The odometer/trip meter will also turn off if

you open and close the driver’sdoor

within 10 seconds of illumination of the

odometer/trip meter.

& Double trip meter

This meter displays two trip meters when

the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “ Acc”

or “ ON” position.

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

To change the mode indication, briefly

push the knob.

Each press of the knob changes the mode

indication alternately.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob

and keep the knob pushed for more than 2

seconds.

If you press the trip knob when the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” position , the

odometer/trip meter will ligh t up. It i s

possible to switch between the A trip

meter and B trip meter indications while

the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do

not press the trip knob within 10 seconds

of illumination of the odometer/trip meter,

the odometer/trip meter will turn off. Also,

if you open and close the driver’s door

within 10 seconds of illumination of the

odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip

meter will turn off.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

NOTE

If the connection between the combina-

tion meter and battery is broken for any

reason such as vehicle maintenance or

fuse replacement, the data recorded on

the trip meter will be lost.

! Vehicle communication system

malfunction indication

The vehicle communication system car-

ries various types of information (vehicle

speed, running conditions, etc.) to control

modules. In the event of a malfunction in

this communication system, the trip meter

will show “

”.

If the trip meter shows “

”, immediately

contact the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle communication system

inspected.

NOTE

If you press the trip knob while the trip

meter is showing “

”, the trip meter

indication will appear for 10 seconds.

& Tachometer

The tachometer shows the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

Instruments and controls 3-7

– CONTINUED –

3-8 Instruments and controls

pointer of the tachometer in the red

zone. In this range, fuel injection will

be cut by the engine control module

to protect the engine from overrev-

ving. The engine will resume run-

ning normally after the engine speed

is reduced below the red zone.

& Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

The gauge may move slightl y during

braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel

level movement in the tank.

If you press the trip knob while the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,

the fuel gauge will light up and indicate the

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

If, while the fuel gauge is indicating the

amount of fuel remaining in the tank, you

(a) do not press the trip knob for 10

seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s

door, the fuel gauge indication will turn off.

NOTE

You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge meter.

This indicates that the fuel filler door

(lid) is located on the right side of the

vehicle.

! Low fuel warning light

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light

illuminates. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

The low fuel warning light illuminates

when the tank is nearly empty [approxi-

mately 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 Imp gal)].

It only operates when the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position. When this light

illuminates, fill the fuel tank immediately.

NOTE

This light does not turn off unless the

tank is replenished up to an internal

fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US

gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).

& Temperature gauge

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine

coolant temperature when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The coolant temperature will vary in

accordance with the outside temperature

and driving conditions.

We recommend that you drive moderately

until the pointer of the temperature gauge

reaches near the middle of the range.

Engine ope ration is optimum with the

engine coolant at this temperature range.

Also, high revving operation while the

engine is not sufficiently warmed up

should be avoided.

CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normal

operating range, safely stop the

vehicle as soon as possible.

Refer to “In case of emergency” in

chapter 9.

Warning and indicator lights

Several of the warning and indicator lights

illuminate momentarily and then turn off

when the ignition switch is initially turned

to the “ON” position. This permits check-

ing the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position. The

following lights illuminate:

: Driver’s seatbelt warning light

(The seatbelt warning light turns off

only when the driver fastens the

seatbelt.)

: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning

light

(The seatbelt warning light turns off

only when the front seat passenger

fastens the seatbelt.)

: SRS airbag system warning light

: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator lamp

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: AT OIL TEMP warning light

/ : ABS warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

Instruments and controls 3-9

– CONTINUED –

3-10 Instruments and controls

indicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light/Traction Control sy stem OFF

indicator light

/ : Brake system warning light

: All-Wheel Drive warning light

: Low tire pressure warning light

: SPORT mode indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator light

: Low fuel warning light

: Cruise control indicator light

: Cruise control set indicator light

: Rear differential oil temperature warn-

ing light

: Windshield washer fluid warning light

: Door open warning light

If any lights do not illuminate, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the

corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer

for repair.

& Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver

and front passenger to fasten their seat-

belts by illuminating the warning lights in

the locations indicated in the following

illustrations and sounding a chime.

Driver’s warning light

Front passenger’s warning light

! Operation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/

has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will

flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the

seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-

ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will

also sound simultaneously.

NOTE

. If the driver’s and/or front passen-

ger’s seatbelt(s) is/are still not fastened

6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning

device operates as follows according

to the vehicle speed.

. At speeds lower th an approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

steady illumination and flashing at

15-second intervals. The chime will

not sound.

. At speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

flashing and steady illumination at

15-second intervals and the chime

will sound while the warning light(s)

is/are flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warning

operation that follows the 6-second

warning after turning ON the ignition

switch . When the ignition switch is

turned ON next time, however, the

complete sequence of the warning

operation resumes. For further details

about canceling the warning operation,

please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If there is no passenger on the front

passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning

device for the front passenger’s seat will

be deactivated. The fr ont passenger’s

occupant detection system monitors

whether or not there is a passenger on

the front passenger’s seat. Observe the

following precautions. Failure to do so

may prevent the device from functioning

correctly or cause the device to fail.

. Do not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

place his/her hands or legs on the front

passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to

pull the seatback.

If the seatbelt warning device for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is

deactivated even when the front passen-

ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),

take the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system

and its child occupant.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

If still the seatbelt warning device for front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-

tions described above, immediately con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

& SRS airbag system

warning light

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the SRS airbag system

warning light will illuminate for approxi-

mately 6 seconds and turn off. This shows

the SRS frontal airbag and SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag and seat-

belt pretensioners are in normal operation.

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system. Immediately take your vehi-

cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer

to have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will operate improperly (e.g.

SRS airbags may inflate in a very

minor collision or not inflate in a

severe collision), which may in-

crease the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

Instruments and controls 3-11

– CONTINUED –

3-12 Instruments and controls

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

& Front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON and OFF indica-

tors

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located in the center

portion of the dashboard.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON a nd OFF

indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators turn

off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the

indicators illuminates depending on the

status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-

vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain off.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’sfrontal

airbag ON indicator will remain off while

the OFF indicator will illuminate.

If both the ON and OFF indicators remain

illuminated or off simultaneously, the

system is malfunctioning. Contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-

spection.

& CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction in-

dicator lamp

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-

nates while you are driving, have

your vehicle checked/repaired by

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible. Continued vehicle opera-

tion without having the emission

control system checked and re-

paired as necessary could cause

serious damage, which may not be

covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate

that th ere is a problem or pote ntial

problem somewhere in the emission con-

trol system.

! If the light illuminates steadily:

If the light illuminates steadily while driving

or does not turn off after the engine starts,

an emission control system malfunction

has been detected.

You should have your vehicle checked by

an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

NOTE

This light also illuminates when the fuel

filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,

the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator lamp illuminat-

ing could be a loose or missing fuel filler

cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until

it clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering

with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the

cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE

warning light turn off immediately. It may

take several driving trips. If the light does

not turn off, take your vehicle to your

authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

! If the light is blinking:

If the light is blinking while driving, an

engine misfire condition has been de-

tected which may damage the emission

control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emis-

sion control system, you should do the

following.

. Reduce vehicle speed.

. Avoid hard acceleration.

. Avoid steep uphill grades.

. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-

ble.

. Stop towing a trailer as soon as

possible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may

stop blinking and illuminate steadily after

several driving trips. You should have your

vehicle checked by an authorized

SUBARU dealer immediately.

& Charge warning light

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging

system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is

loose, broken or if the belt is in good

condition but the light remains illuminated,

contact your neare st SU BARU dealer

immediately.

& Oil pressure warning

light

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

oil pressure warning light illumi-

nated. This may cause serious en-

gine damage.

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the engine oil

pressure is low and the lubricating system

is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the engine oil level. If the oil level is

low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is

at the proper level but the light remains

illuminated, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer immediately.

& AT OIL TEMP warning

light

The AT oil temperature warning light “AT

OIL TEMP” illuminates when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position and

turns off after approximately 2 seconds.

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the automatic

transmission fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, im-

mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place

and let the engine idle until the warning

light turns off.

! Automatic transmission control

system warning

If the light flashes after the engine starts, it

may indicate that the automatic transmis-

sion control system is not working prop-

erly. Contact your nearest SUBARU deal-

er for service immediately.

Instruments and controls 3-13

– CONTINUED –

3-14 Instruments and controls

& Rear differential oil

temperature warning

light

CAUTION

Reduce vehicle speed and park the

vehicle in a safe place as soon as

possible if the R.DIFF TEMP light

illuminates. Continued driving with

this light illuminated can damage

the rear differential and other parts

of the powertrain.

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the rear

differential oil temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, reduce

vehicle speed and stop the vehicle at the

nearest safe place.

Park the vehicle for several minutes. After

the light turns off, you can start driving.

If the light does not turn off, contact the

nearest SUBARU dealer for service.

NOTE

. If the tire pressures are not correct

and/or the tires are not all the same

size and brand, the rear differential will

be heavily loaded when the vehicle is

driven, resulting in an abnormally high

oil temperature.

. The rear differential oil will deterio-

rate if its temperature increases en-

ough for the rear differential oil tem-

perature warning light to illuminate. It is

advisable to have the rear differential

oil replaced as soon as possible.

& Low tire pressure

warning light

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will illuminate for approximately 2

seconds to check that the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning

properly. If there is no problem and all tires

are properly inflated, the light will turn off.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold

and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufac-

turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of

a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is n ot a

substitut e for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver ’s responsibil ity to

maintain correct ti re pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfunctio n exists. When the

malfunction indicator is illuminated, the

system may not be able to detect or signal

low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of re-

placement or alternate tires or wheels on

the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from

functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing

one or more tires or wheels on your

vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

Should the warning light illuminate stea-

dily after blinking for approximately one

minute, have the system inspected by

your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate

briefly after the ignition switch is

turned ON or the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute, you should have

your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the Low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminates

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting. If the light

illuminates steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system

is NOT a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked peri-

odically (at least monthly) using a

tire gauge. After any change to tire

pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-

itoring system will not re-check tire

inflation pressures until the vehicle

is first driven more than 20 mph (32

km/h). Therefore, after adjusting the

tire pressures, increase the vehicle

speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to

start the TPMS re-checking of the

tire inflation pressures. If the tire

pressures are now above the severe

low pressure threshold, the low tire

pressure warning light should turn

off a few minutes later. Therefore, be

sure to install the specified size for

the front and rear tires.

& ABS warning light

The ABS warning light illuminates when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and turns off after approximately 2

seconds.

This is an indication that the ABS system

is working properly.

CAUTION

If the warning light behaves as

follows, the ABS system may not

work properly.

Instruments and controls 3-15

– CONTINUED –

3-16 Instruments and controls

When the warning light illuminates,

the ABS function shuts down; how-

ever, the conventional brake system

continues to operate normally.

. The warning light does not illu-

minate when the ignition switch

is turned to the “ON” position.

. The warning light illuminates

when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position, but

it does not turn off even when the

vehicle speed exceeds approxi-

mately 8 mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light illuminates dur-

ing driving.

If any of these conditions occur,

have the ABS system repaired at

the first available opportunity by

your SUBARU dealer.

The ABS warning light illuminates to-

gether with the brake system warning light

if the EBD system becomes malfunction-

ing. For further details of the EBD system

malfunction warning, refer to “Brake sys-

tem warning light”.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following, the ABS

system may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light remains illumi-

nated after the engine has been started,

but it turns off when the vehicle speed

reaches approximately 8 mph (12

km/h).

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may illumi-

nate. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a mal function.

When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will turn off.

& Brake system

warning light

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light illuminated is dan-

gerous. This indicates your brake

system may not be working

properly. If the light remains

illuminated, have the brakes in-

spected by a SUBARU dealer

immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether

the brakes are operating prop-

erly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for re-

pair.

This light has the following three functions:

! Parking brake warning

The light illuminates with the parking

brake applied while the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position. It turns off when the

parking brake is fully released.

! Brake fluid level warning

This light illuminates when the brake fluid

level has dropped to near the “MIN” level

of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position and with the

parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should

illuminate while driving (with the parking

brake fully released and with the ignition

switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an

indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn

brake pads. If this occurs, immediately

stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place

and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid

level is below the “MIN” mark in the

reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have

the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU

dealer for repair.

! Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning

The brake system warning light also

illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the

EBD system. In that event, it illuminates

together with the ABS warning light.

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously

during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are

applied harder than usual and the vehi-

cle’s motion may therefore become some-

what harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

warni ng ligh t illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,

flat place.

2. Shut down the engine, apply the

parking brake, and then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both

warning lights turn off, the EBD system

may be malfunctioning.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights illuminate again

and remain illuminated after the engine

has been restarted, shut down the engine

again, apply the parking brake, and check

the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the

nearest SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.

Instead, have the vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

& Low fuel warning light

CAUTION

Immediately put fuel in the tank

whenever the low fuel warning light

illuminates. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

The low fuel warning light illuminates

when the tank is nearly empty approxi-

mately 2.6 US gal (10 liters, or 2.2 Imp

gal). It only operates when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position. When this

light illuminates, fill the fuel tank immedi-

ately.

NOTE

This light does not turn off unless the

tank is replenished up to an internal

fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US

gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).

& Door open warning light

The indicators are located in the center

portion of the dashboard.

When any of the doors or the rear gate is

not fully closed, it is indicated by the

corresponding part of the door open

warning light.

Always make sure this light is out before

you start to drive.

Instruments and controls 3-17

– CONTINUED –

3-18 Instruments and controls

& Windshield washer

fluid warning light

This light illuminates when the fluid level in

the windshield washer fluid tank falls to

the lower limit (approximately 0.6 US qt,

0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).

& All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light

WARNING

Continued driving with the AWD

warning light flashing can lead to

powertrain damage. If the AWD

warning light flashes, promptly park

in a safe place then check whether

all four tires are the same diameter

and whether any of the tires has a

puncture or has lost air pressure for

some other reason.

The All-Wheel Drive warning light illumi-

nates when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position and turns off after the

engine has started.

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven

with tires of different diameters fitted on its

wheels or with the air pressure exces-

sively low in any of its tires.

& Vehicle Dynamics

Control operation indi-

cator light

This light illuminates when the ignition

switch is ON and turns off approximately 2

seconds later.

It blinks when the skid suppression func-

tion is activated. It illuminates when only

the traction control function is operating.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The light does not illuminate when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. The light does not turn off even after a

period of approximately 2 seconds after

the ignition switch has been turned to the

“ON” position.

& Vehicle Dynamics

Control warning light/

Traction Control system

OFF indicator light

This warning light has both the function of

indicating malfunctions in the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system and the function

of indicating that the Traction Control

system has been deactivated.

It illuminates in the event of a malfunction

in the system or when the system is not

operating.

This warning light illuminates when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and turns off several seconds

after engine startup. It indicates that the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system is in

normal operation.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably inoperative un der any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The warning light illuminates while the

vehicle is running.

. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system itself becomes

malfunctioning, the warning light only

illuminates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-

lock Brake System) remains fully opera-

tional.

. The warning light illuminates when the

electronic control system of the ABS/

Vehicle Dynamics Control system be-

comes malfunctioning.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system

provides its AB S contr ol through the

electrical circuit of the ABS system.

Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the

Vehicle Dyna mics Control system be-

comes unable to provide ABS control. As

a result, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system also becomes inoperative, caus-

ing the warning light to illuminate. Though

both the Vehicle Dynamics Control and

ABS systems are inoperative in this case,

the ordinary functions of the brake system

are still available. You will be safe while

driving with this condition, but have your

vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

shown in the following, the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system may be con-

sidered normal.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light illuminates after

engine startup and turns off while the

vehicle is subsequently being driven.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.

! Traction Control system OFF indi-

cator light

. It illuminates when the Traction Control

system OFF switch is pressed.

. It also illuminates when the Traction

Control system is deactivated.

NOTE

. The light may remain illuminated for

a while after the engine has been

started, especially in cold weather. This

does not indicate the existence of a

problem. The light should turn off as

soon as the engine has warmed up.

. The indicator light illuminates when

the engine has developed a problem

and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

Malfunction indicator lamp illuminates.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under the follow-

ing condition. Have your vehicle checked

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The light does not turn off even after

the lapse of several minutes (the engine

has warmed up) after the engine has

started.

& Security indicator light

The indicators are located in the center

portion of the dashboard.

This indicator light shows the status of the

alarm system. It also indicates operation

of the immobilizer system.

! Alarm system

It blinks to show the driver the operational

status of the alarm system. For detailed

information, refer to the “Alarm system”

section in chapter 2.

! Immobilizer system

This light blinks approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned from

“ON” position to t he “Acc” or “LOCK”

position or immediately after the key is

pulled out. Refer to the “Door locks”

Instruments and controls 3-19

– CONTINUED –

3-20 Instruments and controls

section in chapter 2.

If the indicator light does not flash, it may

indicate that immobilizer system may be

malfunctioning. Contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for

example, an unauthorized duplicate) is

used, the security indicator light illumi-

nates.

& SPORT mode indicator

light

This light illuminates when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position and

turns off after the engine has started.

When the selector lever is moved to the

manual gate, the SPORT mode is se-

lected and the indicator light illuminates.

Refer to the “Automatic transmission”

section in chapter 7.

& Selector lever/Gear position

indicator

The selector lever/gear position indicator

shows the position of the selector lever.

When manual mode is selected, the gear

position indicator shows the current gear

position and the upshift/downshift indica-

tor illuminates. Refer to the “Automatic

transmission” section in chapter 7.

& Turn signal indicator

lights

These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned

out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Refer to the “Replacing bulbs” section in

chapter 11.

& High beam indicator

light

This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.

This indicator light also illuminates when

the headlight flasher is operated.

& Cruise control indica-

tor light

The cruise control indicator light illumi-

nates when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position and turns off after

approximately 3 seconds.

This light illuminates when the “ CRUISE”

main switch is pressed.

NOTE

. If you move the cruise control lever

or press the main switch button while

turning the ignition switch “ON”, the

cruise control function is deactivated

and the cruise control indicator light

flashes. To reactivate the cruise control

function, turn the ignition switch back

to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and

then turn it again to the “ON” position.

. If this indicator light and the CHECK

ENGINE warning light/malfunction in-

dicator lamp flash simultaneously dur-

ing driving, have the vehicle checked

by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

& Cruise control set in-

dicator light

The cruise contro l set indicator light

illuminates when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position and turns off

after approximately 3 seconds.

This light illuminates when vehicle speed

has been set.

& Headlight indicator

light

This indicator light illuminates when the

light switch is turned to the “

” position

(to turn on the parking lights) or to the

“

” position (to turn on the headlights).

& Front fog light indicator

light

This indicator light illuminates while the

front fog lights are illuminated.

Clock

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with a

genuine SUBARU navigation system,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the navigation system.

The clock shows the time while the

ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”

position.

To adjust the time shown by the clock,

press the “+” button or the “−” button. The

indicated time will change in 1-minute

increments. If you keep the button

pressed, the rate at which the indicated

time changes will speed up.

When you keep either the “+” or “−” button

pressed, time change will pause for 1

second at the end of each 30-minute

change. The clock will start going forward

or backward again quickly after this 1-

second pause.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

set the time during driving, as an

accident could result.

Instruments and controls 3-21

3-22 Instruments and controls

Outside temperature indica-

tor

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with a

genuine SUBARU navigation system,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the navigation system.

U.S.-spec. vehicles

Except U.S.-spec. vehicles

The outside temperature indicator shows

the outside temperature in a range from

−22 to 1228F(−30 to 508C) when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The indicator can give a false reading

under any of the following conditions:

. When there is too much sun.

. During idling; while running at low

speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine

is restarted immediately following a shut-

down.

. When the actual outside temperature

falls outside the specified indicator range.

& Low outside temperature

warning

U.S.-spec. vehicles

Except U.S.-spec. vehicles

When the outside temperature drops to

378F(38C) or lower, the temperature

indication flashes to show that the road

surface may be frozen.

If the outside temperature drops to 378F

(38C) or lower while the display is giving

an indication other than the outside

temperature, the display switches to the

outside temperature indication and flashes

for 5 seconds before returning to its

original indication.

If the display is already indicating an

outside temperature of 378F(38C) or lower

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the indication does not

flash.

NOTE

The outside temperature indication

may differ from the actual outside

temperature. The road surface freeze

warning indication should be treated

only as a guide. Be sure to check the

condition of the road surface before

driving.

Multi function display (vehi-

cles without a genuine

SUBARU navigation system)

NOTE

. If your vehicle is equipped with a

genuine SUBARU navigation system,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the navigation system.

. A liquid-crystal display is used in

the multi function display. You will find

its indications hard to see if you wear

polarized glasses.

Withtheignitionswitchinthe“ON”

position, each successive push of the

“INFO” button toggles the display in the

following sequence:

Press the “INFO” button for more than 1

second to turn off the display. The display

will turn on again if you press either the

“INFO” button or “AUDIO” button.

& Current fuel consumption

U.S.-spec. vehicles

Except U.S.-spec. vehicles

This indication shows the rate of fuel

consumption at the present moment.

Instruments and controls 3-23

– CONTINUED –

3-24 Instruments and controls

& Average fuel consumption

U.S.-spec. vehicles

Except U.S.-spec. vehicles

This indication shows the average rate of

fuel consumption since the trip meter was

last reset.

Pressing the trip knob toggles the indica-

tion between the average fuel consump-

tion corresponding to the A trip meter

indication and the average fuel consump-

tion corresponding to the B trip meter

indication.

When either of the trip meter indications is

reset, the corresponding avera ge fuel

consumption value is also reset.

NOTE

. The indicated values vary in accor-

dance with changes in the vehicle’s

running conditions. Also, the indicated

values m ay differ slightly from the

actual values and should thus be

treated only as a guide.

. When either trip meter indication is

reset, the average fuel consumption

corresponding to that trip meter indica-

tion is not shown until the vehicle has

subsequently covered a distance of 1

mile (or 1 km).

& Driving range on remaining

fuel

U.S.-spec. vehicles

Except U.S.-spec. vehicles

The driving range indicates the distance

that can be driven taking into account the

amount of fuel remaining in the tank and

the average rate of fuel consumption.

When the low fuel warning light illumi-

nates, the driving range indication flashes

for 5 seconds. (The display first switches

to the driving range indication if it was

originally giving some other indication.)

U.S.-spec. vehicles

Except U.S.-spec. vehicles

If the driving range is shown as “ ”,

there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the

tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi-

ately.

NOTE

. The driving range on remaining fuel

is only a guide. The indicated value

may differ from the actual driving range

on remaining fuel, so you must imme-

diately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

. When the low fuel warning light

illuminates, the display automatically

shows “

” even if the currently

selected indication is not for the driv-

ing range on remaining fuel.

& Journey time

The journey time shows the time that has

elapsed since the ignition switch was

turned to the “START” position.

The journey time indication flashes each

time a complete hour has elapsed. If the

Instruments and controls 3-25

– CONTINUED –

3-26 Instruments and controls

display is giving an indication other than

the journey time, the display switches to

the journey time, flashes for 5 seconds,

and returns to its original indication each

time a complete hour has elapsed.

NOTE

The journey time is reset when the

ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK ”

position. It is also reset if the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK” or

“Acc” position prior to restarting of

the engine.

Light control switch

WARNING

To prevent battery discharge result-

ing from accidentally leaving your

lights on when your vehicle is

parked, the light switch operates

only when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position. In any other

position, the vehicle’s lights will be

out.

If you park your vehicle on a road-

side at night, use the hazard warn-

ing flasher to alert the other drivers.

The light switch operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

& Headlights

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the turn signal lever.

first position

Parking lights, instrument panel illumina-

tion, tail lights and license plate light are

on.

second position

Headlights, parking lights, instrument pa-

nel illumination, tail lights, and license

plate light are on.

& High/low beam change (dim-

mer)

To change from low beam to high beam,

push the turn signal lever forward. When

the headlights are on high beam, the high

beam indicator light “

” on the combina-

tion meter also illuminates.

To switch back to low beam, pull the lever

back to the detent position.

& Headlight flasher

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing

position for more than just a few

seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

toward you and then release it. The high

beam will stay on for as long as you hold

the lever. The headlight flasher works

even though the light switch is in the

“OFF” position.

When the headlights are on high beam,

the high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter also illuminates.

& Daytime running light system

WARNING

The brightness of the illumination of

the high beam headlights is reduced

by the daytime running light system.

The light switch must always be

turned to the “ ” position when it

is dark outside.

The high beam headlights will automati-

cally illuminate at reduced bri ghtness

when the engine has started, under the

following conditions:

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The light switch is in the “OFF” or “

”

position.

NOTE

When the light switch is in the “ ”

position, the front side marker lights,

parking lights and license plate lights

are illuminated.

Instruments and controls 3-27

3-28 Instruments and controls

Turn signal lever

To activate the right turn signal, push the

turn signal lever up. To activate the left

turn signal, push the turn signal lever

down. When the turn is finished, the lever

will return automatically. If the lever does

not return after cornering, return the lever

to the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and hold it

during the lane change. The turn signal

indicator lights will flash in the direction of

the turn or lane change. The lever will

return automatically to the neutral position

when you release it.

Illumination brightness con-

trol

When the light switch is in the “OFF”

position, you can adjust the brightness of

the instrument panel illumination for better

visibility.

The brightness of audio, air conditioner,

multi-function display (if equipped) and

instrument panel illumination automati-

cally dims when the light switch is in the

“

” or “ ” position. You can adjust

brightness of the illumination for better

visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

NOTE

When the control dial is turned fully

upward, the illumination b rightness

becomes the maximum and the auto-

matic dimming function does not work

at all.

Headlight beam leveler (if

equipped)

Adjust the headlight beam level with the

following dial positions according to the

number of passengers and load condition:

Instruments and controls 3-29

– CONTINUED –

3-30 Instruments and controls

& For 5-seater models

Dial position Number of front seat

occupants

Number of rear seat

occupants

Load in the luggage

compartment area

Trailer towing

0 1 or 2 0 No load No

1 2 3 No load No

2 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

3 2 3 Full load No

2 3 Full load Yes

1 0 Full load No

1 0 Full load Yes

5 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

& For 7-seater models

Dial position Number of front seat

occupants

Number of 2nd seat

occupants

Number of 3rd seat

occupants

Load in the luggage

compartment area

Trailer towing

0 1 or 2 0 0 No load No

2 0 2 No load No

2 3 2 No load No

2 3 2 Full load No

2 3 2 Full load Yes

4 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

1 0 0 Full load No

1 0 0 Full load Yes

Instruments and controls

3-31

3-32 Instruments and controls

Parking light switch

The parking light switch operates regard-

less of the ignition switch position.

By pushing the front end of this switch,

following lights will illuminate.

– Parking lights

– Front and rear side marker lights

– Tail lights

– License plate lights

To turn off, push the rear end of the

parking light switch.

Avoid leaving these lights on for a long

time because that will run down the

battery.

Front fog light switch

The front fog lights operate only when the

light switch is in the “

” position.

However, the front fog lights turn off when

the headlights are switched to high beam.

To turn on the front fog lights, turn the fog

light switch on the turn signal lever upward

to the “

” position.

To turn off the front fog lights, turn the

switch back down to the “OFF” position.

The indicator light on the combinat ion

meter will illuminate when the fog lights

are illuminated.

Wiper and washer

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the wind-

shield is sufficiently warmed by the

defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can

freeze on the windshield, blocking

your view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 10 sec-

onds, or when the washer fluid

tank is empty. This may cause

overheating of the washer motor.

Check the washer fluid level

frequently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers when

the windshield or rear window is

dry. This may scratch the glass,

damage the wiper blades and

cause the wiper motor to burn

out. Before operating the wiper

on a dry windshield or rear

window, always use the wind-

shield washer.

. In freezing weather, be sure that

the wiper blades are not frozen to

the windshield or rear window

before switching on the wipers.

Attempting to operate the wiper

with the blades frozen to the

window glass could cause not

only the wiper blades to be

damaged but also the wiper mo-

tor to burn out. If the wiper

blades are frozen to the window

glass, be sure to operate the

defroster, wiper deicer (if

equipped) or rear window defog-

ger before turning on the wiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera-

tion because of ice or some other

obstruction on the window, the

wiper motor could burn out even

if the wiper switch is turned off. If

this occurs, promptly stop the

vehicle in a safe place, turn the

ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position and clean the window

glass to allow proper wiper op-

eration.

. Use clean water if windshield

washer fluid is unavailable. In

areas where water freezes in

winter, use SUBARU Windshield

Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Refer to the “Windshield washer

fluid” section in chapter 11.

Also, when driving the vehicle

when there are freezing tempera-

tures, use non-freezing type wi-

per blades.

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

wiper blades.

NOTE

. The front wiper motor is protected

against overloads by a circuit breaker.

The motor operates continuously un-

der an unusually heavy load, the circuit

breaker may trip to stop the motor

temporarily. If this happens, park your

vehicle in a safe place, turn off the

wiper switch, and wait for approxi-

mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker

will reset itself, and the wipers will

again operate normally.

. Clean your wiper blades and win-

dow glass periodically with a washer

solution to prevent streaking, and to

remove accumulations of road salt or

road film. Keep the washer button

depressed at least for 1 second so that

washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield or rear window.

Instruments and controls 3-33

– CONTINUED –

3-34 Instruments and controls

. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-

rial on the windshield or the wiper

blades results in jerky wiper operation

and streaking on the glass. If you

cannot remove those streaks after

operating the washer or if the wiper

operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-

face of the windshield or rear window

and the wiper blades using a sponge or

soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,

rinse the window glass and wiper

blades with clean water. The glass is

clean if no beads form on the glass

when you rinse with water.

. If you cannot eliminate the streaking

even after following this procedure,

replace the wiper blades with new

ones. Refer to the “Replacement of

wiper blades” section in chapter 11 for

replacement instructions.

& Windshield wiper and washer

switches

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” position.

! Windshield wipers

OFF: Park

: Intermittent

LO: Low speed

HI: High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to

the “OFF” position.

! Mist (for a single wipe)

For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the

lever toward you. The wipers operate until

you release the lever.

! Wiper intermittent time control

When the wiper switch is in the “ ”

position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-

ing interval of the wiper.

The operating interval can be adjusted in

nine steps.

The intermittent operation interval varies

depending on the vehicle speed in any of

the adjustment steps (longer when the

vehicle speed is low; shorter when the

vehicle speed is high).

! Washer

To wash the windshield, push the washer

button at the end of the wiper control lever.

The washer fluid sprays until you release

the washer button. The wipers operate

while you push the button.

NOTE

The windshield washer fluid warning

light illuminates when the washer fluid

level in the tank has dropped to the

lower limit. If the warning light illumi-

nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the

tank refilling method, refer to the

“Windshield washer fluid” section in

chapter 11.

& Rear window wiper and

washer switch

: Washer (accompanied by wiper opera-

tion)

ON: Continuous

INT: Intermittent

OFF: Park

: Washer

! Rear wiper

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on

the end of the wiper control lever upward

to the “INT” or “ON” position.

To turn the wiper off, return the knob on

the end of the lever to the “OFF” position.

With the switch turned to the “ INT”

position, the rear wiper will operate inter-

mittently at intervals corresponding to the

Instruments and controls 3-35

– CONTINUED –

3-36 Instruments and controls

vehicle speed (longer when the vehicle

speed is low; shorter when the vehicle

speed is high).

When you subsequently move the selec-

tor lever of the automatic transmission to

the “R” position, the rear wiper will switch

to continuous operation. When you move

the selector lever from the “R” position to

some other position, the rear wiper will

return to intermittent operation.

! Washer

To wash the rear window while the rear

wiper is operating, turn the knob on the

end of the wiper control lever upward to

the “

” position. The washer fluid sprays

until you release the knob.

To wash the rear window when the rear

wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the

end of the wiper control lever downward to

the “

” position. The washer fluid sprays

and the wiper operates until you release

the knob.

Windshield wiper deicer

The windshield wiper deicer operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

Before turning on the windshield wiper

deicer, remove any snow from the wind-

shield. To turn on the windshield wiper

deicer, push the button. The indicator light

located on the button lights up while the

windshield wiper deicer is operating.

The windshield wiper deicer will automa-

tically shut off a fter approximatel y 15

minutes. If the windshield wiper blades

have been deiced completely before that

time, push the button to turn it off. It also

turns off when the ignition switch is turned

to the “Acc” or “ LOCK” position. If deicing

is not complete, you have to push the

button to turn the deicer on again.

Your SUBARU dealer can set your wind-

shield wiper deicer for continuous opera-

tion. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

Once the windshield wiper deicer has

been set for continuous operation, press-

ing the button results in continuous opera-

tion. The windshield wiper deicer auto-

matically stops operating if any one of the

following conditions occurs during contin-

uous operation.

. The outside temperature becomes

418F(58C) or higher.

. The vehicle speed remains at 9 mph

(15 km/h) or lower for 15 minutes.

. The battery voltage decreases below

the permissible level.

Rear window defogger but-

ton

The rear window defogger operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

The rear window defogger button is

located on the climate control panel.

To turn on the defogger, push the button.

To turn it off, push the button again.

The indicator light located on the button

lights up while the rear window defogger is

operating.

The defogger will automatically shut off

after approximately 15 minutes. If the

window clears before that time, push the

button to turn it off. It also turns off when

the ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or

“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging

is desired when you restart your vehicle,

you have to push the button to turn it on

again.

Your SUBARU dealer can set your rear

window defogger for continuous opera-

tion. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

Once the rear window defogger has been

set for co ntinuous operation, the rear

window defogger repeatedly operates for

15 minutes, stops for 2 minutes, and again

operates for 15 minutes. If the battery

voltage drops below the permissible level,

continuous operation is canceled and

operation stops as described in the

following.

. If the battery voltage drops below the

permissible level within 15 minutes of

depression of the button, continuous

operation is canceled and the rear window

defogger stops operating 15 minutes later.

. If the battery voltage drops below the

permissible level after the rear window

defogger has, following depression of the

button, operated for 15 minutes, stopped

operating for 2 minutes, and started

operating again, the rear window defogger

immediately stops operating.

CAUTION

. Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface

of the rear window. They may

damage the conductors printed

on the window.

. To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the

defogger continuously for any

longer than necessary.

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with the

outside mirror defogger, the outside

mirror defogger operates while the rear

window defogger is operating.

Instruments and controls 3-37

3-38 Instruments and controls

Mirrors

Always check that the inside and outside

mirrors are properly adjusted before you

start driving.

& Inside mirror

The inside mirror has a day and night

position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the

mirror toward you for the night position.

Push it away for the day position. The

night position reduces glare from head-

lights.

& Auto-dimming mirror/com-

pass (if equipped)

1) Left button

2) Auto dimming indicator

3) Photosensor

4) Right button

The auto-dimming mirror/compass has an

anti-glare feature which automatically re-

duces glare coming from headlights of

vehicles behind you. It also contains a

built-in compass.

. By pres sing and r eleasi ng the left

button, the automatic dimming function is

toggled on or off. When the automatic

dimming function is on, the auto dimming

indicator light (green) located to the right

of the button will illuminate.

. By pressing and releasing the right

button, the compass display is toggled on

or off. Wh en the compass is on, a n

illuminated compass reading will appear

in the lower part of the mirror.

Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,

the mirror surface turns bright if the

transmission is shifted into reverse. This

is to ensure good rearward visibility during

reversing.

! Photosensors

The mirror has a photosensor attached on

both the front and back sides. If the glare

from the headlights of vehicles behind you

strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it

and make the reflection surface of the

mirror dimmer to help prevent you from

being blinded. For this reason, use care

not to cover the sensors with stickers, or

other similar items. Periodically wipe the

sensors clean using a piece of dry soft

cotton cloth or an applicator.

! Compass calibration

1. For optimum calibration, switch off all

nonessential electrical accessories (rear

window defogger, heater/air conditioning

system, spotlight, et c.) and ensure all

doors are shut.

2. Drive to an open, level area away from

large metallic objects or structures and

make certain the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

3. Press and hold the left button for 3

seconds then release, and the compass

will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and

direction will be displayed.

4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL”

disappears from the display (approxi-

mately two or three circles). The compass

is now calibrated.

5. Further calibration may be necessary

should outside influences cause the mirror

to read inaccurately. You will know that

this has occurred if your compass begins

to read in only limited directions. Should

you encounter this situation, return to step

one of the above procedure and recali-

brate the mirror.

! Compass zone adjustment

1. The zone setting is factory preset to

Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration

zone” map attached to the end of this

manual to verify that the compass zone

setting is correct for your geographical

location.

2. Press and hold the right button for 3

seconds then release, and the word

“ZONE” will briefly appear and then the

zone number will be displayed.

3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly

to cycle the display through all possible

zone settings. Stop cycling when the

correct zone setting for your location is

displayed.

4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will

exit the zone setting mode.

& Outside mirrors

! Convex mirror (passenger side)

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex

mirror and farther away than when

viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use

the convex mirror to judge the

distance of ve hicles be hind you

when changing lanes. Use the inside

mirror (or glance backwards) to

determine the actual size and dis-

tance of objects that you view in

convex mirror.

Instruments and controls 3-39

– CONTINUED –

3-40 Instruments and controls

! Remote control mirror switch

The remote control mirrors operate only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“Acc” position.

1. Turn the knob to the “L” side to adjust

the left-hand mirror or to the “R” side to

adjust the right-hand mirror.

2. Move the knob in the direction you

want to move the mirror.

3. Return the knob to the neutral position

to prevent unintentional operation.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-

ally.

! Outside mirror defogger

The outside mirror defogger shares the

button with rear window defogger.

The outside mirror defogger operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

To turn on the outside mirror defogger,

push the button.

To turn it off, push the button again. The

indicator light located on the button lights

up while the outside mirror defogger is

operating.

The defogger will automatically shut off

after approximate ly 15 minutes. If the

mirror clears before that time, push the

button to turn it off. It also turns off when

the ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or

“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging

is desired when you restart your vehicle,

you have to push the button to turn it on

again.

NOTE

. While the outside mirror defogger is

operating, the rear window defogger

also operates.

. When the rear window defogger has

been set for continuous operation, the

outside mirror defogger also operates

continuously. Refer to the “Rear win-

dow defogger button” section in this

chapter.

CAUTION

To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the de-

fogger continuously for any longer

than necessary.

! Power folding mirror switch (Latin

American models, if equipped)

1) Power folding mirror switch

The power folding mirror switch operates

only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

or “Acc” position.

To fold the outside mirrors, push the power

folding mirror switch. To unfold the mirrors,

push the switch again.

NOTE

. When the temperature is low, the

outside mirrors may stop during opera-

tion. Push the switch again. When the

outside mirrors do not work by switch

operation, move them several times

manually. This makes it possible to

operate them by switch operation.

. When you operate the power folding

mirror switch continuously, it may

temporarily stop working. This is not

a malfunction. Operate it again after

waiting for a short period of time.

. When you unfold the outside mirrors

manually, the mirrors may become

unstable. Be sure to unfold the mirrors

by switch operation. If the outside

mirrors are still unstable, fold the

mirrors again manually and then unfold

them by switch operation.

Tilt steering wheel

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt

position while driving. This may

cause loss of vehicle control and

result in personal injury.

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the

“Front seats” section in chapter 1.

2. Pull the tilt lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

level.

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

Instruments and controls 3-41

– CONTINUED –

3-42 Instruments and controls

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and down.

Horn

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Ventilator.............................................................. 4-2

Air flow ............................................................... 4-2

Ventilator ............................................................ 4-4

Automatic climate control system ..................... 4-5

Control panel ...................................................... 4-5

Rear air conditioner (if equipped)......................... 4-8

Temperature sensors........................................... 4-9

Operating tips for heater and air

conditioner....................................................... 4-10

Cleaning ventilator grille..................................... 4-10

Efficient cooling after parking in direct

sunlight ........................................................... 4-10

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant

circuit.............................................................. 4-10

Checking air conditioning system before summer

season ............................................................ 4-10

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and

low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-10

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine

is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-10

Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-10

Air filtration system ........................................... 4-11

Replacing the air filter........................................ 4-11

Climate control

4-2 Climate control

Ventilator

& Air flow

! Air flow mode selection

Climate control 4-3

– CONTINUED –

4-4 Climate control

& Ventilator

! Center ventilators

Move the tab up and down or right and left

to adjust the flow direction.

! Side ventilators

1) Open

2) Close

Move the tab up and down or right and left

to adjust the flow direction.

To open the ventilator, turn the side grille

open/close wheel upward.

To close it, turn the wheel downward.

! Rear ventilators (if equipped)

Move the tab up and down or rotate right

and left to adjust the flow direction.

Automatic climate control

system

NOTE

. Operate the automatic climate con-

trol system when the engine is running.

. The blower fan rotates at a low

speed when the engine coolant tem-

perature is low.

For efficient defogging or dehumidify-

ing in cold weather, press the “A/C”

button.

. Even when cooling is not necessary,

setting the te mperature much lower

than the current outlet air temperature

turns on the air conditioner compres-

sor automatically and the indicator

light on the “A/C” button illuminates.

. 7-seater models each have a rear air

conditioner. The fan speed of the rear

air conditioner can be adjusted, but

other adjustments (outlet air tempera-

ture, air distribution, etc.) are not

possible for the rear air conditioner.

For details, refer to “Rear air condi-

tioner” in this section.

The automatic climate c ontr ol sys tem

automatically controls outlet air tempera-

ture, fan speed, air flow distribution air-

inlet control, and air conditioner compres-

sor operation. It activates when the

“AUTO” button is pressed, and is used to

maintain a constant, comfortable climate

within the passenger compartment.

The temperature can be set within a range

of 65 to 858F (18 to 328C).

& Control panel

1) Temperature control dial (driver’s side)

2) Defroster button

3) Fan speed control dial

4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

“Rear window defogger button” in chap-

ter 3.)

5) Temperature control dial (passenger’s

side)

6) Air conditioner button

7) Air flow mode selection button

8) Air inlet selection button

9) OFF button

10) AUTO button

! AUTO button

AUTO mode operation:

When the “AUTO” button is pressed, the

indicator light on the button illuminates. In

this state, fan speed, air flow distribution,

air-inlet control, and air conditioner com-

pressor operation are automatically con-

trolled.

Manual mode operation:

If you operate any of the buttons on the

control panel other than the “OFF” button

and temperature control dial during auto-

matic mode operation, the indicator light

will turn off. You can then manually control

the system as desired using the button

you operated.

To change the system back to the AUTO

mode, press the “AUTO” button.

Climate control 4-5

– CONTINUED –

4-6 Climate control

! OFF button

The Automatic Climate Control system

turns off (the air conditioner compressor

and fan turn off) when the “OFF” button is

pressed.

When the “OFF ” button is pressed, the

outside air introduction mode (air inlet

selection OFF) is automatically selected.

! Temperature control dial

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

It is possible to make separate tempera-

ture settings for the driver’ssideand

passenger’s side. Each temperature

setting is shown on the display. With the

dial set at your desired temperature, the

system automatically adjusts the tempera-

ture of air supplied from the outlets such

that the desired temperature is achieved

and maintained.

Turning the dial counterclockwise and

releasing it reduces the temperature by

18F (0.58C). Turning the dial clockwise

and releasing it increases the temperature

by 18F (0.58C). Holding the dial in either

turned position causes the temperature to

change continuously.

With the minimum temperature set, the

system gives maximum cooling perfor-

mance. With the maximum temperature

set, the system gives maximum heating

performance.

! – Defroster button

To defrost or dehumidify the windshield

and front door windows, push the defros-

ter button “

”. When the “ ” button is

pushed, outside air is drawn into the

passenger compartment, air flow is direc-

ted towards the windshield and front door

windows, and the indicator light on the

button illuminates.

After eliminating the fogging from the

windshield, return the cli mate control

system to the AUTO mode by pushing

the “AUTO” button or turn off by pushing

the “OFF” button.

Alternatively, push the “

” button again

to return the system to the setting that was

selected before you activated the defros-

ter.

! Fan speed control dial

The fan speed control dial has 7 positions:

AUTO position and 6 different fan speed

positions.

The fan speed is shown on the center of

the dial.

With the fan speed control dial in the

AUTO position, the fan speed changes

automatically corresponding the various

conditions: air temperature inside and

outside of the passenger’s compartment,

intensity of the sunlight, etc.

! A/C – Air conditioner button

If the windshield starts to fog when the

climate control system is operated in the

AUTO mode, push the air conditioner

button to defog and dehumidify.

When this button is pushed, the air

conditioner compressor turns on and the

indicator light on the button illuminates.

After eliminating the fogging from the

windshield, set the system back to the

AUTO mode by pushing the “AUTO”

button.

NOTE

The air conditioner compressor does

not operate when the outside air tem-

perature is below 328F(08C).

Climate control 4-7

– CONTINUED –

4-8 Climate control

! Air flow mode selection button

Select the desired air flow mode b y

pushing the air flow mode selection

button. The selected air flow mode is

shown on the center of the dial.

(Ventilation): Air flows through the

instrument panel outlets.

(Bi-level): Air fl ows through the

instrument panel outlets and the foot

outlets.

(Heat): Air flows through the instru-

ment panel outlets, the foot outlets, and

some through the windshiel d defroster

outlets.

(Heat-def): Air flows through the

instrument panel outlets, the windshield

defroster outlets, and the foot outlets.

! Air inlet selection button

ON position (recirculation): Interior air is

recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the

air inlet selection button to the ON position

for fast cooling with the air conditioner or

when driving on a dusty road. The

indicator light will illuminate.

OFF position (outside air): Outside air is

drawn into the passenger compartment.

Push the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position when the interior has cooled

to a comfortable temperature and the road

is no longer dusty. The indicator light will

turn off.

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi-

tion may fog up the windows. Switch

to the OFF position as soon as the

outside dusty condition clears.

NOTE

When driving on a dusty road or behind

a vehicle that emits unpleasant exhaust

gases, set the air inlet selection button

to the ON position.

From time to time, return the air inlet

selection button to the OFF position to

draw outside air into the passenger

compartment.

& Rear air conditioner (if

equipped)

The rear air conditioner blows cool air out

of the rear ventilator s while the “A/C”

button on the control panel is in the “ON”

position. The fan speed of the rear air

conditioner can be adjusted using the rear

air conditioner dial behind the center

console. The fan speed can be adjusted

in four steps by turning the dial. Turn the

dial to the “OFF” position to stop the fan.

NOTE

. When the “A/C” button is in the

“OFF” position and when the “A/C”

indicator is not illumi nated during

AUTO mode operation, the air condi-

tioner compressor does not operate,

meaning that the system merely blows

uncooled air out of the ventilators.

. The outlet air temperature of the rear

air conditioner cannot be adjusted.

. The rear air conditioner cannot be

used as a heater.

& Temperature sensors

1) Interior air temperature sensor

2) Solar sensor

The automatic climate control system

employs several sensors. These sensors

are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly

and become damaged, the system may

not be able to control the interior tempera-

ture correctly. To avoid damaging the

sensors, observe the following precau-

tions:

– Do not subject the sensors to impact.

– Keep water away from the sensors.

– Do not cover the sensors.

The sensors are located as follows:

– Solar sensor: beside windshield

defroster grille

– Interior air temperature sensor: on the

side of the driver-side part of the center

panel

– Outside temperature sensor: behin d

front grille

Climate control 4-9

4-10 Climate control

Operating tips for heater and

air conditioner

& Cleaning ventilator grille

Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions

to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.

Since the condenser is located in front of

the radiator, this area should be kept clean

because cooling performance is impaired

by any accumulation of insects and leaves

on the condenser.

& Efficient cooling after parking

in direct sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes to

allow outside air to circulate into the

heated interior. This results in quicker

cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the

windows closed during the operation of

the air conditioner for maximum cooling

efficiency.

& Lubrication oil circulation in

the refrigerant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at

a low engine speed (at idle or low driving

speeds) a few minutes each month during

the off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking air conditioning

system before summer sea-

son

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-

ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper

operation each spring. Have your

SUBARU dealer perform this check.

& Cooling and dehumidifying in

high humidity and low tem-

perature weather conditions

Under certain weather conditions (high

relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a

small amount of water vapor emission

from the air outlets may be noticed. This

condition is normal and does not indicate

any probl em with the air conditioni ng

system.

& Air conditioner compressor

shut-off when engine is

heavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,

the air conditioner compressor is designed

to temporarily shut off during air condi-

tioner operation whenever the accelerator

is fully depressed such as during rapid

acceleration or when driving on a steep

upgrade.

& Refrigerant for your climate

control system

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-

od of adding, changing or checking the

refrigerant is different from the method for

CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU

dealer for service. Repairs needed as a

result of using the wrong refrigerant are

not covered under warranty.

Air filtration system

Replace the filter element according to the

replacement schedule shown in the fol-

lowing. This schedule should be followed

to maintain the filter’s dust collection

ability. Under extremely dusty conditions,

the filter should be replaced more fre-

quently. It is recommended that you have

your filter checked or replaced by your

SUBARU dealer. For replace ment, we

recommend the use of a genuine

SUBARU air filter kit.

Replacement schedule:

Every 15 months or 15,000 miles (24,000

km) whichever comes first

& Replacing the air filter

1. Remove the instrument panel side

cover.

NOTE

The instrument panel side cover is held

in place with four pins.

2. Unhook the strap.

3. Remove the glove box by detaching

the one clip on the side.

Climate control 4-11

– CONTINUED –

4-12 Climate control

4. Remove the air filter cover by detach-

ing the five clips.

5. Unhook the air filter and draw it out.

6. Replace the air filter with a new one.

7. Install the air filter cover.

8. Install the glove box.

9. Attach the strap to the hook.

10. Secure the glove box with the one clip.

11. Install the instrument panel side cover.

12. Label installation

Attach the caution label to the driver’s

door.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the

following occurs, even if it is not yet

time to change the filter:

– Reduction of the air flow through

the vents.

– Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-

tioning, heating and defroster perfor-

mance if not properly maintained.

Climate control 4-13

————————————————————————————————————————

Antenna system .................................................. 5-2

Printed antenna................................................... 5-2

FM reception ....................................................... 5-2

satellite radio reception (if equipped)...... 5-2

Installation of accessories.................................. 5-4

Audio set ............................................................. 5-4

Type A audio set ................................................. 5-4

Type B audio set ................................................. 5-4

Type A audio set (if equipped) ........................... 5-5

Radio operation................................................... 5-5

Compact disc player operation ........................... 5-11

Type B audio set (if equipped).......................... 5-16

Radio operation ................................................. 5-16

Built in CD changer operation ............................ 5-22

Audio control buttons ....................................... 5-27

MODE button ..................................................... 5-27

Aux unit operation............................................. 5-29

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system

operation (if equipped) ................................... 5-29

Precautions to observe when handling a

compact disc................................................... 5-30

Audio

5-2 Audio

Antenna system

& Printed antenna

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the window on which the antenna is

printed. Doing so may damage the

antenna printed on the window.

The antenna is printed on the inner

surface of the rear window glass.

NOTE

Antenna performance will deteriorate

significantly if you apply tinting film or

any other material over the antenna

portion of the rear window glass.

& FM reception

Although FM is normally static free,

reception can be affected by the surround-

ing area, atmospheric conditions, station

strength and transmitter distance. Build-

ings or other obstructions may cause

momentary static, flutter or station inter-

ference. If reception continues to be

unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.

NOTE

If a cell phone is placed near the radio,

it may cause the radio to emit noise

when it receives calls. This noise does

not indicate a radio malfunction.

satellite radio reception

(if equipped)

is a continental U.S. based satellite

radio service including music, news,

sports, talk and children’s programming.

provides digital quality audio and

text information, including song title and

artist name. A service fee is required to

receive the XM

service. For more

information, contact XM

www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-

XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346) for U.S.

www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR

(1-877-438-9677) for Canada.

The XM

satellite radio receiver that is

fitted to your vehicle receives the neces-

sary signals from two specially designated

satellites that are in a geostationary orbit

over the equator. One satellite covers the

east coast and the other covers the west

coast. Both of them direct their signals

north. These signals are then relayed

throughout the USA by a network of

ground repeater stations. The sat ellite

radio signals are transmitted as “line of

sight” signals. Line of sight signals can be

blocked by objects such as buildings, but

the network of repeater stations allows

signal coverage within urban areas such

as cities.

You may experience problems in receiving

satellite radio signals in the follow-

ing situations.

. If you are driving northward in a coastal

area

You will notice that the XM

satellite

radio antenna is fixed to the upper right

hand corner of your windscreen.

The signal comes from the south and may

not be able to reach the antenna in some

circumstances when you are driving north.

. If you are driving in a tunnel or a

covered parking area

. If you are driving beneath the top level

of a multi-level freeway

. If you drive under a bridge

. If you are driving next to a tall vehicle

(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the

signal

. If you are driving in a valley where the

surrounding hills or peaks block the signal

from the south

. If you are driving on a mountain road

where the southern direction is blocked by

mountains

. If you are driving in an area with tall

trees that block the signal (10 m or more),

for example on a road that goes through a

dense forest

. The signal can become weak in some

areas that are not covered by the repeater

station network.

Pleas e note that these may be other

unforeseen circumstances when there

are problems with the reception of XM

satellite radio signals.

Audio 5-3

5-4 Audio

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing a citizen band radio or

other transmitting device in your vehicle.

Such devices may cause the electronic

control system to malfunction if they are

incorrectly installed or if they are not

suited for the vehicle.

Audio set

Your SUBARU may be equipped with one

of the following audio sets. See the pages

indicated in this section for operating

details.

& Type A audio set

. Radio operation: refer to page 5-5

. CD (compact disc) player operation:

refer to page 5-11

& Type B audio set

. Radio operation: refer to page 5-16

. Built-in CD changer operation: refer to

page 5-22

Type A audio set (if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” position.

& Radio operation

(1) Satellite radio mode button

(2) FM AM mode button

(3) Auxiliary unit and Rear seat entertain-

ment button

(4) Tuning button

(5) AUDIO button

(6) Power switch, volume control dial

(7) Seek button

(8) Scan button

(9) Tone and Balance button

(10) Preset button

! Power switch and volume control

The dial (6) is used for both power (ON/

OFF) and volume control. The radio is

turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial

and the volume is controlled by turning the

dial. The dial can also be used for tone

and balance adjustment.

! Tone and balance control

The volume control dial (6) normally

functions as a volume control. This dial

becomes a control for Bass, Midrange,

Treble, Fader or Balance when you select

the appropriate tone and balance control

mode.

Choose desired volume level for each

mode by turning the volume control dial.

The control function returns to volume

control mode after approximately 5 sec-

onds.

Audio 5-5

– CONTINUED –

5-6 Audio

! To change tone and balance control

modes

Each brief press of the “TONE BAL”

button (9) changes control modes in the

following sequence starting from volume

control mode. (When the radio is first

turned on, the control mode is in the

volume control.)

The “ TONE BAL ” button is used for

selecting the following control modes:

Control mode (range of le-

vels)

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

Bass control (−6 to +6) For less bass sound For more bass sound

Midrange control (−6 to +6) For less midrange sound For more midrange sound

Treble control (−6 to +6) For less treble sound For more treble sound

Fader control (R9 to F9)

To increase rear speaker vo-

lume and decrease front speak-

er volume

To increase front speaker vo-

lume and decrease rear speaker

volume

Balance control (L9 to R9)

To increase left speaker volume

and decrease right speaker vo-

lume

To increase right speaker vo-

lume and decrease left speaker

volume

Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume

AUX volume control* (0 to

40)

For less volume

For more volume

* Only when an AUX audio product is connected.

! FM/AM radio

! FM/AM selection button

Push the “FM AM” button (2) when the

radio is off to turn on the radio.

Push the “FM AM” button when the radio

is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.

! Stereo indicator

The stereo indicator “ST” will illuminate

when an FM stereo broadcast is received.

! Manual tuning

Press the “

” side of the “TUNE TRACK”

button (4) to increase the tuning frequency

and press the “

” side of the button to

decrease it.

Each time the button is pressed, the

frequency interval can be changed be-

tween 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2

MHz in the FM mode.

If you hold down the “

” side of the

button, the tuning frequency will increase

continuously, and if you hold down the “

”

side of the button, the tuning frequency

will decrease continuously. Release the

button when your desired frequency is

reached.

Audio 5-7

– CONTINUED –

5-8 Audio

NOTE

While you are holding down either side

of the “TUNE TRACK” button, the

tuning frequency will not stop chan-

ging even if the frequency of a recei-

vable station is reached.

! Seek tuning

If you press the “

” or “ ” side of the

“SEEK FLDR” button (7), the radio will

automatically search for a receivable

station and stop at the first one it finds.

This function may not be available, how-

ever, when radio signals are weak. In such

a situation, perform manual tuning to

select the desired station.

! Automatic tuning (SCAN)

Press the “SCAN” button (8) to change the

radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the

radio scans through the radio band until a

station is found. The radio will stop at the

station for 5 seconds while displaying the

frequency, after which scanning will con-

tinue until the entire band has been

scanned from the low end to the high

end. Press the “SCAN” button again to

cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any

displayed frequency.

Press the “

” or “ ” side of the “SEEK

FLDR” button (7) again to cancel the scan

mode and to stop on any displayed

frequency.

When the “SCAN” button is pressed for

automatic tuning, stations are scanned in

the direction of low frequencies to high

frequencies only.

Automatic tuning may not function prop-

erly if the station reception is weakened by

distance from the station or proximity to

tall buildings and hills.

! Selecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset button

(10) allows you to select that station in a

single operation. Up to six, AM, FM1 and

FM2 stations each may be preset.

! How to preset stations

1. Press the “FM AM” button (2) to select

FM1, FM2, or AM reception.

2. Press the “SCAN” button (8) or tune

the radio manually until the desired station

frequency is displayed.

3. Press one of the preset buttons (10)

for more than 1.5 seconds to store the

frequency. If the button is pressed for less

than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection

will remain in memory.

NOTE

. If the connection between the radio

and battery is broken for any reason

such as vehicle maintenance or radio

removal, all stations stored in the

preset buttons are cleared. If this

occurs, it is necessary to reset the

preset buttons.

. If a cell phone is placed near the

radio, it may cause the radio to emit

noise when it receives calls. This noise

does not indicate a radio malfunction.

! Satellite radio mode (if equipped)

To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to

install the SUBARU genuine satell ite

receiver (optional part) and to enter into

a contract. For details, please contact your

SUBARU dealer.

! Sirius satellite radio

Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovation

that allows the listener to experience

digital sound quality and to have a greater

variety of channels.

Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a

tuner, antenna and a service contract. For

details, please contact your SUBA RU

dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at

www.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS

(7474) for more information. Sirius, the

Sirius dog logo, channel names and logos

are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio

Inc.

! XM

satellite radio

is a continental U.S. based satellite

radio service including music, news,

sports, talk and children’s programming.

provides digital quality audio and

text information, including song title and

artist name. A service fee is required to

receive the XM

service. For more

information, contact your SUBARU dealer

or XM

www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-

XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346) for U.S.

www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR

(1-877-438-9677) for Canada.

! Satellite radio reception

Satellite radio signals are best received in

areas with a clear view of the open sky. In

areas where there are tall buildings, trees,

tunnels or other structures that may

obstruct the signal of the satellites, there

may be signal interruptions. Other circum-

stances that may result in signal loss

include driving near a wall, steep cliff or

hill, or driving on the lower level of a multi-

tiered road or inside a parking garage.

To help reduce this condition, satellite

rad io providers have in stalled ground-

based repeaters in heavily populated

areas. However, you may still experience

reception problems in some areas.

! Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner

When you activate satellite radio, you

should have your satellite radio tuner ID

ready because each tuner is identified by

its unique satellite radio tuner ID.

The satellite radio ID will be needed when

you activate satellite radio and receive

satellite radio customer support.

The satellite radio ID can be found on the

audio display by tuning the channel to “0”.

Turn the “TUNE TRACK” button (4) to

select the satellite radio channel.

! Band selection button

Push the “SAT” button (1) when the radio

is off to turn on the radio.

Push the “ SAT” button when the radio is

on to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep-

tion.

! Channel selection

Press “

” of the “TUNE TRACK” button

(4) to select the next channel and press

“

” of the button to select the previous

channel.

Keep pressing “

” of the button to

change to the next channel continuously

and keep pressing “

” of the button to

change to the previous channel continu-

ously.

! Category selection

Press “

” or “ ” of the “SEEK FLDR”

button (7) to display the current category.

Press “

” again to select the next

category, and press “

” again to select

the previous category.

! Channel scan

Press the “SCAN” button (8) to change the

radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the

radio scans through the channels until a

station is found. The radio will stop at the

station for 5 seconds while displaying the

channel number, after which scanning will

continue until the entire channel has been

scanned from the low end to the high end.

Also during the category selection, chan-

nel scan can be performed in that cate-

gory.

Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel

the SCAN mode and to stop on any

displayed channel.

! Selecting preset channels

Presetting a channel with a preset button

(10) allows you to select that channel in a

single operation. Up to six, SAT1, SAT2

and SAT3 channels each may be preset.

! How to preset channels

1. Press the “SAT” button (1) to select

SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 reception.

Audio 5-9

– CONTINUED –

5-10 Audio

2. Press the “SCAN” button (8) or the

“TUNE TRACK” button (4) to select the

channel.

3. Press one of the preset buttons (10)

for more than 1.5 seconds to store the

channel. If the button is pressed for less

than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection

will remain in memory.

NOTE

If the connection between the radio and

battery is broken for any reason such

as vehicle maintenance or radio re-

moval, all channels stored in the preset

buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is

necessary to reset the preset buttons.

! Display selection

Press the “AUDIO” button (5) while receiv-

ing satellite radio to change the display as

follows:

! Rear seat entertainment

If your vehicle is equipped with a Rear

Seat Entertainment System, you can

enjoy audio outputs from the system

through the vehicle’s speakers by press-

ing the “RSE AUX” button (3). Press the

button again to return to the audio set

sound.

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with a Rear

Seat Entertainment System, refer to the

Owner’s Manu al supplement for the

Rear Seat Entertainment System for

further details.

& Compact disc player operation

(1) CD button

(2) Track button

(3) AUDIO button

(4) Seek and Folder button

(5) Random button

(6) Repeat button

(7) Scan button

(8) Eject button

! To playback a compact disc

! When CD is not in the player

Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole

while gripping the edge of the disc, then

insert it in to the slot (with the label side

up) and the player will automatically pull

the disc into position.

NOTE

. DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO

THE DISC INSERTION SLOT AT A TIME.

. Be sure to insert a disc with the label

side up. If you insert the disc the label

side down, “CHECK DISC” will appear

on the display and the player will not

play anything.

. After the last song finishes, the

player will automatically return to track

1 (the first song on the disc).

Audio 5-11

– CONTINUED –

5-12 Audio

. If you insert a disc that cannot be

played by the player, “CHECK DISC”

will appear on the display and the

player will revert to the previously

selected mode.

. The player is designed to be able to

play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,

but it may not be able to play certain

ones.

. CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are not

supported, and if inserted, they will be

immediately ejected.

! When CD is in the player

When the “CD” button (1) is pressed, the

player will start playback.

NOTE

After the last song finishes, the player

will automatically return to track 1 (the

first song on the disc).

! To stop playback of a CD

When the “PUSH POWER” button is

pressed during playback of a CD, the CD

stops playing temporarily. To let the CD

resume playing, press the button again.

! To select a song from its beginning

! Forward direction

Briefly press the “

” side of the “TUNE

TRACK” button (2) to skip to the beginning

of the next track/file (track). Each time this

side of the button is pressed, the indicated

track/file (track) number will increase.

NOTE

In an MP3 folder, skipping past the last

track/file (track) will take you back to

the first track/file (track) in the folder.

! Backward direction

Briefly press the “

” side of the “TUNE

TRACK” button (2) to skip to the beginning

of the current track/file (track). Each time

this side of the button is pressed, the

indicated track/file (track) number will

decrease.

NOTE

In an MP3 folder, skipping past the last

track/file (track) will take you back to

the first track/file (track) in the folder.

! Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing

! Fast-forwarding

Press the “

” side of the “TUNE TRACK”

button (2) continuously to fast-forward the

track/file.

Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.

NOTE

If you fast-forward past the last track/

file (track) on the disc, the player will

select the first track/file (track) on the

disc and start playing it.

! Fast-reversing

Press the “

” side of the “TUNE TRACK”

button (2) continuously to fast-reverse the

track/file (track).

Release the button to stop fast-reversing.

NOTE

If you fast-reverse to the beginning of

the first track/file (track) on the disc,

the fast-reversing will stop and the

player will start playing the first track/

file (track) on the disc.

! Folder selection (MP3 disc)

Press the “

” side of the “SEEK FLDR”

button (4) briefly to select the next folder.

Pressing the “

” side of the same button

the first time makes the player go back to

the beginning of the currently selected file;

pressing it a second time makes it go back

to the previously selected file.

NOTE

Only MP3 folders are recognized when

an attempt to select the next or pre-

vious folder is made. If no appropriate

folder exists on the disc, pressing the

“

” or “ ” side of the “SEEK FLDR”

button has no effect.

! Repeating

! To repeat the currently playing track/

file (track)

To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press

the “RPT” button (6) while the track/file

(track) is playing. The display will show

“RPT”, and the track/file (track) will be

repeated.

To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play

mode:

Press the “RPT” button once (non-MP3

disc)

Press the “RPT” button twice (MP3 disc)

The “RPT” indication will turn off, and the

normal playback mode will be resumed.

NOTE

. With an MP3 disc inserted, each

time you briefly press the button, the

mode will change to the next one in the

following sequence.

If you accidentally press the button and

cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play

mode, press it again to reselect the

repeat-play mode.

. The repeat-play mode will be can-

celed if you perform any of the follow-

ing steps:

. Press the “RDM” button

. Press the “SCAN” button

. Press the “

” button

. Select the radio mode

. Press the “RSE AUX” button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc)

. Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

! To repeat the currently playing folder

(MP3 disc)

To repeat the currently playing f older,

press the “RPT” button (6) twice while a

file (track) is playing. The display will show

“F-RPT”, and the folder will be played

repeatedly.

To cancel the folder repeat-play mode,

press the “RPT” button once more. The

“F-RPT” indication will turn off, and the

normal playback mode will be resumed.

NOTE

. Each time you briefly press the

button, the mode will change to the

next one in the following sequence.

If you accidentally press the button and

cancel the folder repeat-play mode,

press it again to reselect the folder

repeat-play mode.

. The folder repeat-play mode will be

cancelled if you perform any of the

following steps:

. Press the “RDM” button

. Press the “SCAN” button

. Press the “

” button

. Select the radio mode

. Press the “RSE AUX” button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc)

. Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

! Random playback

! Non-MP3 disc

Press the “RDM” button (5) briefly during

disc playback to play all of the tracks on

the disc in a random order. The display will

show “RDM”, and all of the tracks on the

disc will be played in a random order.

To cancel random mode, press the button

again. The “RDM” indication will turn off,

and the normal playback mode will be

resumed.

Audio 5-13

– CONTINUED –

5-14 Audio

NOTE

Random playback will be cancelled if

you perform any of the following steps:

. Press the “RPT” button

. Press the “SCAN” button

. Press the “

” button

. Select the radio mode

. Press the “RSE AUX” button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

“SEEK FLDR” button

. Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

! MP3 disc

Press the “RDM” button (5) during disc

playback to play all of the tracks in the

folder currently being played in random

order. Press the “RDM” button again to

play all of the tracks on the disc in random

order. The display will show “RDM” during

the random mode.

To cancel the random mode, press the

“RDM” button during “in-disc” random

playback. The “RDM” indication will turn

off, and the normal playback mode will be

resumed.

NOTE

. Each time you briefly press the

button, the mode will change to the

next one in the following sequence.

If you accidentally press the button and

cancel the random mode, press it again

to reselect the random mode.

. Random playback will be cancelled

if you perform any of the following

steps:

. Press the “RPT” button

. Press the “SCAN” button

. Press the “

” button

. Select the radio mode

. Press the “RSE AUX” button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

“SEEK FLDR” button

. Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

! Scan

The scan mode lets you listen to the first

10 seconds of each track/file (track) on the

disc/folder in s uccession. Press the

“SCAN” button (7) to start scanning

through all tracks upward beginning with

the track/file (track) following the currently

selected one. After all tracks/files (tracks)

on the disc/folder has been scanned,

normal playback mode is restored.

To cancel a scan, press the button again.

NOTE

The scan mode will be cancelled if you

perform any of the following opera-

tions:

. Press the “RPT” button

. Press the “RDM” button

. Press the “

” button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

“TUNE TRACK” button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc)

. Select the radio mode

. Press the “RSE AUX” button

. Turn off t he power of the audio

equipment.

. Turntheignitionswitchtothe

“LOCK” position.

! To eject a disc from the player

When a disc is being played back or when

a disc is in the player, press the “

”

button (8). The disc will be ejected.

NOTE

. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD

sticking out, because vibration might

make it fall out.

. If the disc is left ejected for more

than approximately 15 seconds after

the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK” position, a disc protection

function will operate, automatically

reloading the disc. In this case, the

disc is not played.

! Display selection (MP3 disc)

If you press the “AUDIO” button (3) during

playback, the indication will change to the

next one in the following sequence.

! Page (track/folder title) scroll (MP3

disc)

If, having pressed the “AUDIO” button (3)

to select track title or folder title display,

you press the “AUDIO” button again for

less than 0.5 second, the title will be

scrolled so you can see all of it. You will

see eight characters at a time.

NOTE

The display is designed to show titles

for up to three pages (64 characters in

total).

Audio 5-15

5-16 Audio

Type B audio set (if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” positions.

& Radio operation

(1) Satellite radio mode button

(2) FM AM mode button

(3) Auxiliary unit and Rear seat entertain-

ment button

(4) Tuning button

(5) AUDIO button

(6) Power switch, volume control dial

(7) Seek button

(8) Scan button

(9) Tone and Balance button

(10) Preset button

! Power switch and volume control

The dial (6) is used for both power (ON/

OFF) and volume control. The radio is

turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial

and the volume is controlled by turning the

dial. The dial can also be used for tone

and balance adjustment.

! Tone and balance control

The volume control dial (6) normally

functions as a volume control. This dial

becomes a control for Bass, Midrange,

Treble, Fader or Balance when you select

the appropriate tone and balance control

mode.

Choose desired volume level for each

mode by turning the volume control dial.

The control function returns to volume

control mode after approximately 5 sec-

onds.

! To change tone and balance control

modes

Each brief press of the “TONE BAL”

button (9) changes control modes in the

following sequence starting from volume

control mode. (When the radio is first

turned on, the control mode is in the

volume control.)

The “ TONE BAL ” button is used for

selecting the following control modes:

Audio 5-17

– CONTINUED –

5-18 Audio

Control mode (Range of le-

vels)

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

Bass control (−6 to +6) For less bass sound For more bass sound

Midrange control (−6 to +6) For less midrange sound For more midrange sound

Treble control (−6 to +6) For less treble sound For more treble sound

Fader control (R9 to F9)

To increase rear speaker vo-

lume and decrease front

speaker volume

To increase front speaker vo-

lume and decrease rear speaker

volume

Balance control (L9 to R9)

To increase left speaker volume

and decrease right speaker vo-

lume

To increase right speaker vo-

lume and decrease left speaker

volume

Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume

AUX volume control* (0 to

40)

For less volume

For more volume

* Only when an AUX audio product is connected.

! FM/AM radio

! FM/AM selection button

Push the “FM AM” button (2) when the

radio is off to turn on the radio.

Push the “FM AM” button when the radio

is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.

! Stereo indicator

The stereo indicator “ST” will illuminate

when an FM stereo broadcast is received.

! Manual tuning

Press the “

” side of the “TUNE TRACK”

button (4) to increase the tuning frequency

and press the tuning button marked “

” to

decrease it.

Each time the button is pressed, the

frequency interval can be changed be-

tween 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2

MHz in the FM mode.

If you hold down the “

” side of the

button, the tuning frequency will increase

continuously, and if you hold down the “

”

side of the button, the tuning frequency

will decrease continuously. Release the

button when your desired frequency is

reached.

NOTE

While you are holding down either side

of the TUNE/TRACK button, the tuning

frequency will not stop changing even

if the frequency of a receivable station

is reached.

! Seek tuning (SEEK)

If you press the “

” or “ ” side of the

“SEEK FLDR” button (7), the radio will

automatically search for a receivable

station and stop at the first one it finds.

This function may not be available, how-

ever, when radio signals are weak. In such

a situation, perform manual tuning to

select the desired station.

! Scan tuning (SCAN)

Press the “SCAN” button (8) to change the

radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the

radio scans through the radio band until a

station is found. The radio will stop at the

station for 5 seconds while displaying the

frequency, after which scanning will con-

tinue until the entire band has been

scanned from the low end to the high

end. Press the “SCAN” button again to

cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any

displayed frequency.

Press the “

” or “ ” side of the “SEEK

FLDR” button (7) again to cancel the scan

mode and to stop on any displayed

frequency.

When the “SCAN” button is pressed for

automatic tuning, stations are scanned in

the direction of low frequencies to high

frequencies only.

Automatic tuning may not function prop-

erly if the station reception is weakened by

distance from the station or proximity to

tall buildings and hills.

! Selecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset button

allows you to select that station in a single

operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2

stations each may be preset.

! How to preset stations

1. Press the “FM AM” button (2) to select

FM1, FM2 or AM reception.

2. Press the “SCAN” button (8) or tune

the radio manually until the desired station

frequency is displayed.

3. Press one of the preset buttons for

more than 1.5 seconds to store the

frequency. If the button is pressed for less

than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection

will remain in memory.

NOTE

. If the connection between the radio

and battery is broken for any reason

such as vehicle maintenance or radio

removal, all stations stored in the

preset buttons are cleared. If this

occurs, it is necessary to reset the

preset buttons.

. If a cell phone is placed near the

radio, it may cause the radio to emit

noise when it receives calls. This noise

does not indicate a radio malfunction.

! Satellite radio mode (if equipped)

To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to

install the SUBARU genuine satell ite

receiver (optional part) and to enter into

a contract. For details, please contact your

SUBARU dealer.

! Sirius satellite radio

Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovation

that allows the listener to experience

digital sound quality and to have a greater

variety of channels.

Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a

tuner, antenna and a service contract. For

details, please contact your SUBA RU

dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at

www.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS

(7474) for more information. Sirius, the

Sirius dog logo, channel names and logos

are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio

Inc.

Audio 5-19

– CONTINUED –

5-20 Audio

! XM

satellite radio

is a continental U.S. based satellite

radio service including music, news,

sports, talk and children’s programming.

provides digital quality audio and

text information, including song title and

artist name. A service fee is required to

receive the XM

service. For more

information, contact your SUBARU dealer

or XM

www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-

XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346) for U.S.

www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR

(1-877-438-9677) for Canada.

! Satellite radio reception

Satellite radio signals are best received in

areas with a clear view of the open sky. In

areas where there are tall buildings, trees,

tunnels or other structures that may

obstruct the signal of the satellites, there

may be signal interruptions. Other circum-

stances that may result in signal loss

include driving near a wall, steep cliff or

hill, or driving on the lower level of a multi-

tiered road or inside a parking garage.

To help reduce this condition, satellite

rad io providers have in stalled ground-

based repeaters in heavily populated

areas. However, you may still experience

reception problems in some areas.

! Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner

When you activate satellite radio, you

should have your satellite radio tuner ID

ready because each tuner is identified by

its unique satellite radio tuner ID.

The satellite radio ID will be needed when

you activate satellite radio and receive

satellite radio customer support.

The satellite radio ID can be found on the

audio display by tuning the channel to “0”.

Turn the “TUNE/TRACK” button (4) to

select the satellite radio channel.

! Band selection button

Push the “SAT” button (1) when the radio

is off to turn on the radio.

Push the “ SAT” button when the radio is

on to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep-

tion.

! Channel selection

Press “

” of the “TUNE TRACK” button

(4) to select the next channel and press

“

” of the button to select the previous

channel.

Keep pressing “

” of the button to

change to the next channel continuously

and keep pressing “

” of the button to

change to the previous channel continu-

ously.

! Category selection

Press “

” or “ ” of the “SEEK FLDR”

button (7) to display the current category.

Press “

” again to select the next

category, and press “

” again to select

the previous category.

! Channel scan

Press the “SCAN” button (8) to change the

radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the

radio scans through the channels until a

station is found. The radio will stop at the

station for 5 seconds while displaying the

channel number, after which scanning will

continue until the entire channel has been

scanned from the low end to the high end.

Also during the category selection, chan-

nel scan can be performed in that cate-

gory.

Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel

the SCAN mode and to stop on any

displayed channel.

! Selecting preset channels

Presetting a channel with a preset button

(10) allows you to select that channel in a

single operation. Up to six, SAT1, SAT2

and SAT3 channels each may be preset.

! How to preset channels

1. Press the “SAT” button (1) to select

SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 reception.

2. Press the “SCAN” button (8) or the

“TUNE TRACK” button (4) to select the

channel.

3. Press one of the preset buttons (10)

for more than 1.5 seconds to store the

channel. If the button is pressed for less

than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection

will remain in memory.

NOTE

If the connection between the radio and

battery is broken for any reason such

as vehicle maintenance or radio re-

moval, all channels stored in the preset

buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is

necessary to reset the preset buttons.

! Display selection

Press the “AUDIO” button (5) while receiv-

ing satellite radio to change the display as

follows:

! Rear seat entertainment

If your vehicle is equipped with a Rear

Seat Entertainment System, you can

enjoy audio outputs from the system

through the vehicle’s speakers by press-

ing the “RSE AUX” button (3). Press the

button again to return to the audio set

sound.

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with a Rear

Seat Entertainment System, refer to the

Owner’s Manu al supplement for the

Rear Seat Entertainment System for

further details.

Audio 5-21

– CONTINUED –

5-22 Audio

& Built in CD changer operation

(1) CD button

(2) Track button

(3) AUDIO button

(4) Seek and Folder button

(5) Random button

(6) Repeat button

(7) Scan button

(8) Eject button

(9) Disc select button

(10) Load button

NOTE

. Be sure to insert a disc with the label

side up. If you insert the disc the label

side down, “CHECK DISC” will appear

on the display and the player will not

play anything.

. If a disc is inserted during a radio

broadcast, the disc will interrupt the

broadcast.

. The player is designed to be able to

play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,

but it may not be able to play certain

ones.

. CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are not

supported, and if inserted, they will be

immediately ejected.

. Insert discs slowly, one at a time.

Inserting discs one over another could

result in malfunction of the CD chan-

ger.

! How to insert a CD(s)

! Inserting a CD

1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (10). If

the magazine in the player has an idle

position where you can insert a disc, the

disc number indicator associated with the

idle position will blink.

If no indicator blinks, it means that there is

no idle position in the magazine.

2. After the disc number indicator has

started t o flash, insert the disc when

“LOAD” flashes on the display. The disc

will then be automatically drawn in, and

the player will begin to play back the first

track of the disc.

. To insert more discs in succession,

repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will

be loaded with discs in the ascending

order of position number.

If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds

after you have pressed the “LOAD” button,

the player will begin to play back the first

track of the last disc you have inserted.

. The disc indicator steadily lights up if a

disc is already inserted in the correspond-

ing position of the magazine.

. While the player is in the loading mode,

if you press “FM AM” button, the player will

enter the standby mode. Press the “CD”

button (1) to start playback.

! Inserting a disc in a desired position

1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (10). If

the magazine in the player has an idle

position where you can insert a disc, the

disc number indicator associated with the

idle position will blink.

The positions in the magazine the indica-

tor of which steadily lights up are already

loaded with discs.

2. Press the disc select button (9) at the

position where you want to insert a disc.

3. Insert the disc when “LOAD” flashes

on the di splay. The disc will then be

automatically drawn in, and the player will

begin to play the first track on the disc.

. If you wish to insert another disc,

repeat the procedure beginning with step

If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds

after you have pressed the “LOAD” button,

the player will begin to play back the first

track of the last disc you have inserted.

. While the player is in the loading mode,

if you press “FM AM” button, the player will

enter standby mode. Press the “CD”

button (1) to start playback.

! Loading all the magazine (full disc

loading mode)

1. If you continue to press the “LOAD

”

button (10) for more than 1.5 seconds, the

player will produce beep sound and will

enter the full disc loading mode.

2. A “disc number” indicator will blink,

and “ALL LOAD” will be on display for a

period of 15 seconds. If a disc is success-

fully loaded during this period, the disc

number indicator will stop blinking and will

steadily light.

3. When the loading of a disc is com-

plete, the next disc number indicator will

blink. Then repeat Step 2.

4. When the magazine is filled with discs

by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will

start playback of the discs, beginning with

the one inserted first.

If you fail to insert any disc during each 15

seconds interval, the full disc loading

mode will be canceled, and the player will

start playback of the disc inserted first.

! How to play back a CD or make a

pause

! When there is no CD inserted:

Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a

CD(s)”.

When a CD is loaded, the player will start

playback of the CD, beginning with the

first track.

Audio 5-23

– CONTINUED –

5-24 Audio

! When there are CDs loaded:

Press a desired one of the disc select

buttons (9) the disc number indicator of

which steadily lights up. The player will

then start playback of the selected CD,

beginning with the first track.

If a disc that the player cannot read has

been loaded, “CHECK DISC” will appear

on the display and the player will not play

anything.

! To select a song from its beginning

! Forward direction

Briefly press the “

” side of the “TUNE

TRACK” button (2) to skip to the beginning

of the next track/file (track). Each time the

button is pressed, the indicated track/file

(track) number will increase.

NOTE

In an MP3 folder, skipping past the last

track/file (track) will take you back to

the first track/file (track) in the folder.

! Backward direction

Briefly press the “

” side of the “TUNE

TRACK” button (2) to skip to the beginning

of the current track/file (track). Each time

the button is pressed, the indicated track/

file (track) number will decrease.

NOTE

In an MP3 folder, skipping past the first

track/file (track) will take you to the last

track/file (track) in the folder.

! Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing

! Fast-forwarding

Press the “

” side of the “TUNE TRACK”

button (2) continuously to fast-forward the

track/file.

Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.

NOTE

If you fast-forward to the end of the last

track/file (track), fast -forwardin g will

stop and the player will start playback

beginning with the first track/file

(track).

! Fast-reversing

Press the “

” side of the “TUNE TRACK”

button (2) continuously to fast-reverse the

track/file.

Release the button to stop fast-reversing.

NOTE

If you fast-reverse to the beginning of

the first track/file (track), fast-reversing

will stop and the player will start play-

back.

! Repeating

! To repeat the currently playing track/

file (track)

To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press

the “RPT” button (6) while the track/file

(track) is playing. The display will show

“RPT”, and the track/file (track) will be

repeated.

To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play

mode, briefly press the “RPT” button

twice. The “RPT” indication will turn off,

and the normal playback mode will be

resumed.

NOTE

. Each time you briefly press the

button, the mode will change to the

next one in the following sequence.

If you accidentally press the button and

cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play

mode, press it again to reselect the

repeat-play mode.

. The repeat-play mode will be can-

celled if you perform any of the follow-

ing steps:

. Press the “RDM” button

. Press the “SCAN” button

. Press the “

” button

. Press the disc select button

. Select the radio mode

. Press the “RSE AUX” button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc)

. Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

! To repeat the currently playing disc/

folder

To repeat the currently playing disc/folder,

press the “RPT” button (6) twice while a

track/file (track) is playing. The display will

show “D-RPT”, and the disc/folder will be

played repeatedly.

To cancel the disc/folder repeat-play

mode, press the “RPT” button once more.

The “D-RPT” indication will turn off, and

the normal playback mode will be re-

sumed.

NOTE

. Each time you briefly press the

button, the mode will change to the

next one in the following sequence.

If you accidentally press the button and

cancel the disc/folde r repeat-play

mode, press it again to reselect the

disc/folder repeat-play mode.

. The disc/folder repeat-play mode

will be cancelled if you perform any of

the following steps:

. Press the “RDM” button

. Press the “SCAN” button

. Press the “

” button

. Press the disc select button

. Select the radio mode

. Press the “RSE AUX” button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc)

. Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

! Random playback

! Non-MP3 disc

Press the “RDM” button (5) briefly during

disc playback to play all of the tracks on

the disc in a random order. The display will

show “RDM”, and all of the tracks on the

disc will be played in a random order.

To cancel random mode, press the button

again. The “RDM” indication will turn off,

and the normal playback mode will be

resumed.

NOTE

Random playback will be cancelled if

you perform any of the following steps:

. Press the “RPT” button

. Press the “SCAN” button

. Press the “

” button

. Select the radio mode

. Press the “RSE AUX” button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

“SEEK FLDR” button

. Turn off t he power of the audio

equipment.

. Turntheignitionswitchtothe

“LOCK” position.

! MP3 disc

Press the “RDM” button (5) during disc

playback to play all of the tracks in the

folder currently being played in random

order. Press the “RDM” button again to

play all of the tracks on the disc in random

order. The display will show “RDM” during

the random mode.

To cancel the random mode, press the

“RDM” button during “in-disc” random

playback. The “RDM” indication will turn

off, and the normal playback mode will be

resumed.

NOTE

. Each time you briefly press the

button, the mode will change to the

Audio 5-25

– CONTINUED –

5-26 Audio

next one in the following sequence.

If you accidentally press the button and

cancel the random mode, press it again

to reselect the random mode.

. Random playback will be cancelled

if you perform any of the following

steps:

. Press the “RPT” button

. Press the “SCAN” button

. Press the “

” button

. Select the radio mode

. Press the “RSE AUX” button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

“SEEK FLDR” button

. Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

! SCAN

The scan mode lets you listen to the first

10 seconds of each track/file (track) in

succession. Press the “SCAN” button (7)

to start scanning upward beginning with

the track/file (track) following the currently

selected one. When all tracks/files (tracks)

in the disc/folder have been scanned,

normal playback will be resumed. To

cancel the scan mode, press the button

again.

NOTE

The scan mode will be cancelled if you

perform any of the following steps:

. Press the “RPT” button

. Press the “RDM” button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

“TUNE TRACK” button

. Press the “

” or “ ” side of the

“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc)

. Press the “

” button

. Press the disc select button

. Select the radio mode

. Press the “RSE AUX” button

. Turn off the power of the audio

equipment.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position.

! Display selection (MP3 disc)

If you press the “AUDIO” button (3) during

playback, the indication will change to the

next one in the following sequence.

! Page (track/folder title) scroll (MP3

disc)

If, having pressed the “AUDIO” button (3)

to select track title or folder title display,

you press the “AUDIO” button again for

less than 0.5 second, the title will be

scrolled so you can see all of it. You will

see eight characters at a time.

NOTE

The display is designed to show titles

for up to three pages (64 characters in

total).

! Folder selection (MP3 disc)

Press the “

” side of the “SEEK FLDR”

button (4) briefly to select the next folder.

Pressing the “

” side of the same button

the first time makes the player go back to

the beginning of the currently selected file;

pressing it a second time makes it go back

to the previously selected file.

NOTE

Only MP3 folders are recognized when

an attempt to select the next or pre-

vious folder is made. If no appropriate

folder exists on the disc, pressing the

“ ” or “ ” side of the “SEEK FLDR”

button has no effect.

! How to unload CDs from the player

! Ejecting a CD from the player

Of the discs loaded, you can select and

remove only one disc.

1. Use the disc select button (9) to select

the disc to be ejected.

2. Briefly press the “

” button (8). The

selected disc will be ejected. The disc

number indicator will flash at this time.

When you remove the ejected disc, the

disc number indicator will turn off.

To remove more discs in succession,

repeat Steps 1 and 2.

! Ejecting all discs from the player (all

disc ejection mode)

1. If you continue to press the “

” button

(8), the player will produce beep sound

and will enter the all disc ejection mode.

2. Remove the disc that has been

ejected. The other discs loaded will then

be ejected one after another. If you do not

remove the disc that has been ejected, the

“All disc ejection mode” will be canceled.

NOTE

. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD

sticking out, because vibration might

make it fall out.

. If you press the “

” button while

the player is in all disc ejection mode,

the mode will be cancelled following

ejection of the disc that is currently

being ejected.

. If you press the “CD” button while

the player is in all disc ejection mode,

the player will draw in the discs that

have been ejected and play them.

Audio control buttons

These buttons are located on the spokes

of the steering wheel. They allow the

driver to control audio functions without

taking his/her hands off the steering

wheel.

& MODE button

This button is used to select the desired

audio mode. Each time it is pressed, the

mode changes to the next one in the

following sequence:

*1: The frequency last received in the selected

Audio

5-27

– CONTINUED –

5-28 Audio

waveband will be displayed.

*2: Only when a CD is in the player.

*3: Only vehicle equipped with RSE (Rear Seat

Entertainment)

! “ ” and “ ” buttons

! With radio mode selected

Press the “

” button to select the next

channel and press the “

” button to select

the previous channel.

That station’s frequency will be shown on

the audio display.

! With CD mode selected

Press the “

” button to skip forward in the

track/file (track) order. Pressing the “

”

button the first time makes the player go

back to the beginning of the current track/

file (track); pressing it the second time

makes it go back to the previous track/file

(track).

The track/file (track) number will be shown

on the audio display.

! Volume control buttons

Press the “+” button to increase the

volume. Press the “−” button to reduce

the volume.

A number indicating the volume will be

shown on the audio display.

! MUTE button

Press this button if you wish to immedi-

ately cut the volume to zero.

The audio display will show “MUTE”.

If you press the button again, the original

sound volume will return and “MUTE”

turns off.

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with a

genuine SUBARU navigation system,

the display will show “

”.

Aux unit operation

By connecting a commercial audio pro-

duct to the vehicle, such as a portable

audio player, you can hear its sound via

the vehicle’s speaker.

Connect the portable audio player and

push the “RSE AUX” button.

For the audio input terminal, a stereo mini

pin plug (3.5f) can be connected. For

detailed information, see the Owner’s

Guide for the portable audio player.

NOTE

. The output sound of the portable

audio player is not loud, and the sound

via the vehicle’s speakers that are

connected to the vehicle audio set is

very quiet. If you turn up the volume of

the audio set, the volume becomes

louder. However, when you change

the audio to the radio mode or to a

CD player, the sound becomes a lot

louder. Remember to turn down the

volume when you change between

them.

. In some cases, when the sound

volume of the portable audio player is

low, the sound becomes bad when you

turn up the volume of the vehicle audio

system. In this case, adjust the sound

volume of the portable audio player.

. In some cases, noise occurs be-

cause of a bad connection between the

portable player of the vehicle audio

system or for the player.

Rear Seat Entertainment

(RSE) system operation (if

equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the Rear

Seat Entertainment (RSE) system, you

can listen to the audio via the vehicle

speakers. Push the “RSE AUX” button to

play a DVD using the Rear Seat Entertain-

ment system.

For detailed operating procedures, refer to

the Owner’s Manual supplement for the

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.

NOTE

To watch a DVD in the front seats using

the monitor of the navigation system,

park the vehicle in a safe location and

apply the parking brake. Images of the

DVD will not be displayed on the front

monitor unless the parking brake is

applied.

Audio 5-29

5-30 Audio

Precautions to observe when

handling a compact disc

Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and

CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the

following illustration. Also, some compact

discs cannot be played.

. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD

player. If you insert a DualDisc into the

player, the disc may not come out again,

possibly causing the player to malfunction.

. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can

form inside the C D player, preventing

normal operation. If this happens, eject

the CD and wait for the player to dry out.

. Skipping may occur when the CD

player is subjected to severe vibration

(for example, when the vehicle is driven

on a rough surface).

. To remove a disc from the case, press

the center of the case and hold both

edges of the disc. If the disc surface is

touched directly, contamination could

cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the

disc surface.

. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If

there are deposits, wipe the disc surface

from the center outward with a dry, soft

cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,

thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.

. Do not use any disc that is scratched,

deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use

any disc that has a non-standard shape

(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions

or problems might result.

. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never

keep it either in places exposed to direct

sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles

parked in the sun or on hot days.

Audio 5-31

————————————————————————————————————————

Interior light ......................................................... 6-2

Dome light .......................................................... 6-2

Cargo area light .................................................. 6-2

Rear gate light .................................................... 6-3

Map light............................................................. 6-3

Automatic ambient light for center console area

(if equipped)...................................................... 6-3

Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4

Sun visor extension plate .................................... 6-4

Vanity mirror with light ........................................ 6-4

Storage compartment ......................................... 6-5

Glove box ........................................................... 6-5

Center console box ............................................. 6-6

Rear console....................................................... 6-7

Overhead console ............................................... 6-7

Cup holder ........................................................... 6-7

Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-7

Rear seat (5-seater models)/Second-row seat

(7-seater models) passenger’s cup holder .......... 6-8

Third-row seat cup holders (7-seater models)....... 6-8

Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-9

Accessory power outlets.................................... 6-9

Coat hook ........................................................... 6-11

Shopping bag hook............................................ 6-12

Floor mat ............................................................ 6-12

Cargo area cover (if equipped) ......................... 6-13

Using the cover.................................................. 6-13

To remove the cover .......................................... 6-14

To install the cover housing ............................... 6-14

Convenient tie-down hooks .............................. 6-15

Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-15

5-seater models ................................................. 6-15

7-seater models ................................................. 6-16

HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if

equipped) ........................................................ 6-16

Garage door opener programming in the

U.S.A............................................................... 6-17

Programming rolling-code-protected garage door

openers in the U.S.A. ....................................... 6-18

Programming for entrance gates and garage door

openers in Canada........................................... 6-19

Programming other devices ............................... 6-20

Operating the HomeLink® Wireless Control

System............................................................ 6-20

Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button....... 6-20

Erasing HomeLink® button memory ................... 6-20

In case a problem occurs................................... 6-20

Rear view camera (if equipped) ........................ 6-21

Position of rear view camera .............................. 6-22

How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-22

Viewing range on the screen .............................. 6-22

Distance marker (help line) ................................ 6-24

Interior equipment

6-2 Interior equipment

Interior light

When leaving your vehicle, make sure the

light is turned off to avoid battery dis-

charge.

& Dome light

Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment

Vehicles without Rear Seat Entertainment

1) ON

2) DOOR

3) OFF

The light switch has three positions:

ON: The light stays on continuously.

OFF: The light stays off.

DOOR: The light illuminates when any

door is opened. The light remains illumi-

nated for several seconds and gradually

turns off after all doors are closed.

The light also can be turned on by use of

the remote keyless entry transmitter. Refer

to “Remote keyless entry system ” in

chapter 2 for detailed information.

The setting of the period for which the light

stays on can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer.

Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for

details.

& Cargo area light

1) DOOR

2) OFF

3) ON

The cargo area light switch has three

positions:

DOOR: The light illuminates only when

the rear gate is opened.

OFF: The light stays off.

ON: The light stays on continuously.

& Rear gate light

The rear gate light is located inside the

vehicle on the rear gate. Push the right

side of the switch to turn it on, and push

the left side of the switch to turn it off.

& Map light

To turn on the map light, push the switch.

To turn it off, push the switch again.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure the

light is turned off to avoid battery dis-

charge.

The light also can be turned on by use of

the remote keyless entry transmitter. Refer

to “Remote keyless entry system ” in

chapter 2 for detailed information.

The setting of the period for which the light

stays on can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer.

Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for

details.

& Automatic ambient light for

center console area (if

equipped)

The automatic ambient light illuminates

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position and the light control switch is in

the “

” position or “ ” position. The

light dimly illuminates the area around the

center console. The light turns off when

the light control switch is in the “OFF”

position. Also, the brightness of the light is

adjusted by the illumination brightn ess

control dial.

Interior equipment 6-3

6-4 Interior equipment

Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,

swing it down and move it sideways.

& Sun visor extension plate

With the sun visor positioned over the side

window, you can use the s un visor

extension plate to prevent glare through

the gap between the sun visor and center

pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it

toward the rear of the vehicle. When you

have finished using it, stow it by pushing it

toward the front of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not pull out the extension plate

with the sun visor positioned over

the windshield. The extension plate

would obstruct your view of the

rearview mirror.

& Vanity mirror with light

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed

while the car is being driven to avoid

dazzle.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

The light beside the vanity mirror illumi-

nates when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTE

Use of the vanity mirror light for a long

period of time while the engine is not

running can cause battery discharge.

Storage compartment

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com-

partment closed while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the

event of sudden stops or a n

accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the storage compart-

ment.

& Glove box

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To

close it, push the lid firmly upward.

To lock the glove box, insert the key and

turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,

insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.

Interior equipment 6-5

– CONTINUED –

6-6 Interior equipment

& Center console box

The center console box has a two-layer

structure consisting of an upper compart-

ment and a lower compartment.

! Upper compartment

1) Upper compartment lock release

Pull up the upp er com partment lock

release to open the upper compartment.

! Lower compartment

1) Lower compartment lock release

Pull up the lower compartment lock

release to open the lower compartment.

& Rear console

The rear console is located in the back of

the center console box. Pull it out to use it.

& Overhead console

To open the console, push on the lid lightly

and it will automatically open.

CAUTION

When your vehicle is parked in the

sun or on a warm day, the inside of

the overhead cons ole heats up.

Avoid storing plastic or other heat-

vulnerable or flammable articles

such as a lighter in the overhead

console.

Cup holder

CAUTION

Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,

if hot, might burn you or your

passengers. Spilled beverages may

also damage upholstery or carpets.

& Front passenger’s cup holder

CAUTION

Do not pick up a cup from the cup

holder or put a cup in the holder

while you are driving, as this may

distract you and lead to an accident.

Interior equipment 6-7

– CONTINUED –

6-8 Interior equipment

The dual cup holder is built into the center

console near the selector lever.

To acce ss the cup holder, push the

release button.

& Rear seat (5-seater models)/

Second-row seat (7-seater

models) passenger’s cup

holder

A dual cup holder is built in the armrest.

CAUTION

When a cup containing a beverage

is in the cup holder, do not slide or

recline any seat. Otherwise, the

beverage could spill while driving

and, if the beverage is hot, it could

scald you.

& Third-row seat cup holders

(7-seater models)

A cup holder is located at each side of the

third-row seat.

CAUTION

When placing a beverage in a cup

holder, make sure it is capped.

Otherwise, the beverage could spill

while driving and, if the beverage is

hot, it could scald you.

Bottle holders

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a bottle from the

bottle holder or put a bottle in the

holder while you are driving, as

this may distract you and lead to

an accident.

. When placing a beverage in a

door pocket, make sure it is

capped. Otherwise, the beverage

could spill when opening/closing

the door or while driving and, if

the beverage is hot, it could scald

you.

The door pocket equipped on each door

trim can be used to hold beverage bottles

and other items.

Accessory power outlets

Accessory power outlets are provided in

the center console (lower compartment)

and in the cargo area.

Interior equipment 6-9

– CONTINUED –

6-10 Interior equipment

Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery

is available at any of the outlets when the

ignition switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON”

position.

You can use an in-vehicle use electrical

appliance by connecting it to an outlet.

When both outlets are used at the same

time, the total power consumption of the

electric appliances must be 120W or less.

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the accessory power

outlet.

. Do not place any foreign objects,

especially metal ones such as

coins or aluminum foil, into the

accessory power outlet. That

could cause a short circuit. Al-

ways put the cap on the acces-

sory power outlet when it is not

in use.

. Use only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12V DC

and which consume less than

120W. Overloading the accessory

power outlet can cause a short

circuit. Do not use double adap-

ters or more than one electrical

appliance.

. If the plug on your electric appli-

ance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power

outlet, this can result in a poor

contact or cause the plug to get

stuck. Only use plugs that fit

properly.

. Use of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a long

period of time while the engine is

not running can cause battery

discharge.

. Before driving your vehicle, make

sure that the plug and the cord

on your electrical appliance will

not interfere with your shifting

gears and operating the accel-

erator and brake pedals. If they

do, do not use the electrical

appliance while driving.

NOTE

It is possible, when using the outlet in

the center console (lower compart-

ment) with the lid closed, to pass the

electrical appliance’s cord through a

gap between the center console (lower

compartment) and the lid. It is also

possible to pass the cord through a

groove in the lid and up to the center

console (upper compartment).

Coat hook

A coat hook is attached to each of the

passenger hand grips for the seat listed in

the following.

. 5-seater models: Rear seat

. 7-seater models: Second seat

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other

hard or pointed objects on the coat

hooks. If such items were hanging

on the coat hooks during deploy-

ment of the SRS curtain airbags,

they could cause serious injuries by

coming off the coat hooks and being

thrown through the cabin or by

preventing correct airbag deploy-

ment. Before hanging clothing on

the coat hooks, make sure there are

no pointed objects in the pockets.

Hang clothing directly on the coat

hooks without using hangers.

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coat

hook that might obstruct the driver’s

view or that could cause injury in

sudden stops or in a collision. And

do not hang items on the coat hook

that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

Interior equipment 6-11

6-12 Interior equipment

Shopping bag hook

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping

bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or

more.

A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area.

Floor mat

A retaining pin is located on the driver’s

side of the vehicle next to the fuel filler

door release. Fit the grommet in the carpet

onto the pin to prevent the carpet from

moving.

CAUTION

Make sure the driver’s floor mat is

placed back in its proper location

and correctly secured on its retain-

ing pin. Also, do not use more than

one floor mat. If the floor mat slips

forward and interferes with the

movement of the pedals during

driving, it could cause an accident.

Cargo area cover (if

equipped)

The cargo area cover is provided for

covering the cargo area and to protect its

contents from direct sunlight. This cover is

detachable to make room for additional

cargo.

& Using the cover

1) Holder

Insert the seat belt webbing to the holder

of the third-row seat. (7-seater models)

To extend the cover, pull the end of the

cover out of the housing, then insert its

hooks into the ca tches as shown. To

rewind it, unhook it from the catches and

it will rewind automatically. You should

hold on to the cover and guide it back into

the cover housing while it is rewinding.

WARNING

Do not place anything on the ex-

tended cover. Putting excessive

weight on the extended cover can

break it and an object on the cover

could tumble forward in the event of

a sudden stop or collision. This

could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to pinch your hand

between the headrest and the

cargo area cover when you re-

cline the rear seat.

. Be careful not to scratch the rear

gate stays while extending and

rewinding the cover.

Scratches on the stays could

cause leakage of gas from the

stays, which may result in their

inability to hold the rear gate

open.

NOTE

When the head restraint is adjusted at

the rearmost position of the seat with

the seatback leaned back, the head

restraint comes in contact with the

cargo area cover. In this case, raise

the seatback before adjusting the head

restraint.

If the head restraint is correctly fixed in

any of the lock positions, the head

restraint does not contact the cargo

area cover even when the seatback is

reclined.

Interior equipment 6-13

– CONTINUED –

6-14 Interior equipment

& To remove the cover

1. Rewind the cover.

2. Pull either sleeve on the end of the

cover housing to shorten the cover’s

length.

3. Take it off the retainer.

& To install the cover housing

1. Remove the cover at the cover hous-

ing retaining part using a flat-head screw-

driver.

2. Pull either sleeve on the end of the

cover housing to shorten the cover’s

length.

3. Insert the projections located on the

both ends of the sleeve into the recesses

of the retainers.

Convenient tie-down hooks

CAUTION

The convenient tie-down hooks are

designed only for securing light

cargo. Never try to secure cargo

that exceeds the capacity of the

hooks. The maximum load capacity

is 44 lbs (20 kg) per hook.

The cargo area is equipped with four tie-

down hooks so that cargo can be secured

with a luggage net or ropes.

When using the tie-down hooks, turn them

down out of the storing recesses. When

not in use, put the hooks up into the

storing recesses.

Under-floor storage compart-

ment

The subfloor storage compartment is

located under the floor of the cargo area

and can be used to store small items. To

open the lid, pull the handle up.

CAUTION

. Always keep the lid of the sub-

floor storage compartment

closed while driving to reduce

the risk of injury in the event of

sudden stop or an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the subfloor storage

compartment.

& 5-seater models

Hang the hook provided on the underside

of the rear half lid on the rear edge of the

roof to keep the lid open.

Interior equipment 6-15

– CONTINUED –

6-16 Interior equipment

& 7-seater models

Hang the hook provided on the underside

of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to

keep the lid open.

HomeLink® Wireless Control

System (if equipped)

1) HomeLink® buttons

2) Indicator light

3) Hand-held transmitter*

* Not part of your vehicle’s remote

keyless entry system but of a

HomeLink®-compatible device.

The HomeLink® Wireless Control System,

located on the driver’s sun visor, is a

handy way to operate, from inside of your

vehicle, up to three remote-contr olled

indoor and outdoor devices, such as

garage door openers, entrance gates,

door locks, home lighting, and security

systems. There are three HomeLink®

buttons on the sun visor, each of which

you can program for operation of one

desired device. For details on the device

types which can be operated by this

system, consult the HomeLink website at

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

Note the following about this system:

If your vehicle is equipped with the

HomeLink® Wireless Control System, it

complies with Part 15 of the Federal

Communication Commission Rules in the

U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry Canada

in Canada. Its operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2 ) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Changes and modifications to this system

by anyone other than an authorized

service facility could void authorization to

use this equipment.

HomeLink and the HomeLink house are

registered trademarks of Johnson Con-

trols, Inc.

WARNING

. When programming the

HomeLink® Wireless Control

System, you may be operating a

garage door opener or other

device. Make sure that people

and objects are out of the way

of the garage door o pener or

other device to prevent potential

harm or damage.

. Do not use the HomeLink® Wire-

less Control Syste m with any

garage door opener that lacks

the safety stop and reverse fea-

ture as required by applicable

safety standards. A garage door

opener which cannot detect an

object, signaling the door to stop

and reverse, does not meet these

safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these fea-

tures increases risk of serious

injury or death. For more infor-

mation, consult the HomeLink

website at www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink®

Wireless Control System to operate

a garage door opener or an entrance

gate, unplug the device’s motor

from the outlet during programming

to prevent motor burnout.

NOTE

. After programming your HomeLink®

Wireless Control System for the de-

sired devices, retain the ha nd-held

transmitters for further programming

or device testing in the event of a

problem.

. It is recommended that you insert a

new battery in the hand-held transmit-

ter of a device to ensure correct

programming.

& Garage door opener pro-

gramming in the U.S.A.

NOTE

When programming the HomeLink®

Wireless Control System for a garage

door opener, it is suggested that you

park the vehicle outside the garage.

1. Unplug the motor of the garage door

opener from the outlet.

2. Press and hold t he two outside

HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light

begins to flash (after 20 seconds). Re-

lease both buttons.

NOTE

If any of the HomeLink® buttons are

already programmed for other devices,

skip step 2 because it clears the

memory of all the three buttons.

3. Hold the end of the garage door

opener’s hand-held transmitter between

1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from

the HomeLink® buttons on the driver’s

sun visor, keeping the indicator light in

view.

Interior equipment 6-17

– CONTINUED –

6-18 Interior equipment

4. Using both hands, simultaneously

push the h and-held tran smitter button

and the desired HomeLink® button. DO

NOT release the buttons until step 5 has

been completed.

5. Hold down b oth buttons until the

HomeLink® indicator light flashes, first

slowly then rapidly. When the indicator

light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be

released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-

cates successful programming of the new

frequency signal.)

6. Press and hold the programmed but-

ton and check the HomeLink® indicator

light. If the indicator light stays on con-

tinuously, your garage door should acti-

vate and the programming is completed.

If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2

seconds and then stays on continuously,

your garage door opener may be pro-

tected by a rolling code feature. In this

case you need to perform the additional

steps for “Programming rolling-code-pro-

tected garage door openers in the U.S.A.”

described in the following.

NOTE

Rolling-code-protected garage door

openers are manufactured after 1996.

See the instruction manual of your

garage opener for confirmation.

7. Reconnect the motor of your garage

door opener to the outlet.

8. Test your garage door opener by

pressing the programmed HomeLink®

button.

& Programming rolling-code-

protected garage door open-

ers in the U.S.A.

If your garage door opener has a rolling

code feature , program the HomeLink®

Wireless Control System for it by following

steps 1 through 5 in the “Garage door

opener programming in the U.S.A.” sec-

tion above and then continuing with the

steps below.

NOTE

The assistance of a second per son

may make the programming quicker

and easier.

1. Locate the training button on the

garage doo r opener motor head unit.

The exact location and color of the button

may vary by brand of garage door opener.

If it is difficult to locate the training button,

refer to your garage door opener’s instruc-

tion manual.

1) Training button

2. Press the training button on the

garage door opener motor head unit

(which activates the “training light” on the

unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.

3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press and

release the HomeLink® button that was

programmed in the section above. Press

and release the button a second time to

complete the programming procedure.

NOTE

Some garage door openers may re-

quire you to do the above procedure a

third time to complete the program-

ming.

4. The garage door opener should now

recognize the HomeLink® Wireless Con-

trol System and your garage door opener

should activate when the HomeLink®

button is pressed.

& Programming for entrance

gates and garage door open-

ers in Canada

1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate

or garage door opener from the outlet.

2. Press and hold the two outside buttons

until the HomeLink® indicator light begins

to flash (after 20 seconds). Release both

buttons.

NOTE

If any of the HomeLink® buttons are

already programmed for other devices,

skip step 2 because it clears the

memory of all three buttons.

3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/

garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-

ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76

mm) away from the HomeLink® buttons

on the driver’s sun visor, keeping the

indicator light in view.

4. Press and hold the desired

HomeLink® button.

5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-

held transmitter button every 2 seconds

until step 6 is complete.

6. When the indicator light flashes slowly

and then rapidly after several seconds,

release both buttons.

7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/

garage door opener to the outlet.

8. Test your entrance gate/garage door

Interior equipment 6-19

– CONTINUED –

6-20 Interior equipment

opener by pressing the programmed

HomeLink® button.

& Programming other devices

To program other devices such as door

locks, home lighting and security systems,

contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

& Operating the HomeLink®

Wireless Control System

Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wire-

less Control System can be used to

remote-control the devices to which its

buttons are programmed. To activate a

device, simply press the appropriate but-

ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-

ing that the signal is being transmitted.

& Reprogramming a single

HomeLink® button

1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button

you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release

the button until step 4 has been com-

pleted.

2. When the HomeLink® indicator light

begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds),

position the hand-held transmitter of the

device for which you wish to program the

button at 1 to 3 inches (25 to 76 mm) away

from the HomeLink® button surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-

mitter button. The HomeLink® indicator

light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

4. When the indicator light begins to flash

rapidly, release both buttons.

The programming for the previous device

is now erased and the new device can be

operated by pushing the HomeL ink®

button.

& Erasing HomeLink® button

memory

NOTE

. Performi ng this procedure erases

the memory of all the preprogrammed

buttons simultaneously. The memory

of individual buttons cannot be erased.

. It is recommended that upon the

sale of the vehicle, the memory of all

programmed HomeLink® buttons be

erased for security purposes.

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons

until the indicator light begins to flash

(after 20 seconds).

2. Release both buttons.

& In case a problem occurs

If you cannot activate a device using the

corresponding HomeLink® button after

programming, contact HomeLink at

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515 for assistance.

Rear view camera (if

equipped)

When the ignition switch is “ON” and the

selector lever is set to “R”, the rear view

camera automatically displays the rear

view image from the vehicle.

WARNING

. Since the rear view camera uses

a wide-angle lens, the image on

the monitor is different from the

actual view in terms of distance.

. Since the range of the image on

the monitor is limited, you should

always check the rear view with

your eyes and move backward at

a slow speed.

. Do not disassemble or modify the

camera, switch or wiring. If

smoke comes out or you smell

a strange odor, stop using the

rear view camera immediately.

Contact your S UBARU dea ler

for an inspection. Continued use

may result in accident, fire or

electric shock.

CAUTION

. If your vehicle is washed with a

high-pressure washer, do not

allow water to contact the camera

directly. Entry of water in the

camera lens may result in con-

densation, malfunction, fire or

electric shock.

. Since the camera is a precision

device, do not subject it to strong

impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,

fire or electric shock may occur.

. If mud or snow sticks to or is

frozen on the camera, you must

be very careful removing it .

Otherwise, damage done to the

camera may cause a fire or

electric shock. Pour lukewarm

water over the camera to remove

mud or ice.

. Do not put a flame close to the

camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-

mage or fire may occur.

. When replacing the fuse, be sure

to use a fuse with the specified

rating. Use of a fuse with a

different rating may result in a

malfunction.

. If the rear view camera is used for

a long time while the engine is

not operated, the battery may

become completely discharged.

NOTE

. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,

benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,

discoloration may occur. To remove

contamination, wipe the camera with a

cloth moistened with a diluted neutral

detergent and then wipe it with a dry

cloth.

. When waxing the vehicle, be careful

not to apply the wax to the camera. If it

comes in contact with the camera,

moisten a clean cloth with a diluted

neutral detergent to remove the wax.

. The camera lens has hard coating to

help prevent scratches. However, when

washing the vehicle or cleaning the

camera lens, be careful not to scratch

the camera lens. Do not use a washing

brush directly on the camera lens. The

monitor screen may be adversely af-

fected.

. Strong light shined on the camera

lens may develop white light stripes

around the light source. This is not a

malfunction.

Interior equipment 6-21

– CONTINUED –

6-22 Interior equipment

& Position of rear view camera

It is attached to the rear gate.

& How to use the rear view

camera

! To display the rear view camera

image

When the selector lever is set to “R”, the

rear view camera automatically displays

the rear view image from the vehicle.

When the lever is set to other positions,

the image before setting to “R” is dis-

played.

1. Set the ignition switch to “ON ” .

2. Set the selector lever to “R”.

NOTE

. The image of the rear view camera

has priority over other screen displays.

. The image of the rear view camera is

horizontally reversed as is the case

with the vehicle rearview mirror or the

side view mirror.

. If the lens of the camera is dirty, it is

difficult to see the image. Carefully

remove the raindrops, snow and dirt if

they are attached.

. It is difficult to see the image of the

rearview mirror in the following cases.

This is not a malfunction of the camera.

. The image may become poor

when the vehicle is in a dark place

(at night, in a tunnel, etc.) or an

extremely hot or cold place. This is

not a malfunction.

. Strong light shined directly on the

camera lens may develop white

light stripes on the image. This is

not a malfunction.

. While the rear view camera is in

operation, the operations of other

screens are disabled. To operate other

screens, set the selector lever to a

position other than “R”. (vehicles with

a genuine SUBARU navigation system)

& Viewing range on the screen

! Viewing range on the screen

Range of view

Image from camera

The area from the rear end of the bumper

can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the

bumper cannot be viewed.

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed with

the rear view camera is limited.

Always be sure to check with your

eyes when moving backward and

proceed slowly.

Range of view

Image from camera

The area above the camera cannot be

viewed. If there is a protrusion on a block,

it cannot be seen on the screen.

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed with

the rear view camera is limited.

Always be sure to check with your

eyes when moving backward and

proceed slowly.

! Screen view and actual distance

Range of view

Interior equipment

6-23

– CONTINUED –

6-24 Interior equipment

Image from camera

The image from the rear view camera

looks shorter than the actual distance.

& Distance marker (help line)

The distance marker (help line) is a guide

to help you realize the actual distance

from the screen.

1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)

2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper

(yellow horizontal line)

5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper

(red horizontal line)

When the selector lever is set to position

“R”, the monitor screen d isplays the

distance markers together with the rear

view image.

CAUTION

. When moving backward, always

check the back with your eyes

without relying on the distance

markers.

. The actual position may be dif-

ferent from the indication of the

distance markers.

. Differences may occur due to

number of passengers or loaded

cargo.

. When the vehicle is on a slope or

when the vehicle is inclined

against the road, the indication

is different from the actual posi-

tion.

NOTE

Approximately 2.6 feet (0.8 m) is

needed to open and close the rear gate.

! Difference between screen and ac-

tual road

The distance markers show the distance

for a level road when the vehicle is not

loaded. It may be different from the actual

distance depending on the loading condi-

tions or road conditions.

! When there is an upward slope at the

back

1) 3 feet (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks farther

than the actual distance.

! When there is a downward slope at

the back

1) 3 feet (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks nearer

than the actual distance.

NOTE

When cargo is loaded, the rear view

distance on the screen looks farther

thantheactualdistanceasinan

upward slope.

! Feature of distance marker

1) 10 feet (3 m) line

2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line

3) 3 feet (1 m) line

The distance marker shows the distance

on the road. If there is a car or other object

close behind, distance cannot be correctly

displayed.

Interior equipment 6-25

————————————————————————————————————————

Fuel ...................................................................... 7-2

Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-2

Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-3

State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-5

Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-7

Starting the engine.............................................. 7-7

Stopping the engine............................................ 7-8

Remote engine start system (dealer option) ..... 7-8

Starting your vehicle ........................................... 7-9

Remote start safety features ................................ 7-9

Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote

start.................................................................. 7-9

Entering the vehicle following remote engine start

shutdown.......................................................... 7-9

Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the

vehicle ............................................................. 7-10

Service mode ..................................................... 7-10

Remote engine start transmitter programming

and programmable feature option ..................... 7-10

System maintenance .......................................... 7-11

Automatic transmission..................................... 7-12

Selector lever..................................................... 7-13

Selector lever reverse inhibiting function ............ 7-14

Selection of manual mode .................................. 7-15

Maximum speeds ............................................... 7-16

Driving tips ........................................................ 7-16

SPORT mode ..................................................... 7-17

Shift lock release ............................................... 7-17

Power stee ring................................................... 7-18

Braking ............................................................... 7-18

Braking tips....................................................... 7-18

Brake system .................................................... 7-19

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-19

ABS (Ant i-lock Brake System).......................... 7-20

ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-20

ABS warning light.............................................. 7-21

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system ............................................................. 7-22

Steps to take if EBD system fails ....................... 7-22

Vehicle Dynamics Control system.................... 7-23

Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-25

Traction Control system OFF switch................... 7-26

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ........ 7-27

Parking your vehicle ......................................... 7-29

Parking brake .................................................... 7-29

Parking tips ....................................................... 7-29

Cruise control .................................................... 7-30

To set cruise control .......................................... 7-30

To temporarily cancel the cruise control............. 7-31

To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-31

To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-32

Cruise control indicator light.............................. 7-33

Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-33

Starting and operating

7-2 Starting and operating

Fuel

CAUTION

Use of a fuel which is low in quality

or use of an inappropriate fuel

additive may cause engine damage.

& Fuel requirements

The engine is designed to operate using

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of

87 AKI or higher.

! Fuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of the

Research Octane a nd Motor Octane

numbers and is commonly referred to as

the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

Using a gasoline with a lower octane

rating can cause persistent and heavy

knocking, which can damage the engine.

Do not be concerned if your vehicle

sometimes knocks lightly when you drive

up a hill or when you accelerate. See your

dealer or a qualified service technician if

you use a fuel with the specified octane

rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or

persistently.

! Unleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed

to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used because it will

damage the emission control system and

may impair driveability and fuel economy.

! California fuel

If your vehicle was certified to California

Emission Standards as indicated on the

underhood tune-up label, it is designed to

optimize engine and emission control

system performance with gasoline that

meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-

fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in

any other state than California, your

vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting

Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-

side California is permitted to have higher

sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-

mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter

and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or

smell. SUBARU recommends that you try

a different brand of unleaded gasoline

having lower sulfur to determine if the

problem is fuel related before returning

your vehicle to an authorized dealer for

service. The CHECK ENGINE warning

light/Malfunction indicator lamp may also

illuminate. If this occurs, return to your

authorized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis.

If it is determined that the condition is

caused by the type of fuel used, repairs

may not be covered by your warranty.

! MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

you use such fuels, your emission control

system performance may deteriorate and

the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator lamp may illuminate. If

this happens, return to your authorized

SUBARU dealer for service. If it is

determined that the condition is caused

by the type of fuel used, repairs may not

be covered by your warranty.

! Gasoline for cleaner air

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-

taining alcohol may cause paint

damage, which is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

Yo ur use of gasoline with detergent

additives will help prevent deposits from

forming in your engine and fuel system.

This helps keep your engine in tune and

your emission control system working

properly, and is a way of doing your part

for cleaner air. If you continuously use a

high quality fuel with the proper detergent

and other additives, you should never

need to add any fuel system cleaning

agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with

materials called oxygenates. Use of these

fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.

Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE

(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol

(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in

your vehicle, but should contain no more

than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the

proper operation of your SUBARU.

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

now producing reformulated gaso lines,

which ar e designed to re duce vehicle

emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,

you should ask your service station

operators if their gasolines contain deter-

gents and oxygenates and if they have

been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-

sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels

suited for your vehicle as explained in the

following.

. Fuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that specified

in this manual.

. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is

sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.

Methanol can be used in your vehicle

ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel

mixture AN D if it is accompani ed by

sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-

vents and corrosion inhibitors required to

prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not

use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT

under these conditions.

. If undesirable driveability problems are

experienced and you suspect they may be

fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-

line be fore seeking service at your

SUBARU dealer.

. Fuel system damage or driveability

problems which result from the use of

improper fuel are not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

& Fuel filler lid and cap

! Refueling

Only one person should be involved in

refueling. Do not allow others to approach

the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler

pipe while refueling is in progress.

Be sure to observe any other precautions

that are posted at the service station.

1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid

release lever up. The lever is on the floor

at the left of the driver’s seat.

2. Open the fuel filler lid.

Starting and operating 7-3

– CONTINUED –

7-4 Starting and operating

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap,

first touch the vehicle body or a

metal portion of the fuel pump or

similar object to discharge any

static electricity that may be present

on your body. If your body is carry-

ing an electrostatic charge, there is

a possibility that an electric spark

could ignite the fuel, which could

burn you. To avoid acquiring a new

static electric charge, do not get

back into the vehicle while refueling

is in progress.

1) Open

2) Close

3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-

mable. Before refueling, always

first stop the engine and close all

vehicle doors and windows.

Make sure that there are no

lighted cigarettes, open flames

or electrical sparks in the adja-

cent area. Refueling must be

performed outside. Quickly wipe

up any spilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp it

firmly and turn it slowly to the

left. Do not remove the cap

quickly. Fuel may be under pres-

sure and spray out of the fuel

filler neck, especially in hot

weather. If you hear a hissing

sound while you are removing

the cap, wait for the sound to

stop and then slowly open the

cap to prevent fuel from spraying

out and creating a fire hazard.

. When refueling, insert the fuel

nozzle securely into the fuel filler

pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not

fully inserted, its automatic stop-

ping mechanism may not func-

tion, causing fuel to overflow the

tank and creating a fire hazard.

. Stop refueling when the auto-

matic stop mechanis m on the

fuel nozzle activates. If you con-

tinue to add fuel, temperature

changes or other conditions

may cause fuel to overflow from

the tank and create a fire hazard.

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically turns off. Do not add

any more fuel.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tightened

until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage

in the event of an accident.

5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise

until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain

not to catch the tether under the cap while

tightening.

6. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

If you spill any fuel on the painted surface,

rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the

painted surface could be damaged.

NOTE

. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler

door (lid) is located on the right side of

the vehicle.

. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened

until it clicks or if the tether is caught

under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE

warning light/malfunction indicator

lamp may illuminate. Refer to the

“Warning and indicator lights” section

located in chapter 3.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents to

the fuel tank. The addition of a

cleaning agent may cause da-

mage to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap to the

right until it clicks to ensure that

it is fully tightened. If the cap is

not securely tightened, fuel may

leak out while the vehicle is being

driven or fuel spillage could

occur in the event of an accident,

creating a fire hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because

fuel may damage the paint, be

sure to wipe off any spilled fuel

quickly. Paint damage caused by

spilled fuel is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARU

fuel filler cap. If you use the

wrong cap, it may not fit, and

your fuel tank and emission con-

trol system may be damaged. It

could also lead to fuel spillage

and a fire.

. Immediately put fuel in the tank

whenever the low fuel warning

light illuminates. Engine misfires

as a result of an empty tank

could cause damage to the en-

gine.

State emission testing (U.S.

only)

WARNING

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle

must NEVER be performed on a

single two-wheel dynamometer. At-

tempting to do so will result in

uncontrolled vehicle movement and

may cause an accident or injuries to

persons nearby.

CAUTION

Resultant ve hicle damage due to

improper testing is not covered

under the SUBARU Limited War-

ranty and is the responsibility of

the state inspection program or its

contractors or licensees.

At state inspection time, remember to

tell your inspection or service station in

advance not to place your SUBARU

AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-

ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-

sion damage will result.

Some states have started using dynam-

ometers in their state inspection programs

Starting and operating 7-5

– CONTINUED –

7-6 Starting and operating

in order to meet their obligation under

federal law to implement stricter vehicle

emission standards to reduce air pollution

from vehicles. A dynamometer is a tread-

mill or roller-like testing device that allows

your vehicle’s wheels to turn while the

vehicle remains in one place. Depending

on the severity of a state’s air pollution

problems, the states must adopt either a

“basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission

inspection test. Normally, a portion of the

basic emission test consists of an emis-

sion inspector inserting an analyzer probe

into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle

for a short period of time. States with more

severe air pollution problems are required

to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission

test. This test simulates actual driving

conditions on a dynamometer and permits

more accurate measurement of tailpipe

emitted pollution than the basic emission

test.

The U.S. Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel

dynamometers in their emission testing

programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU

AWD vehicles from the portion of the

testing program that involves a two-wheel

dynamometer.

There are some states that use four-wheel

dynamometers in their testing programs.

When properly used, that equipment will

not damage an AWD SUBARU vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected for

state emission testing.

The EPA has issued regulations for

inspecting the On-Board Diagnostic

(OBD) system as part of the state emis-

sions in spection. The OBD system is

designed to detect engine and transmis-

sion problems that might cause vehicle

emissions to exceed allo wable limits.

These inspections apply to all 1996 model

year and newer passenger cars and light

trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of

Columbia have implemented the OBD

system inspection.

. The inspection of the OBD system

consists of a visual operational check of

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/

malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and an

examination of the OBD system with an

electronic scan tool while the engine is

running.

. Avehicle

passes the OBD system

inspec tion if proper the “CHECK EN-

GINE” warning light/MIL illumination is

observed, there is no stored diagnostic

trouble codes, and the OBD system

readiness monitors are complete.

. A vehicle

fails the OBD inspection if the

“CHECK ENGINE ” warning light/MIL is

not properly operating or there is one or

more diagnostic trouble codes stored in

vehicle’s c omputer with the “CHECK

ENGINE” warning light/MIL illuminated.

. A state emission inspection may reject

(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of

OBD system readiness monitors “Not

Ready” is greater than one. Under this

condition, the vehicle operator should be

instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few

days to set the monitors and return for an

emission re-inspection.

. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles

should contact their SUBARU Dealer for

service.

Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checks

and adjustments every day before you

start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition

of the tires. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

4. Check that the hood and rear gate are

fully closed.

5. Check the adjustment of the seat.

6. Check the adjustment of the inside

and outside mirrors.

7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seatbelts.

8. Check the operation of the warning

and indicator lights when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-

ing lights after starting the engine.

NOTE

Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,

washer fluid and other fluid levels

should be checked daily, weekly or at

fuel stops.

Starting the engine

CAUTION

. Do not operate the starter motor

continuously for more than 10

seconds. If the engine fails to

start after operating the starter

for 5 to 10 seconds, wait for 10

seconds or more before trying

again.

. If you restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, shift the se-

lector lever into the “N” position.

Do not attempt to place the

selector lever of a moving vehicle

into the “P” position.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Shift the selector lever to the “ P” or “N”

position (preferably “P” position). The

starter will only operate when the selector

lever is at the “P” or “N” position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to the

“Warning and indicator lights” section in

chapter 3.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.

If the eng ine doe s not star t, try the

following.

(1) Turn the i gnition switch to the

“LOCK” position and wait for at least

10 seconds. After checking that the

parking brake is firmly set, turn the

ignition switch to the “START” position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (approximately a quarter of the

full stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”

position and wait for at least 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator peda l and turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position. If the

engine starts, quickly release the

accelerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”

position. After waiting for 10 seconds

or longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still refuses to start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

Starting and operating 7-7

– CONTINUED –

7-8 Starting and operating

lights have turned off after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make

sure that the selector lever is at the “P” or

“N” position and that the parking brake is

applied.

Stopping the engine

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the

vehicle is moving. This will cause

loss of power to the power steering

and the brake booster, making steer-

ing an d braking more difficult. It

could also result in accidental acti-

vation of the “LOCK” position on the

ignition switch, causing the steering

wheel to lock.

The ignition switch should be turned off

only when the vehicle is stopped and the

engine is idling.

Remote engine start system

(dealer option)

WARNING

. Do not start the engine using the

remote start system in an en-

closed environment (e.g. closed

garage). Prolonged operation of

a motor vehicle in an enclosed

environment can cause a harmful

build-up of Carbon Mo noxide.

Carbon Monoxide is harmful to

your health. Exposure to high

levels of Carbon Monoxide can

cause headaches, dizziness or in

extreme cases unconsciousness

and/or death.

. Before performing any servicing

of the vehicle, temporarily place

the remote engine start system in

service mode to prevent the

system from unexpectedly start-

ing the engine.

& Starting your vehicle

The remote engine start system is acti-

vated by pressing the “

” button twice

within 3 seconds on your remote engine

start transmitter. The system will check

certain pre-conditions before starting, and

if all safety parameters are correct, the

engine will start within 5 seconds. While

the vehicle is operating via remote engine

start, the vehicle’s power window features

will be disabled. Also, the system has a

timer and will shut down after 15 minutes if

you do not operate the vehicle. Press and

hold the “

” button for 2 seconds again to

turn the vehicle off. If the vehicle’s starter

cranks but does not start or starts and

stalls, the remote engine start system will

power off then attempt to start the vehicle

an additional four times. If the vehicle fails

to start after the additional attempts, the

remote engine start system will abort and

return to a non activated state.

& Remote start safety features

For safety and security reasons, the

system will fail to start and beep the horn

twice or shut down the engine during

remote start operation if any of the

following occur:

. The brake pedal is depressed before

the vehicle ignition switch is turned “on”

. The key was already in the ignition

switch

. The engine hood is opened

. The vehicle’s engine idle speed has

reached a level over 3,000 RPM

. The alarm is triggered by opening a

door or the rear gate.

NOTE

. The security indicator light on the

dashboard will stop flashing while

under remote engine start operation,

but the vehicle is still protected.

. If the vehicle is entered during

remote engine start operation, the

system will not record entry in the

alarm history.

& Entering the vehicle while it

is running via remote start

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the

remote keyless entry system. If the vehi-

cle’s doors are unlocked manually using

the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will

trigger and the remote engine start system

will turn off. Inserting the key into the

ignition switch and turning it to the “ON”

position or pressing the unlock button “

”

on the remote keyless entry transmitter

will disarm the alarm system. Refer to the

“Alarm system” section in chapter 2.

2. Enter the vehicle. Do not depress the

brake pedal.

3. Insert the key into the ignition switch

and turn to the “ON” position. If the ignition

switch is accidentally turned to the

“START” position, the system’s “starter

anti-grind” feature will prevent the starter

from re-cranking.

4. Depress the brake pedal. The remote

starter disengages, the vehicle’s power

window features are re-enabled and the

vehicle will operate normally.

& Entering the vehicle follow-

ing remote engine start shut-

down

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is

opened by the remote keyless entry

Starting and operating 7-9

– CONTINUED –

7-10 Starting and operating

transmitter within a few seconds immedi-

ately following remote engine start shut-

down.

& Pre-heating or pre-cooling

the interior of the vehicle

Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-

perature controls to the desired setting

and operation. After the system starts the

vehicle, the heater or air-conditioning will

activate and heat or cool the interior to

your setting.

& Service mode

In service mode, the remote start function

is temporarily disabled to prevent the

system from unexpected ly starting the

engine while being serviced.

! To engage the service mode

Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position, depress and hold the brake pedal

then, press and release the “

” button on

the remote engine start transmitter three

times. The system will pause for 1 second

and then flash the parking lights and honk

the horn three times indicating that the

system is in service mode. When attempt-

ing to activate the remote start system

while in service mode, the parking lights

will flash and the horn will honk two times

and will not start.

! To disengage the service mode

Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position, depress and hold the brake

pedal, then press and release the “

”

button on the remote engine start trans-

mitter three times. The system will pause

for 1 second and flash the parking lights

one time indicating that the system has

exited service mode.

NOTE

When taking your vehicle in for service,

it is recommended that you inform the

service personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with a remote engine start

system.

& Remote engine start trans-

mitter programming and pro-

grammable feature option

New transmitters can be programmed to

the remote engine start system in the

event that remote engine start transmitters

are lost, stolen or damaged. The remote

engine start system also has one pro-

grammable feature that can be adjusted

for user preference.

The remote engine start system can be

programmed to either make an audible

horn chirp upon remote start activation or

not. Remote engine start transmitter pro-

gramming and feature programming can

be adjusted using the following procedure.

1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s

door must remain opened throughout the

entire process).

2. Insert the key into the vehicle’s ignition

switch and turn to the “ON” position.

3. Locate the small black programming

button behind the fuse box cover, on the

driver’s side left under the dashboard

panel.

4. Press and hold the black programming

button for 10 to 15 seconds. The horn will

honk and the parking lights will flash three

times to indicate that the system has

entered programming mode. At this point

you can perform either action (step 5 or

step 6).

5. To program a remote transmitter:

press and release the “

” button on each

transmitter. The horn will honk and the

parking lights will flash one time to indicate

a successful transmitter learn each time

the “ ” button is pressed. You can

program up to eight transmitters.

6. To toggle the Horn Confirmation chirps

ON/OFF: press and release the brake to

toggle the feature. The horn will chirp and

the parking lights will flash one time to

indicate Confirmation Horn Chirps are

“OFF”. The horn will honk and the parking

lights will flash 2 times to indicate Con-

firmation Horn Chirps are “ON”. Depres-

sing the brake pedal repeatedly will toggle

the feature ON or OFF each time.

7. To exit the re mote tra nsmitter and

feature programming mode, turn the igni-

tion switch to the “LOCK ” position, remove

the key from the ignition switch and test

operation of the remote transmitter(s) and

horn confirmation feature.

& System maintenance

! Changing the batteries

The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model

CR-1220) supplied in your remote engine

start transmitter should last approximately

three years, depending on usage. When

the batteries begin to weaken, you will

notice a decrease in range (distance from

the vehicle that your remote engine start

system operates). Follow the instructions

below to change the re mote control

batteries.

1. Carefully pry the remote engine start

transmitter halves apart using a small flat-

head screwdriver.

2. Remove the circuit board from the

bottom half of the case and slide the white

plastic battery holder out from under the

battery tab releasing the batteries. Re-

move the old batteries and replace with

new ones. Be sure to observe the (+) sign

Starting and operating 7-11

– CONTINUED –

7-12 Starting and operating

on the old batteries before removing them

to ensure that the new batteries are

inserted properly (battery “+” should be

pointed away from the transmitter circuit

board on both batteries).

3. Carefully snap the case halves back

together, then test the remote engine start

system.

NOTE

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

Automatic transmission

The automatic transmission is electroni-

cally controlled and provides 5 forward

speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a

manual mode and a SPORT mode.

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N”

position into the “D” or “R” position

while depressing the accelerator

pedal. This may cause the vehicle

to jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

. Shift into the “P” or “R” position

only after the vehicle is comple-

tely stopped. Shifting while the

vehicle is moving may cause

damage to the transmission.

. Do not race the engine for more

than 5 seconds in any position

except the “N” or “P” position

when the brake is set or when

chocks are used in the wheels.

This may cause the automatic

transmission fluid to overheat.

. Avoid shifting from one of the

forward driving positions into the

“R” position or vice versa until

the vehicle has completely

stopped. Such shifting may

cause damage to the transmis-

sion.

. When parking the vehicle, first

securely apply the parking brake

and then place the selector lever

in the “P” position. Avoid parking

for a long time with the selector

lever in any other position as

doing so could result in a dead

battery.

NOTE

. When the engine coolant tempera-

ture is still low, your vehicle’s auto-

matic transmission will up-shift at high-

er engine speeds than when the cool-

ant temperature is sufficiently high in

order to shorten the warm-up time and

improve driveability. The gearshift tim-

ing will automatically shift to the nor-

mal timing after the engine has warmed

up.

. Immediately after ATF (automatic

transmission fluid) is replaced, you

may feel that the automatic transmis-

sion operation is somewhat unusual.

This results from invalidation of data

which the on-board computer has

collected and stored in memory to

allow the transmission to shift at the

most appropriate times for the current

condition of your vehicle. Optimized

shifting will be restored as the vehicle

continues to be driven for a while.

& Selector lever

: With the brake pedal depressed, shift

while pressing the button in.

: Shift while pressing the button in.

: Shift without pressing the button.

The selector lever has four positions, “P”,

“R”, “N”, “D” and also has manual gate for

using “SPORT” mode or manual mode.

! P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the engine.

In this position, the transmission is me-

chanically locked to prevent the vehicle

from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first set the

parking brake fully, then shift into the “P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the transmission.

To shift the selector lever from the “P” to

any other position, you have to depress

the brake pedal fully then push the release

button on the selector lever when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position. This

prevents the vehicle from lurching when it

is started.

If the selecter lever does not move from

the “P” position with the brake pedal

depressed, the release button pushed in,

and the ignition switch in the ON position,

refer to the “Shift lock release” section in

this chapter.

NOTE

To protect the engine while the “P”

position is sel ected, the engine is

controlled such that the engine speed

may not become too high even if the

accelerator pedal is depressed hard.

! R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle.

To shift from the “ N” to “R” position, stop

the vehicle completely then move the

lever to the “R” position while pushing

the release button.

! N (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalled

engine.

In this position the wheels and transmis-

sion are not locked. In this position, the

transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll

freely, even on the slightest incline unless

the parking brake or foot brake is applied.

Avoidcoastingwiththetransmission

neutral.

During coasting, there is no engine brak-

ing effect.

NOTE

. To protect the engine while the “N”

position is selected, the engine is

controlled such that the engine speed

may not become too high even if the

accelerator pedal is depressed hard.

. When the ignition switch has been

turned to the “LOCK” position, move-

ment of the selector lever from the “N”

position to the “R” position is possible

for a limited time period by depressing

the brake pedal and th en beco mes

impossible. If the selector lever be-

comes impossible to be moved after a

limited time period, turn the ignition

Starting and operating 7-13

– CONTINUED –

7-14 Starting and operating

switch to the “ON” position. You will

then be able to move the selector lever

to the “P” position.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

selector lever in the “N” (Neutral)

position. Engine braking has no

effect in this condition and the risk

of an accident is consequently in-

creased.

! D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving.

The transmission automatically shifts into

a suitable gear from 1st to 5th according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration

you require.

When more acceleration is required in this

position, depress the accelerator pedal

fully to the floor and hold that position. The

transmission will automatically downshift

to 4th, 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you

release the pedal, the transmission will

return to the original gear position.

To use the SPORT mode, move the lever

from this position into the manual gate.

To use the manual mode, move the lever

from this position into the manual gate

then move it toward the “+” and “−” ends.

! While climbing a grade

When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to

4th or 5th gear is prevented from taking

place when the accelerator is released.

This minimizes the chance of subsequent

downshifting to a lower gear when accel-

erating again. This prevents repeated

upshifting and downshifting resulting in a

smoother operation of the vehicle.

NOTE

The transmission may downshift to 2nd

or 1st gear, depending on the way the

accelerator pedal is depressed to ac-

celerate the vehicle again.

& Selector lever reverse inhi-

biting function

This function prevents accidental move-

ment of the selecto r lever to the “R”

position while the vehicle is moving.

The function becomes operational when

the vehicle reaches a speed of approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h). Once opera-

tional, it prevents the selector lever from

being moved from the “N” position to the

“R” position. When the vehicle speed

drops below 6 mph (10 km/h), the function

is canceled. The selector lever can then

be moved to the “R” and “P” positions.

When the ignition switch has been turned

to the “LOCK” position, movement of the

selector lever from the “N” position to the

“R” position is possible for a limited time

period by depressing the brake pedal and

then becomes impossible. Also, the se-

lector lever cannot be moved to the “R”

position after it has been placed in the “P”

position and then placed again in the “N”

position.

When the movement of the selector lever

from the “N” position to the “R” position

has become impossible, turn the ignition

switch back to the “ON” position then

move the selector lever to the “P” position.

Pressing the selector lever release button

alsomakesitpossibletomovethe

selector lever to the “P” position at this

time.

! Selector lever release button

If you inadvertently have turned the igni-

tion switch to the “LOCK” position with the

selector lever in the “N” position, proceed

as follows. By referring to the “Shift lock

release” section in this chapter, remove

the cover. Then, with a screwdriver in-

serted into the hole, move the selector

lever to the “P” position while pressing the

release button. If the selector lever re-

verse inhibiting function fails, have the

vehicle inspected by the nearest SUBARU

dealer.

& Selection of manual mode

With the vehicle either moving or station-

ary, move the selector lever from the “D”

position to the manual gate then move it to

the “+” end or “−” end of the manual gate

to select manual mode.

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator and upshift indica-

tor and/or downshift indicator in the

tachometer illuminate. The gear position

indicator s hows the currently select ed

gear in the 1st-to-5th-gear range. The

upshift a nd downshift indicators show

when a gearshift is possible. When the

upshift indicator “

” is illuminated, up-

shifting is possible. When the downshift

indicator “

” is illuminated, downshifting

is possible. When both indicators are

illuminated, upshifting and downs hifting

are both possible. When the vehicle stops

(for example, at traffic signals), the down-

shift indicator turns off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the

selector lever.

Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly

pushing the selector lever toward the “+”

end of the manual gate.

Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly

pulling the selector lever toward the “−”

end of the manual gate.

NOTE

Please read the following points care-

fully and bear them in mind when using

the manual mode.

. When the temperature of the engine

oil is higher than normal, warning

beeps are emitted and the shift position

indicator shows “−”. If these warnings

are issued, deselect the manual mode

to protect the engine from damage.

Starting and operating 7-15

– CONTINUED –

7-16 Starting and operating

. The transmission does not automa-

tically shift up in the manual mode.

Perform gearshifts in accordance with

road conditions so that the tachometer

needle does not enter the red zone. If

the engine speed reaches a predeter-

mined level, a fuel-cut function will

operate. Shift up if this happens. Also,

the transmission may automatically

shift up to protect the engine.

. If you attempt to shift down when

the engine speed is too high, i.e., when

a downshift would push the tachometer

needle beyond the red zone, beeps will

be emitted to warn you that the down-

shift is not possible.

. If you attempt to shift up when the

vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-

sion will not respond.

. You can perform a skip-shift (for

example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating

the selector lever twice in rapid suc-

cession.

. The transmission automatically se-

lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops

moving.

. If the temperature of the automatic

transmission fluid becomes too high,

the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light will

illuminate and upshifts to 5th gear will

not be possible. Immediately stop the

vehicle in a safe place and let the

engine idle until the warning light turns

off.

& Maximum speeds

WARNING

When down shifting, ensure that the

vehicle is not travelling at a speed

exceeding the Maximum Allowable

Speed for the gear which is about to

be selected. Failure to observe this

precaution can lead to engine over-

revving and this in turn can result in

engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine braking caused by down

shifting when the vehicle is travel-

ling on a slippery surface can lead

to wheel locking; as a consequence,

control of the vehicle may be lost

and the risk of an accident in-

creased.

The following tables show the maximum

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear.

When down shifting, it is important to

confirm that the current vehicle speed is

not in excess of the Maximum Allowable

Speed of the gear which is about to be

selected.

Position mph (km/h)

1 28 (45)

2 53 (85)

87 (140)

Never exceed posted speed limits.

NOTE

. In order to prevent over-revving

during acceleration of the vehicle, the

transmission will automatically shift to

the next highest gear if the Maximum

Allowable Speed for the current gear is

exceeded.

. Similarly, in order to prevent over-

revving during deceleration of the

vehicle, the transmission will remain

in the current gear if the speed of the

vehicle is in excess of the Maximum

Allowable Speed for the gear to which

the selector lever has been moved.

& Driving tips

. On a road surface where there is a risk

of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or

gravel-covered road), you can pull away

from a standstill safely and easily by first

selecting the 2nd gear of the manual

mode.

. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or

“R” position.

. Always set the parking brake when

parking your vehicle. Do not hold the

vehicle with only the transmission.

. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using the

“D” position. Use the brake instead.

. The engine may, on rare occasions,

knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-

ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.

This phenomenon does not indicate a

problem.

. A slight reduction in output torque may

occur before the engine warms up.

& SPORT mode

SPORT mode is used when power is

needed for rapid acceleration or for uphill

driving. To select this mode, move the

selector lever from the “D” position to the

manual gate.

When selected, the SPORT mode indica-

tor light on the combination meter will

illuminate.

To deselect SPORT mode, move the

selector lever to the “D” position or select

manual mode. To subsequently reselect

SPORT mode, move the selector lever to

the “D” position and from there to the

manual gate.

In this mode, the transmission shifts up at

higher vehicle speeds and shifts down

more responsively than in normal mode.

& Shift lock release

Perform the following steps if the selector

lever does not move from the “P” position

even with the release button pressed, the

brake pedal depressed and the ignition

switch in the “ON” position:

To override the shift lock:

1. Set the parking brake and stop the

engine.

2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool

bag.

3. Remove the cover by prying on the

edge with a flat-head screwdriver.

Starting and operating 7-17

– CONTINUED –

7-18 Starting and operating

4. Insert a screwdriver into the hole.

5. Push down on the screwdriver and

move the selector lever from the “P” to the

“N” position while pressing the release

button.

6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole.

Depress the brake pedal and start the

engine.

Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU

dealer immediately to have the system

repaired.

Power steering

CAUTION

Do not hold the steering wheel at the

fully locked position left or right for

more than 5 seconds. This may

damage the power steering pump.

The power steering system operates only

when the engine is running.

If you lose power steering assist because

the engine stops or the system fails to

function, you can steer but it will take

much more effort.

NOTE

Right after the engine has been started

and before it has warmed up, you may

hear a noise coming from areas adja-

cent to the power steering pump which

is located at the right-front area of the

engine compartment. This noise is

normal. I t does not indicate power

steering system trouble.

Braking

& Braking tips

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This can cause

dangerous overheating of the

brakes and needless wear on the

brake pads and linings.

! When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing the

vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a

result, brake stopping distance will be

longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle

at a safe speed while lightly depressing

the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

! Use of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine braking

in addition to foot braking. When descend-

ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,

the brakes may start working improperly

because of brake fluid overheating,

caused by overheated brake pads. To

help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to

get stronger engine braking.

! Braking when a tire is punctured

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

when a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe place.

& Brake system

! Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake

system. Each circuit works diagonally

across the vehicle. If one circuit of the

brake system should fail, the other half of

the system still works. If one circuit fails,

the brake pedal will go down much closer

to the floor than usual and you will need to

depress it down much harder. And a much

longer distance will be needed to stop the

vehicle.

! Brake booster

The brake booster uses engine manifold

vacuum to assist braking force. If engine

manifold vacuum becomes insufficient,

such as when driving in a high-altitude

place, a vacuum pump assures a suffi-

cient vacuum to operate the brake boos-

ter. Do not turn off the engine while driving

because that will turn off the brake

booster, resulting in poor braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the brake booster completely stops

functioning. If this happens, however, you

will have to depress the pedal much

harder than normal and the braking dis-

tance will increase.

NOTE

Some sound accompanying operation

of the vacuum pump may be heard

from the engine compartment during

driving. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

! Brake assist system

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the

brake assist. It is not a system that

brings more braking ability to the

vehicle beyond its braking capabil-

ity. Always use the utmost care

when driving regarding vehicle

speed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly,

continue depressing the brake pedal

strongly to bring the effect of the

brake assist.

NOTE

When you dep ress the brak e pedal

suddenly, the brake pedal might wig-

gle. This is a normal operation phe-

nomenon, and it is not a malfunction.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system.

It assists the brake power when the driver

cannot depress the brake pedal strongly

and the brake power is insufficient.

Brake assist generates the brake power

according to the speed at which the driver

depresses the brake pedal.

& Disc brake pad wear warning

indicators

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors on the disc brakes give a warning

noise when the brake pads are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard

from the disc brakes while braking, im-

Starting and operating 7-19

– CONTINUED –

7-20 Starting and operating

mediately have your vehicle inspected by

the nearest SUBARU dealer.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem)

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

youaredrivingwithanABS

equipped vehicle could easily lead

to a serious accident.

CAUTION

. The ABS system does not always

decrease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe

following distance from other

vehicles.

. When driving on badly surfaced

roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or

over deep newly fallen snow,

stopping distances may be long-

er for a vehicle with the ABS

system than one without. When

driving under these conditions,

therefore, reduce your speed and

leave ample distance from other

vehicles.

. When you feel the ABS system

operating, you should maintain

constant brake pedal pressure.

Do not pump the brake pedal

since doing so may defeat the

operation of the ABS system.

The ABS system prevents the lock-up of

wheels which may occur during sudden

braking or braking on slippery road sur-

faces. Th is helps prevent the loss of

steering control and directional stability

caused by wheel lock-up.

When the ABS system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

when the ABS operates.

The ABS system will not operate when the

vehicle speed is below approximately 6

mph (10 km/h).

& ABS system self-check

You may feel a slight shock in the brake

pedal and hear the operating sound of

ABS from the engine compartment just

after the vehicle is started. This is caused

by an automatic functional test of the ABS

system being carried out and does not

indicate any abnormal condition.

& ABS warning light

The ABS warning light illuminates when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and turns off after approximately 2

seconds.

This is an indication that the ABS system

is working properly.

CAUTION

If the warning light behaves as

follows, the ABS system may not

be working properly.

When the warning light illuminates,

the ABS function shuts down; how-

ever, the conventional brake system

continues to operate normally.

. The warning light does not illu-

minate when the ignition switch

is turned to the “ON” position.

. The warning light illuminates

when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position, but

it does not turn off even when the

vehicle speed exceeds approxi-

mately 8 mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light illuminates dur-

ing driving.

If these occur, have the ABS system

repaired at the first available oppor-

tunity by your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following, the ABS

system may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light remains illumi-

nated after the engine has been started,

but it turns off when the vehicle speed

reaches approximately 8 mph (12

km/h).

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may illumi-

nate. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a malfunction.

When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will turn off.

Starting and operating 7-21

7-22 Starting and operating

Electronic Brake Force Dis-

tribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effective-

ness of the brakes by allowing the rear

brakes to supply a greater proportion of

the braking force. It functions by adjusting

the distribution of braking force to the rear

wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s

loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the

ABS system and uses some of the ABS

system’s components to perform its func-

tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-

ing force. If any of the ABS components

used by the EBD function fails, the EBD

system also stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

and does not indicate a malfunction.

& Steps to take if EBD system

fails

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the brake

system warning light and ABS warning

light illuminate simultaneously.

The EBD system may be malfuntioning if

the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously

during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are

applied harder than usual and the vehi-

cle’s motion may therefore become some-

what harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illum inate simultaneously,

take the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,

flat place.

2. Shut down the engine, apply th e

parking brake, and then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both

warning lights turn off, the EBD system

may be malfuntioning.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights illuminate again

and remain illuminated after the engine

has been restarted, shut down the engine

again, apply the parking brake, and check

the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

malfuntioning. Drive carefully to the near-

est SUBARU dealer and have the system

inspected.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.

Instead, have the vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light illuminated is dan-

gerous. This indicates your brake

system may not be working

properly. If the light remains

illuminated, have the brakes in-

spected by a SUBARU dealer

immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether

the brakes are operating prop-

erly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for re-

pair.

Vehicle Dynamics Control

system

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

you are driving with a Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system equipped

vehicle could easily lead to a ser-

ious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with Vehicle Dynamics Control,

winter tires or snow chains

should be used when driving on

snow-covered or icy roads; in

addition, vehicle speed should

be reduced considerably. Simply

having a Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system does not guarantee

that the vehicle will be able to

avoid accidents in any situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control s ystem is an

indication that the road being

travelled on has a slippery sur-

face; since having Vehicle Dy-

namics Control is no guarantee

that full vehicle control will be

maintained at all times and under

all conditions, its activation

should be seen as a sign that

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle are removed from a

vehicle equipped with Vehicle

Dynamics Control, have an

authorized SUBARU dealer per-

form an inspection of that sys-

tem.

. The following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure

that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is operating properly:

– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the sam e for all

four tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

vehicle placard attached to

the driver’s side door pillar.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding

on a slippery road surface and/or during

Starting and operating 7-23

– CONTINUED –

7-24 Starting and operating

cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

adjusts the engine’s output and the

wheels’ respective braking forces to help

maintain traction and directional control.

. Traction Control Function

The traction control function is designed to

prevent spinning of the driving wheels on

slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to

maintain traction and directional control.

Activation of this function is shown by

steady illumi nation of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control operation indicator light.

. Skid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is designed

to help maintain directional stability by

suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide

sideways during steering operations. Acti-

vation of this function is shown by flashing

of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light.

NOTE

. Slight twitching of the brake pedal

may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system operates; a small de-

gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak-

ing may also be noticed in this situa-

tion. These are normal characteristics

of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

and are no cause for alarm.

. When driving off immediately after

starting the engine, a short operation

noise may be noticed coming from the

engine compartment. This noise is

generated as a result of a check being

performed on the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and is normal.

. Depending on the timing of activa-

tion of the brakes, the brake pedal may

seem to jolt when you drive off after

starting the engine. This is a conse-

quence of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol operational check and is normal.

. In the circumstances listed in the

following, the vehicle may be more

unstable than it feels to the driver.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control System

may therefore operate. Such operation

does not indicate a system malfuncion.

. on gravel-covered or rutted roads

. on unfinished roads

. when the vehicle is towing a

trailer

. when the vehicle is fitted with

snow tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will cause operation of

the steering wheel to feel slightly

different compared to that for normal

conditions.

. Even if the vehicle is equipped with

a Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it

is important that winter tires be used

when driving on snow-covered or icy

roads. (All four wheels should be fitted

with tires of the same size and brand).

Furthermore, if snow chains are to be

used, they should be fitted on the front

wheels. When a vehicle is fitted with

snow chains, however, the effective-

ness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is reduced and this should be

taken into account when driving the

vehicle in such a condition.

. It is always important to reduce

speed when approaching a corner,

even if the vehicle is equipped with

Vehicle Dynamics Control.

. All four wheels should be fitted with

tires of the same size, type, and brand;

furthermore, the amount of wear

should be the same for all four tires. If

these precautions are not obs erved

and non-matching tires are used, it is

quite possible that the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system will be unable

to operate correctly as intended.

. Always turn off the engine before

replacing a tire as failure to do so may

render the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system unable to operate correctly.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

system monitor

! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light

The indicator light illuminates when the

ignition key is turned to the ON position; it

turns off approximately 2 seconds later.

This indicator light flashes during activa-

tion of the skid suppression function and is

illuminated steadily during activation of the

traction control function.

The following two situations could indicate

a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system; if either should occur,

have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry

out an inspection of that system at the first

available opportunity.

. The indicator light does not illuminate

when the ignition key is turned to the ON

position.

. The indicator light does not turn off

approximately 2 seconds after the ignition

key has been turned to the ON position.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light/Traction Control system OFF

indicator light

This single light has the function of

indicating malfunctions in the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system and the function

of indicating that the Traction Control

system is not operating. It illuminates in

the event of a malfunction in the system

and is illuminated whenever the system is

not operating.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

The warning light illuminates when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and turns off several seconds

after engine startup. This lighting pattern

indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is operating normally.

The following situations could indicate a

malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system; if any should occur, we

recommend that you have an authorized

SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of

the system at the first available opportu-

nity.

. The warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition key is turned to the ON

position.

. The warning light illuminates while the

vehicle is being driven.

. When a malfunction has occurred in

the Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical

system, only the warning light will illumi-

nate. In such an event, the ABS will still be

operating normally.

. The warning light will also illuminate

when a problem occurs with the ABS or

Vehicle Dynamics Control electronic con-

trol systems.

Because the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system controls each brake through the

ABS, whenever the ABS stops operating

Starting and operating 7-25

– CONTINUED –

7-26 Starting and operating

due to a malfunction in that electrical

system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control will

also become unable to control all four

brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics Control

system operation halts and the warning

light illuminates. Although both the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system and the ABS

will be inoperable in this situation, it will

still be possible to stop the vehicle using

normal braking. The Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and the ABS do not

adversely affect operation of the vehicle

in any way when they are inoperable;

however should such a situation occur,

drive with care and have an authorized

SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of

those systems at the first available oppor-

tunity.

NOTE

When the warning light illuminates and

turns off in the following way, it in-

dicates that the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is operating normally.

. Although illuminating after the en-

gine has been started, the warning light

quickly turns off and remains off.

. The warning light illuminates when

the vehicle is being driven; it then turns

off and remains off.

! Traction Control system OFF indica-

tor light

This light illuminates to indicate that the

Traction Control system is in non-opera-

tion mode. This does not constitute failure

of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

NOTE

. The indicator light may remain illu-

minated for a while after the engine has

been started, especially in cold weath-

er. This occurs because the engine has

not yet warmed up and is completely

normal. The light will turn off when the

engine has reached a suitable operat-

ing temperature.

. When an engine problem occurs

and t he malf unction indicator lamp

illuminates, the indicator light will also

illuminate.

The following two situations could indicate

malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system; if either should occur,

have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry

out an inspection of that system at the first

available opportunity.

. The indicator light does not illuminate

when the ignition key is turned to the ON

position.

. The indicator light fails to turn off after

the engine is started, even when several

minutes have passed to allow the engine

to heat up sufficiently.

& Traction Control system OFF

switch

Pressing the switch to deactivate the

Traction Control system can facilitate the

following operations:

. a standing start on a steeply sloping

road with a snowy, gravel-co vered, or

otherwise slippery surface

. extrication of the vehicle when its

wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When the switch is pressed during engine

operation, the Traction Co ntrol system

OFF indicator light “

” on the combination

meter illuminates. The Traction Control

system will be deactivated and the vehicle

will behave like a model not equipped with

the Traction Control system. When the

switch is pressed again to reactivate the

Traction Control system OFF indicator

light “

” turns off.

With the Traction Control system deacti-

vated, traction enhancement offered by

Traction Control system is unavailable.

Therefore you should not deactivate the

Traction Control system except under

above-mentioned situations.

NOTE

. When the switch has been pressed

to deactivate the Traction Control sys-

tem, the Traction Control system auto-

matically reactivates itself the next time

the ignition key is turned to the “LOCK”

position and the engine is restarted.

. If the switch is held down for 10

seconds or longer, the indicator light

turns off, the Traction Control system

is activated, and the system ignores

any further pressing of the switch. To

make the switch usable again, turn the

ignition key to the “LOCK” position and

restart the engine.

. When the switch is pressed to

deactivate the Traction Control system,

the vehicle’s running performance is

comparable with that of a vehicle that

does not have a Tractio n Control

system. Do not deactivate the Traction

Control system except when absolutely

necessary.

Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,

this system may not react immediately to a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,

a blow-out caused by running over a

sharp object).

Starting and operating 7-27

– CONTINUED –

7-28 Starting and operating

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates w hile driving, never

brake suddenly and keep drivi ng

straight ahead while gradually redu-

cing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe place. Otherwise an

accident involving serious vehicle

damage and serious personal injury

could occur.

Check the pressure for all four tires

and adjust the pressure to the COLD

tire pressure shown on the tire

placard on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a

very short distance, the tires get

warm and their pressures increase

accordingly. Be sure to let the tires

cool thoroughly before adjusting

their pressures to the standard

values shown on the tire placard.

(Refer to the “Tires and wheels”

section in chapter 11.) The tire

pressure monitoring system does

not functi on when the vehicle is

stationary. After adjusting the tire

pressures, increase the vehicle

speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)

to start the TPMS re-checking of the

tire inflation pressures. If the tire

pressures are now above the severe

low pressure threshold, the low tire

pressure warning light should turn

off a few minutes later.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction of

the tire pressure sensors. If the light

illuminates steadily after blinking for

approximately one minute, promptly

contact a SUBARU dealer to have

the system inspected.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metal

parts under the driver’s seat. This

may cause poor reception of the

signals from the tire pressure sen-

sors, and the tire pressure monitor-

ing system will not function prop-

erly.

NOTE

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

Parking your vehicle

WARNING

. Never leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, the tempera-

ture in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to them.

. Do no t park the veh icle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come

near hot engine or exhaust sys-

tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if you

take a nap in the vehicle. If

engine exhaust gas enters the

passenger compartment, o ccu-

pants in the vehicle could die

from carbon monoxide (CO) con-

tained in the exhaust gas.

& Parking brake

CAUTION

. Never drive whil e the parking

brake is set because this will

cause unnecessary wear on the

brake linings. Before starting to

drive, always make sure that the

parking brake has been fully

released.

. Never drive with your foot on the

parking brake pedal.

To set the parking brake, hold down the

brake pedal while depressing the parking

brake pedal as far as it will go.

To release the parking brake, hold down

the brake pedal while depressing the

parking brake pedal and slowly releasing

it.

When the parking brake is set while the

engine is running, the brake system

warning light illuminates. After starting

the vehicle, be sure that the warning light

has turned off before the vehicle is driven.

Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights”

section in chapter 3.

& Parking tips

When parking your vehicle, always set the

parking brake firmly and put the selector

lever in the “P” (Park) position. Always set

the parking brake firmly when parking your

vehicle. Never rely on the transmission

alone to hold the vehicle.

Starting and operating 7-29

– CONTINUED –

7-30 Starting and operating

When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel. When the vehicle is

headed up the hill, the front wheels should

be turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

Cruise control

Cruise control enables you to maintain a

constant vehicle speed without holding

your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is

operative when the vehicle speed is 25

mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the

main switch is turned “OFF” when the

cruise control is not in use to avoid

unintentionally setting the cruise control.

NOTE

If you move the cruise control lever or

press the main switch button while

turning the ignition switch “ON”, the

cruise control function is deactivated

and the cruise control indicator light

flashes. To reactivate the cruise control

function, turn the ignition switch back

to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and

then turn it again to the “ON” position.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control under

any of the following conditions. This

may cause loss of vehicle control:

. driving up or down a steep grade

. driving on slippery or winding

roads

. driving in heavy traffic

& To set cruise control

1. Push the main switch button.

The cruise control indicator light on the

combination meter will illuminate.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Push the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction and release it.

Then release the accelerator pedal.

At this time, the cruise control set indicator

light is illuminated on the combination

meter.

The vehicle will maintain the desired

speed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-

creased while driving wi th the cruise

control activated. Sim ply depress the

accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-

cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-

leased, the vehicle will return to and

maintain the previous cruising speed.

& To temporarily cancel the

cruise control

There are three ways to cancel the cruise

control temporarily:

. Pull the control lever toward you.

. Depress the brake pedal.

. Shift the selector lever into the “N”

position.

The cruise control set indicator light on the

combination meter turns off when the

cruise control is canceled.

To resume the cruise control after it has

been temporarily canceled and with vehi-

cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32

km/h) or more, push the control lever

upward in the “RES/ACC” direction to

return to the original cruising speed auto-

matically.

The cruise control set indicator light on the

combination meter will automatically illu-

minate at this time.

& To turn off the cruise control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise

control:

. Push the main switch again.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or

“LOCK” position (but only when the

vehicle is completely stopped).

Starting and operating 7-31

– CONTINUED –

7-32 Starting and operating

& To change the cruising speed

! To increase the speed (by control

lever)

Push the control lever upward in the “RES/

ACC” direction and hold it until the vehicle

reaches the desired speed. Then, release

the control lever. The vehicle speed at that

moment will be memorized and treated as

the new set speed.

When the difference between the actual

vehicle speed and the set speed is less

than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can

be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time

by pressing the control lever upward in the

“RES/ACC” direction quickly.

! To increase the speed (by accel-

erator pedal)

1. Depress the accelerator pe dal to

accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.

2. Push the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction once. Now the

desired speed is set and the vehicle will

keep running at that speed without de-

pressing the accelerator pedal.

NOTE

If the difference between the actual

vehicle speed when the control lever

is pushed downward and the speed last

time you set is less than 4 mph (6.8

km/h), the vehicle speed will be low-

ered by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). This occurs

because the cruise control system unit

regards this lever operation as that

intended to decrease the vehicle

speed.

! To decrease the speed (by control

lever)

Push the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction and hold it until

the vehicle reaches the desired speed.

Then, release the control lever. The

vehicle speed at that moment will be

memorized and treated as the new set

speed.

When the difference between the actual

vehicle speed and the set speed is less

than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can

be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by

pressing the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction quickly.

! To decrease the speed (by brake

pedal)

1. Depress the brake pedal to release

cruise control temporarily.

2. When the speed decreases to the

desired speed, press the control lever

downward in the “SET/COAST” direction

once. Now the desired speed is set and

the vehicle will keep running at that speed

without depressing the accelerator pedal.

& Cruise control indicator light

The cruise control indicator light illumi-

nates when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position and turns off after

approximately 3 seconds.

The light illuminates when the “CRUISE”

main switch is pressed.

If you move the cruise control lever while

turning the ignition switch “ON”, the cruise

control function is deactivated and the

cruise control indicator light flashes. To

reactivate the cruise control function, turn

the ignition switch back to the “Acc” or

“LOCK” position, and then turn it again to

the “ON” position.

& Cruise control set indicator

light

The cruise control set indicator light

illuminates when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position and turns off

after approximately 3 seconds.

The light illuminates when vehicle speed

has been set.

Starting and operating 7-33

————————————————————————————————————————

New vehicle break-in driving – th e first

1,000 mile s (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2

Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2

Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2

Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3

Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4

Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4

Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................ 8-4

On-pavement and off road driving..................... 8-5

Winter driving ...................................................... 8-7

Operation during cold weather............................. 8-7

Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9

Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10

Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10

Tire chains......................................................... 8-11

Rocking the vehicle............................................ 8-11

Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-11

Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-12

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-12

Roof rails and crossbar (if equipped).................. 8-13

Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped)............ 8-16

Trailer hitch (if equipped) .................................. 8-18

Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-18

When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-20

Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-20

Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-20

Maximum load limits.......................................... 8-20

Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-23

Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-24

Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-26

Driving tips

8-2 Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving

– the first 1,000 miles (1,600

km)

The performance and long life of your

vehicle are dependent on how you handle

and care for your vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km):

. Do not race the engine. And do not

allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm

except in an emergency.

. Do not drive at one constant engine or

vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or

slow.

. Avoid starting sudde nly an d rapid

acceleration, except in an emergency.

. Avoid hard braking, except in an

emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be

applied to a newly installed or overhauled

engine or when brake pads or brake

linings are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to save

your fuel.

. Select the proper gear position for the

speed and road conditions.

. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-

tion. Always accelerate gently until you

reach the desired speed. Then try t o

maintain that speed for as long as

possible.

. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid

racing the engine.

. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

. Keep the engine properly tuned.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the tire placard, which

is located under the door latch on the

driver’s side. Low pressure will increase

tire wear and fuel consumption.

. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

. Keep the f ront and rear wheels in

proper alignment.

. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or

cargo.

Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorle ss

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from enter-

ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked

vehicle for a lengthy time while

the engine is running. If that is

unavoidable, then use the venti-

lation fan to force fresh air into

the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation sys tem al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction

of the metals used in the manufacture

of the exhaust system, you may hear a

crackling sound coming from the ex-

haust system for a short time after the

engine has been shut off. This sound is

normal.

Catalytic converter

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive

or park the vehicle anywhere

near flammable material s (e.g.

grass, paper, rags or leaves),

because the catalytic converter

operates at very high tempera-

tures.

. Keep everyone and flammable

materials away from the exhaust

pipe while the engine is running.

The exhaust gas is very hot.

The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust

gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-

ter:

. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a

small amount of leaded gasoline will

damage the catalytic converter.

. Never start the engine by pushing or

pulling the vehicle.

. Avoid racing the engine.

. Never turn off the ignition switch while

the vehicle is moving.

. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel

the engine running rough (misfiring, back-

firing or in complete combustion), have

your vehicle checked and repaired by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

. Do not apply undercoating or rust

prevention treatment to the heat shield of

catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-

tem.

. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel

level.

Driving tips 8-3

8-4 Driving tips

Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recom-

mended maintenance services listed in

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per -

formed at the specified time or mileage

intervals.

Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle in

another country:

. Confirm the availability of the correct

fuel. Refer to the “Fuel requirements”

section in chapter 7.

. Comply with all regulations and re-

quirements of each country.

Driving tips for AWD vehicles

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles

provide better traction when driving on

slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and

when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.

By shifting power between the front and

rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also

provide added traction during accelera-

tion, and added engine braking force

during deceleration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle

may handle differently than an ordinary

two wheel drive vehicle and it contains

some features unique to AWD. For safety

purposes as well as to avoid damaging

the AWD system, you should keep the

following tips in mind:

. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb

steeper roads under snowy or slippery

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.

There is little difference in handling,

however, during extremely sharp turns or

sudden braking. Therefore, when driving

down a slope or turning corners, be sure

to reduce your speed and maintain an

ample distance from other vehicles.

. When replacing a tire, make sure you

use only the same size, circumference,

construction, brand, and load range as the

original tires listed on the tire placard.

Using other sizes, circumferences or

construction may result in severe mechan-

ical damage to the drive train of your

vehicle and ma y affec t ride, handli ng,

braking, speedometer/ odometer calibra-

tion, and clearance between the body

and tires. It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control.

. If you use a temporary spare tire to

replace a flat tire, be sure to use the

original temporary spare tire stored in the

vehicle. Using other sizes may result in

severe mechanical damage to the drive

train of your vehicle.

. Always check the cold tire pressure

before starting to drive. The recom-

mended tire pressure is provided on the

tire placard, which is located under the

door latch on the driver’s side.

. Tire chains should always be placed on

the front wheels only.

. There are some precautions that you

must observe when towing your vehicle.

Refer to the “Towing” section in chapter 9

for detailed information.

On-pavement and off road

driving

WARNING

. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly m ore

likely to die than a person wear-

ing a seat belt. You the driver and

all your passengers should fas-

ten the seatbelts before starting

to drive in order to minimize the

chance of serious injury or death.

. Do not make sharp turns and

quick maneuvers unless ab so-

lutely unavoidable. Such actions

are dangerous as you may lose

control, possibly resulting in a

rollover which could cause death

or serious injury.

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Whenever strong crosswinds are

present, slow down sufficiently

to maintain control of your vehi-

cle. Remember that your vehicle,

Driving tips 8-5

– CONTINUED –

8-6 Driving tips

with its higher profile and center

of gravity, is more likely to be

affected by crosswinds than or-

dinary passenger cars.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

Your vehicle is cl assified as a utility

vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher

ground clearance which enables them to

be used for wide applications including off-

road driving. But please keep in mind that

your vehicle is neither a conventional off-

road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. A

higher center of gravity in relation to the

tread width as compared with ordinary

passenger cars makes vehicles of this

type more likely to roll over. In reality, utility

vehicles have a significantly higher roll-

over rate than other types of vehicles. The

high ground clearance of this vehicle is a

real advantage, giving you a better view of

the road and allowing you to anticipate

problems earlier. However, remember that

your utility vehicle is not designed for high-

speed cornering comparable to ordinary

passenger cars and that your vehicle

could roll over if you make a sharp turn

at high speed. If you do take you r

SUBARU off-road, certain common sense

precautions such as the following should

be taken:

. Make certain that you and all of your

passengers are wearing seatbelts.

. Carry some emergency equipment,

such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,

wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or

citizens band radio.

. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-

sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or

over rough terrain.

. Slow down and employ extra caution at

all times. When driving off-road, you will

not have the benefit of marked traffic

lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and

the like.

. Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead, drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. A vehicle can much

more easily tip over sideways than it can

end over end. Avoid driving straight up or

down slopes that are too steep.

. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-

cially at higher speeds.

. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the

wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive

with your fingers an d thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

. If driving through water, such as when

crossing shallow streams, first check the

depth of the water and the bottom of the

stream bed for firmness and ensure that

the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly

and completely through the stream. The

water should be shallow enough that it

does not reach the vehicle’s undercar-

riage. Water entering the engine air intake

or the exhaust pipe or water splashing

onto electrical parts may damage your

vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never

attempt to drive through rushing water;

regardless of its depth, it can wash away

the ground from under your tires, resulting

in possible loss of traction and even

vehicle rollover.

. Always check your brakes for effec-

tiveness immediately after driving in sand,

mud or water. Do this by driving slowly

and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat

that process several times to dry out the

brake discs and brake pads.

. Do not dri ve or park over or near

flammable materials such as dry grass or

fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The

exhaust system is very hot while the

engine is running and right after engine

stops. This could create a fire hazard.

. After driving through tall grass, mud,

rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there

is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,

sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the

underbody. Clear off any such matter from

the underbody. If the vehicle is used with

these materials trapped or adhering to the

underbody, a mechanical breakdown or

fire could occur.

. Secure all cargo carried inside the

vehicle and make certain that it is not

piled higher than the seatbacks. During

sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo

could be thrown around in the vehicle and

cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on

the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s

center of gravity and make it more prone

to tip over.

. If you must rock the vehicle to free it

from sand or mud, depress the accelerator

pedal slightly and move the selector lever

back and forth between “D” and “R”

repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For

the best possible traction, avoid spinning

the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

. When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st.

. Never equip your vehicle with tires

larger than those specified in this manual.

. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-

road driving. Suspension components are

particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they

need to be washed thoroughly.

. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle

under hard-driving conditions such as

rough roads or off roads will necessitate

more frequent replacement of engine oil,

brake fluid and transmission oil than that

specified in the mainte nance sche dule

described in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”.

Remember that damage done to your

SUBARU while operating it off-road and

not using common s ens e precau tions

such as those listed above is not eligible

for warranty coverage.

Winter driving

& Operation during cold

weather

Carry some emergency equipment, such

as tire chains, a window scraper, a bag of

sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper

cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold

temperatures reduce battery capac ity.

The battery must be in good condition to

provide enough power for cold winter

starts.

Use an engine oil of proper grade and

viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer

oil will cause harder starting.

Keep the door locks from freezing by

Driving tips 8-7

– CONTINUED –

8-8 Driving tips

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage

or sep arate the r ubber weather strips

around the door. If the door is frozen,

use hot water to melt the ice, and after-

wards thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-

tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use

engine antifreeze or other substitutes

because they may damage the paint of

the vehicle.

SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-

tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it

is diluted, as indicated in the following

table.

Washer Fluid Con-

centration

Freezing Temperature

30% 10.48F(−128C)

50% −48F(−208C)

100%

−498F(−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in

the table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is to o low for the outside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

Adjust the washer fluid concentra-

tion appropriately for the outside

temperature. If the concentration is

inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid

may freeze on the windshield and

obstruct your view, and the fluid

may freeze in the reservoir tank.

! Before driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove any

snow or ice from your shoes because that

could make the pedals slippery and

driving dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before

driving, check that the accelerator pedal,

brake pedal, and all other controls operate

smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has

accumulated under the fenders to avoid

making steering difficult. During severe

winter driving, stop when and where it is

safe to do so and check under the fenders

periodically.

! Parking in cold weather

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle if you park

the vehicle in snow with the engine

running.

Do not use the parking brake when

parking for long periods in cold weather

since it could freeze in that position.

Instead, observe the following.

1. Place the selector lever in “P” position.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to

prevent the vehicle from moving.

When the vehicle is parked in snow or

when it snows, raise the wiper blades off

the glass to prevent damage to them.

When the vehicle has been left parked

after use on roads heavily covered with

snow, or has been left parked during a

snowstorm, icing may develop on the

brake system, which could cause poor

braking action. Check for snow or ice

buildup on the suspension, disc brakes

and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.

If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,

being careful not to da mage the disc

brakes and brake hoses and ABS har-

ness.

! Refueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming in

the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel

tank is recommended during cold weather.

Use only additives that are specifically

designed for this purpose. When an

antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts

longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used

for an extended period, it is best to have

the fuel tank filled to capacity.

& Driving on snowy and icy

roads

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads such as snowy or icy

roads. This may cause loss of

vehicle control.

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving

in snowstorms. Snow will enter the

engine’sintakesystemandmay

hinder the air flow, which could

result in engine shutdown or even

breakdown.

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid

sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-

speed driving, and sharp turning when

driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the

engine brake effectively to control the

vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear

when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-

vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly

leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-

hances your ve hicle’s braking perfor-

mance on snowy and icy roads. Refer to

the “ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)” and

“Vehicle Dynamics Control system” sec-

tion in chapter 7 for information on braking

on slippery surfaces.

! Wiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make sure

the wiper blades are not frozen to the

windshield or rear window. If the wiper

blades are frozen to the windshield or rear

window, use the defroster with the airflow

control button in the “

” position and the

temperature control dial set for maximum

warmth until the wiper blades are com-

pletely thawed out. The wiper deicer is

helpful to thaw the windshield wiper

blades. To thaw out the rear wiper blade,

use the rear window defogger.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts

to stick on the surface of the windshield

despite wiper operation, use the defroster

with the airflow control button in “

” and

the temperature control dial set for max-

imum warmth. After the windshield gets

warmed enough to melt the frozen snow

on it, wash it away using the windshield

washer.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the

wiper from working effectively. If snow is

stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to

a safe place, then remove it. If you stop

the vehicle at road side, use the hazard

warning flasher to alert other drivers.

We recommend use of non-freezing type

wiper blades (winter blades) during the

Driving tips 8-9

– CONTINUED –

8-10 Driving tips

seasons you could have snow and sub-

zero temperatures. Blades of this type

give superior wiping performance in

snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades

that are suitable for your vehicle.

CAUTION

During hig h-speed driving, non-

freezing type wiper blades may not

perform as well as standard wiper

blades. If this happens, reduce the

vehicle speed.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freez-

ing type wiper blades is over, replace

them with standard wiper blades.

& Corrosion protection

Refer to the “Corrosion protection” section

in chapter 10.

& Snow tires

WARNING

. When replacing original tires with

winter (snow) tires, make sure

you use only the same size and

construction as recommended.

Using other sizes or construction

may affect speedometer/od-

ometer calibration and clearance

between the body and tires. It

also may be dangerous and lead

to loss of vehicle control.

. You must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, circum-

ferences, construction, brand,

andloadrange.Mixingother

sizes, circumferences or con-

structions may result in severe

mechanical damage to the drive

train of your vehicle and may

affect ride, handling, braking and

speedometer/odometer calibra-

tion. It also may be dangerous

and lead to loss of vehicle con-

trol.

. Do not use a combination of

radial, belted bias or bias tires

since it may cause dangerous

handling characteristics and lead

to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all season

tires” which are designed to provide an

adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving. In winter, it may be possible to

enhance performance through use of tires

designed specifically for winter driving

conditions.

If you choose to install winter tires on your

vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size

and type. You must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, construction,

brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

since this may result in dangerous hand-

ling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough

clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your

vehicle.

Your vehicle comes with P255/55R18

“all season tires” as original equip-

ment. You should be aware that some

winter tires with that same size desig-

nation may actually be too large for the

vehicle and may cause rubbing on

sharp turns. Listed in the following is

the winter tire size that we recommend.

Recommended winter (snow) tire size

P255/55R18 stud less

& Tire chains

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on tires

listed in the following because of

lack of clearance between the tires

and vehicle body.

All model: P255/55R18 tires

& Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from

snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the selector

lever back and forth between “D” and “R”

repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For

the best possible traction, avoid spinning

the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st.

Refer to the “Automatic transmission”

section in chapter 7 for information on

holding the transmission in 2nd position.

Loading your vehicle

WARNING

Never allow passengers to ride on a

folded rear seatback or in the cargo

area. Doing so may result in serious

injury.

WARNING

. Never stack luggage or other

cargo higher than the top of the

seatback because it could tumble

forward and injure passengers in

the event of a sudden stop or

accident. Keep luggage or cargo

low, as close to the floor as

possible.

. When you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it whenever

you can to prevent it from being

thrown around inside the vehicle

during sudden stops, sharp turns

or in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on the

roof. These loads raise the vehi-

cle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

. Secure lengthy items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum load

limit. If you do, some parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can

change the way your vehicle

handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal

injury. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

. Do not place anything on the

extended luggage cover. Such

items could tumble forward in

the event of a sudden stop or a

collision. This could cause ser-

ious injury.

Driving tips 8-11

– CONTINUED –

8-12 Driving tips

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers

with flammable or corrosive liquids

or any other dangerous items inside

the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded cargo.

& Vehicle capacity weight

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by available

cargo space. The maximum load you can

carry in your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the driver’s

side door pillar. It includes the total weight

of the driver and all passengers and their

belongings, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,

etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

& GVWR and GAWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating and

Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Certification label

The certification label attached to the

driver’s side door shows GVWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross

Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must

never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the

combined total of weight of the vehicle,

fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any

optional equipment and trailer tongue

load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-

pending on the situation.

In addition, the total weight applied to

each axle (GAW) must never exceed the

GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

adjusted by relocating luggage inside the

vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is

lower than the vehicle capacity weight,

either front or rear GAW may exceed the

GAWR, depending on the distribution of

the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly

distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you

should confirm that GVW and front and

rear GAWs are within the GVWR and

GAWR by putting your vehicle on a

vehicle scale , fou nd at a com merc ial

weighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower

load range than the originals because they

may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-

tions. Replacement tires with a higher load

range than the originals do not increase

the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

& Roof rails and crossbar (if

equipped)

1) Roof rails

2) Crossbar kit

CAUTION

. For cargo carrying purposes, the

roof rail must be used together

with a roof crossbar kit and the

appropriate carrying attachment.

The roof rail must never be used

alone to carry cargo. Otherwise,

damage to the roof or paint or a

dangerous road hazard due to

loss of cargo could result.

. When using the roof crossbar kit,

make sure that the total weight of

the crossbars, carrying attach-

ment and cargo does not exceed

the maximum load limit. Over-

loading may cause damage to

the vehicle and create a safety

hazard.

The roof rails are not designed to carry

cargo by themselves. Cargo can be

carried after securing the roof crossbar

kit to the ro of rail an d insta lling th e

approp riate carrying att achment. When

installing the roof crossbar kit, follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

When you carry cargo on the roof using

the roof crossbar kit and a carrying

attachment, never exceed the maximum

load limit as explained below. You should

also be careful that your vehicle does not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). Refer to the

“Loading your vehicle” section in this

chapter for information on loading cargo

into or onto your vehicle. The maximum

load limit of the cargo, crossbars and

carrying attachment must not exceed 150

lbs (68 kg). Place the heaviest load at the

bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly

distribute the cargo. Always properly

secure all cargo.

Driving tips 8-13

– CONTINUED –

8-14 Driving tips

! Installing carrying attachments on

the crossbars

When installing any carrying attachment

such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak

carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-

bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions and make sure that the attachment is

securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only

attachments designed specifically for the

crossbars. A set of the crossbars is

designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-

ment) of not more than 150 lbs (68 kg).

Before operating the vehicle, make sure

that the cargo is properly secured on the

attachment.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting the

driving characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

! Removal and installation of the

crossbars

The crossbars can be removed when you

do not use the roof to carry cargo.

! To remove the crossbar

1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx®

head screw from the top of each crossbar

end support.

Loosen the lower clamps.

2. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof

rails.

! To install the crossbar

Front crossbar:

Front crossbar has 150 LBS Load Label

on left-hand side.

1) T-25 torx® head screw

1. Make sure that the T-25 torx® head

screw on the back of each crossbar end

support is tightened correctly.

2. Before placing the crossbar on the roof

rails, make sure that the T-30 torx® head

screw is removed from the top of each

crossbar end support.

3. The crossbar with the 150 LBS Load

Label attached onto it is the front crossbar.

An arrow is marked on the back of the

front crossbar for correct installation.

Install the front crossbar so that the arrow

faces the front of the vehicle.

1) 12 in (300 mm)

4. Install the front crossbar so that the

crossbar end supports are located ap-

proximately 12 in (300 mm) rearward from

the joints between the roof rails and the

front roof rail supports.

1) Lower clamp

2) T-30 torx® head screw

5. Tighten the lower clamps onto the

crossbar. Using a torque wrench, loosely

tighten the T-30 torx® head screws.

NOTE

It may be necessary to squeeze the

lower clamp and the end support

together to compress the pads and

gain a better alignment of the pieces

while trying to start the screw. Use care

not to cross-thread the screw in the

insert.

Driving tips 8-15

– CONTINUED –

8-16 Driving tips

6. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar

on the roof rails, and if available, use a T-

30 torx® bit and torque wrench and tighten

the T-30 torx® head screws to 30 to 35

lbf·in (3.4 to 4.0 N·m, 0.35 to 0.41 kgf·m) of

torque (or tighten securely with the torx®

wrench provided).

Rear crossbar:

1) 2 in (50 mm)

Install the rear crossbar so that the cross-

bar end supports are located approxi-

mately 2 in (50 mm) forward from the

joints between the roof rails and the rear

roof rail supports.

Install the rear crossbar i n the same

manner as the front crossbar.

CAUTION

Do not carry cargo on the roof when

the crossbars are remov ed. Lug-

gage on the roof will be thrown

forward or backward in sudden

stops or rapid accelerations, result-

ing in a dangerous road hazard.

NOTE

Before each use of the roof crossbar,

make sure the four T-30 crossbar

clamp screws have been checke d,

and retightened if necessary to 35 lbf·in

(4.0 N·m, 0.41 kgf·m), as outlined in

Step #5 above.

& Roof molding and crossbar

(if equipped)

CAUTION

. For cargo carrying purposes, the

roof molding must be used to-

gether with a roof crossbar kit

and the appropriate carrying at-

tachment. Otherwise, damage to

the roof or paint or a dangerous

road hazard due to loss of cargo

could result.

. When using the roof crossbar kit,

make sure that the total weight of

the crossbars, carrying attach-

ment and cargo does not exceed

the maximum load limit. Over-

loading may cause damage to

the vehicle and create a safety

hazard.

Cargo can be carried after securing the

roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and

installing the appropriate carrying attach-

ment. When installing the roof crossbar

kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

When you carry cargo on the roof using

the roof crossbar kit and a carrying

attachment, never exceed the maximum

load limit as explained below. You should

also be careful that your vehicle does not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). Refer to the

“Loading your vehicle” section in this

chapter for information on loading cargo

into or onto your vehicle. The maximum

load limit of the cargo, crossbars and

carrying attachment must not exceed 150

lbs (68 kg). Place the heaviest load at the

bottom, nearest the roof, and e venly

distribute the cargo. Always properly

secure all cargo.

! Installing carrying attachments on

the crossbars

When installing any carrying attachment

such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak

carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-

bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions and make sure that the attachment is

securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only

attachments designed specifically for the

crossbars. A set of the crossbars is

designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-

ment) of not more than 150 lbs (68 kg).

Before operating the vehicle, make sure

that the cargo is properly secured on the

attachment.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting the

driving characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

! Removal and installation of the

crossbars

Each of the two roof moldings has two

mounting points for crossbars. Each

mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use

a screwdriver to remove the covers. When

installing the crossbars on the roof mold-

ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

Driving tips 8-17

8-18 Driving tips

Trailer hitch (if equipped)

1) Trailer hitch

WARNING

. Never exceed the maximum

weight specified for the trailer

hitch. Exceeding the maximum

weight could cause an accident

resulting in serious personal in-

juries. Permissible trailer weight

changes depending on the situa-

tion. Refer to the next section

“Trailer towing” for possible re-

commendations and limitations.

. Trailer brakes are required when

the towing load exceeds 1,000

lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer

has safety chains and that each

chain will hold the trailer’s max-

imum gross weight. Towing trai-

lers without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if

the trailer separates from the

hitch due to coupling damage or

hitch ball damage.

. Be sure to check the hitch pin

and safety pin for positive lock-

ing placement before towing a

trailer. If the ball mount comes off

the hitch receiver, t he trailer

could get loose and create a

traffic safety hazard.

. Use only the ball mount supplied

with this hitch. Use the hitch only

as a weight carrying hitch. Do not

use with any typ e of weight

distributing hitch.

The maximum gross trailer weight and

maximum gross tongue weight are indi-

cated in the following table.

Maximum

gross trailer

weight

Maximum

gross tongue

weight

Vehicle with-

out cooling kit

2,000 lbs

(906 kg)

200 lbs

(90 kg)

Vehicle with

cooling kit

3,500 lbs

(1,587 kg)

350 lbs

(158 kg)

When you tow a trailer, follow the instruc-

tions in the next section “Trailer towing”.

& Connecting a trailer

1. Remove the receiver cover from the

hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball

mount into the hitch receiver tube.

2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the

hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes

through the ball mount.

3. Insert the safety pin into the hitch pin

securely.

4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it

does not come off the hitch receiver.

1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains

5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate

for the ball mount and your trailer. The

hitch ball must be securely installed on the

ball mount.

6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with

safety chains that will hold the trailer’s

maximum gross weight. The chains

should cross under the trailer tongue to

prevent the tongue from dropping onto the

ground in case it should disconnect from

the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the

chains taking tight-turn situations into

account; however, be careful not to let

them drag on the ground.

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to part

of the vehicle other than the safety

chain hooks.

Hitch harness connector

8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black

four-pin wire connector to the towing

trailer’s wire harness.

9. Confirm proper function of the hitch

wire harness by individually activating the

brake, right turn signal, left turn signal,

stop, and parking lights on the trailer.

NOTE

Always disconnect the trailer wire har-

ness before launching or retrieving a

Driving tips 8-19

– CONTINUED –

8-20 Driving tips

watercraft.

& When you do not tow a trailer

. Remove the ball mount from the hitch

receiver tube and insert the receiver cover

onto the hitch receiver tube.

. Place the dust cap over the four-pin

connector of the hitch wire harness to

protect against possible damage.

. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the

four-pin connector using the terminal

grease.

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed and intended to

be used primarily as a passenger-carrying

vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional

loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,

brakes, tires and suspension and has an

adverse effect on fuel economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety

and satisfaction depend upon proper use

of correct equipment and cautious opera-

tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of

your SUBARU dealer to assist you in

purchasing a hitch and other necessary

towing equipment appropriate for your

vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the

instructions on correct installation and use

provided by the trailer and other towing

equipment manufacturers.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for

injuries or vehicle damage that result from

trailer towing e quipment, o r from any

errors or omissions in the instructions

accompanying such equipment or for your

failure to follow the proper instructions.

& Warranties and maintenance

SUBARU warranties do not apply to

vehicle damage or malfunction caused

by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to

tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance

will be required due to the additional load.

(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under

severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”.)

Under no circumstances should a trailer

be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle

with any new powertrain component (en-

gine, transmission, differential, wheel

bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles

(1,600 km) of driving.

& Maximum load limits

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum load

limits explained in the following.

Exceeding the maximum load limits

could cause personal injury and/or

vehicle damage.

CAUTION

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Before towing a trailer, check the

trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs

and tongue load. Make sure the

load and its distribution in your

vehicle and trailer are accepta-

ble.

! Total trailer weight

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo load) must never exceed the

maximum weight shown in the following

table.

Vehicle without cooling kit

Conditions Maximum total trailer weight

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,000 lbs (906 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade

continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an

outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

Vehicle with cooling kit

Conditions Maximum total trailer weight

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade

continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an

outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.

1,750 lbs (794 kg)

Driving tips

8-21

– CONTINUED –

8-22 Driving tips

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must

never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the

combined total of the weight of the vehicle,

driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,

trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment installed on your vehicle.

Therefore, the GVW changes depending

on the situation. Determine the GVW each

time before going on a trip by putting your

vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

GVWR is shown on the certification label

located on the driver’s door of your

vehicle.

Certification label

! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear

GAWs can be adjusted by relocating

passengers and luggage inside the vehi-

cle. The front and rear GAWR are also

shown on the certification label.

Certification label

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to

confirm that the total weight and weight

distribution are within safe driving limits,

you should have your vehicle and trailer

weighed at a commercial weighing station.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

! Tongue load

Tongue load

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with more

weight in the back of trailer’s axle

than in the front, the load is taken off

the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

This may cause the rear wheels to

skid, especially during braking or

when vehicle speed is reduced dur-

ing cornering, resulting in over-

steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from

8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight

and does not exceed the appropriate one

of the following maximum values:

Vehicle without cooling kit: 200 lbs (90 kg)

Vehicle with cooling kit: 350 lbs (158 kg)

1) Jack

2) Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a

bathroom scale as shown in the illustration

above. When weighing the tongue load,

be sure to position the towing coupler at

the height at which it would be during

actual towing, using a jack as shown.

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by

proper distribution of the load in the trailer.

Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front; approximately

60 percent of the trailer load should be in

the front and approximately 40 percent in

the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly

as possible on both the left and right

sides.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

& Trailer hitches

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-body

Driving tips 8-23

– CONTINUED –

8-24 Driving tips

of your vehicle to install a commer-

cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-

ous exhaust gas, water or mud may

enter the passenger compartment

through the drilled hole. Exhaust

gas contains carbon monoxide, a

colorless and odorless gas which is

dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

Also, drilling the frame or under-

body of your vehicle could cause

deterioration o f strength of your

vehicle and cause corrosion around

the drilled hole.

CAUTION

. Do not modify the vehicle ex-

haust system, brake system, or

other systems when installing a

hitch or other trailer towing

equipment.

. Do not use axle-mounted hitches

as they can cause damage to the

axle housing, wheel bearings,

wheels or tires.

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and

trailer.

The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer

hitch is recommended. A genuine

SUBARU hitch is available from your

SUBARU dealer.

If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid-

able, be sure the hitch is suited to your

vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes-

sional hitch supplier to assist you in

choosing an appropriate hitch for your

vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch

manufacturer’s instructions for installation

and use.

Never use a hitch that mounts only to the

rear bumper. The bumper is not designed

to handle that type of load.

For all types of hitches, regularly check

that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are

tight.

& Connecting a trailer

! Trailer brakes

WARNING

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Do not directly connect your

trailer’s hydraulic brake system

to the hydraulic brake system in

your vehicle. Direct connection

would cause the vehicle’s brake

performance to deteriorate and

could lead to an accident.

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight

plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg), the trailer is required to be

equipped with its own brake system.

Electric brakes or surge brakes are

recommended, and must be installed

properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes

conform with Federal, state/province and/

or other applicable regulations. Your

SUBARU’s brake system is not designed

to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic

brake system. Please ask your SUBARU

dealer and professional trailer supplier for

more information about the trailer’s brake

system.

! Trailer safety chains

WARNING

Always use safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. Towing

trailer without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch due

to coupling damage or hitch ball

damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch

ball should break or become discon-

nected, the trailer could get loose and

create a traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing

vehicle and trailer with trailer safety

chains. Pass the chains crossing each

other under the trailer tongue to prevent

the trailer from dropping onto the ground

in case the trailer tongue should discon-

nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient

slack in the chains taking tight-turn situa-

tions into account; however, be careful not

to let them drag on the ground.

For more information about the safety

chain connection, refer to the instructions

for your hitch and trailer.

! Side mirrors

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,

check that the standard side mirrors

provide a good rearward field of view

without significant blind spots. If significant

blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-

dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that

conform with Federal, state/province and/

or other applicable regulations.

! Trailer lights

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improper

connection of trailer lights may

damage your vehicle’s electrical

system and cause a malfunction of

your vehicle’s lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-

cle’s electrical system requires modifica-

tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to

increase its capacity and accommodate

wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights

are connected properly, please consult

your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper

operation of the turn signals, the brake

lights and parking lights each time you

hitch up.

! Tires

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the tem-

porary spare tire is used. The tem-

porary spare tire is not designed to

sustain the towing load. Use of the

temporary spare tire when towing

can result in failure of the spare tire

and/or less stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle

are properly inflated.

The recommended cold tire pressure

under trailer towing conditions is shown

in chapter 12 , “Specifications” and in

“GAS STATION REFERENCE” at the

end of this manual. Adjust the rear tire

pressure to the recommended pressure

when the tires are cold. Normal pressure

should be maintained in the front tires.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

proper inflation pressure should be in

accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s

specifications.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire

when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

road service to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in your

vehicle or trailer as a precaution against

getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare

tire is firmly secured.

Driving tips 8-25

– CONTINUED –

8-26 Driving tips

& Trailer towing tips

CAUTION

. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)

when towing a trailer in hilly

country on hot days.

. When towing a trailer, steering,

stability, stopping distance and

braking performance will be dif-

ferent from normal operation. For

safety’s sake, you should employ

extra caution when towing a

trailer and you should nev er

speed. You should also keep the

following tips in mind:

! Before starting out on a trip

. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-

hitch mounting are in good condition. If

any problems are apparent, do not tow the

trailer.

. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally

with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is

tipped sharply up at the front and down at

the rear, check the total trailer weight,

GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then

confirm that the load and its distribution

are acceptable.

. Check that the tire pressures are

correct.

. Check that the vehicle and trailer are

connected properly. Confirm that

– the trailer tongue is connec ted

properly to the hitch ball.

– the trailer lights connector is con-

nected properly and trailer’sbrake

lights illuminate when the vehicle’s

brake pedal is pressed, and that the

trailer’s turn signal lights flash when

the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-

ated.

– the safety chains are connected

properly.

– all cargo in the trailer is secured

safely in position.

– the side mirrors provide a good

rearward field of view without a sig-

nificant blind spot.

. Sufficient time should be taken to learn

the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination

before starting out on a trip. In an area free

of traffic, practice turning, stopping and

backing up.

! Driving with a trailer

. You should allow for considerably more

stopping distance when towing a trailer.

Avoid sudden braking because it may

result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of

control.

. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and

rapid lane changes.

. Slow down before turning. Make a

longer than normal turning radius because

the trailer wheels will be closer than the

vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In

a tight turn, the trailer could hit your

vehicle.

. Crosswinds will adversely affect the

handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-

ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to

weather conditions or the passing of large

trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly

grip the steering wheel and slow down

immediately but gradually.

. When passing other vehicles, consid-

erable distance is required because of the

added weight and length caused by

attaching the trailer to your vehicle.

1) Left turn

2) Right turn

. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and

takes practice. When backing up with a

trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.

When turning back, grip the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand and turn it to

the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right

for a right turn.

. If the ABS warning light illuminates

while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing

the trailer and have repairs performed

immediately by the nearest SUBARU

dealer.

! Driving on grades

. Before going down a steep hill, slow

down and shift into lower gear (if neces-

sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the

engine braking effect and prevent over-

heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not

make sudden downshifts.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, the

air conditioner may turn off automatically

to protect the engine from overheating.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay

attention to the water temperature gauge

pointer and AT OIL TEMP warning light

since the engine and transmission are

relatively prone to overheating under

these conditions. If the water temperature

gauge pointer approaches the OVER-

HEAT zone or the AT OIL TEMP warning

light illuminates, immediately switch off the

air conditioner and stop the vehicle at the

nearest safe place. Refer to the “Engine

overheating” section in chapter 9, and

“Warning and indicator lights” section in

chapter 3.

NOTE

The temperature of engine coolant is

less likely to rise to the OVERHEAT

zone in the “D” position than in the

manual mode position.

. Avoid using the accelerator pedal to

stay stationary on an uphill slope instead

of using the parking brake or foot brake.

That may cause the transmission fluid to

overheat.

! Parking on a grade

Always block the wheels under both

vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply

the parking brake firmly. You should not

park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a

hill or slope cannot be avoided, you

should take the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal

down.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks

under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release the regular brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the regular brakes and then

apply the parking brake; slowly release

the regular brakes.

5. Shift into “P” and shut off the engine.

Driving tips 8-27

————————————————————————————————————————

If you park your vehicle in an emergency......... 9-2

Spare tire ............................................................. 9-2

Removing the spare tire ...................................... 9-3

Re-storage of spare tire ....................................... 9-4

Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-5

Flat tires............................................................... 9-6

Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-6

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ............ 9-11

Jump starting ..................................................... 9-12

How to jump start............................................... 9-12

Engine overheating ........................................... 9-14

If steam is coming from the engine

compartment ................................................... 9-14

If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment ................................................... 9-14

Towing ................................................................ 9-15

Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-15

Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-17

Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-18

Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be

unlocked.......................................................... 9-18

Maintenance tools ............................................. 9-19

Jack and jack handle ......................................... 9-19

In case of emergency

9-2 In case of emergency

If you park your vehicle in an

emergency

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers

when you have to park your vehicle under

emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to

safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-

vated regardless of the ignition switch

position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pushing

the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it

off by pushing the switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Spare tire

The spare tire is stored in the spare tire

holder located under the cargo area.

The spare tire holder has a hoist mechan-

ism that can lower and raise the spare tire

easily.

The spare tire holder is designed to carry

only the following kinds of tires:

. the temporary spare tire that came with

your vehicle

. a full-size flat tire

A full size flat tire should be stowed in the

spare tire holder in an emergency only.

After having the full-size flat tire repaired,

immediately swap it with the temporary

spare tire.

Before using the temporary spare tire, see

the “Temporary spare tire” section in this

chapter for instructions and precautions.

& Removing the spare tire

1. Take the wheel nut wrench and exten-

sion out of the tool bag. Refer to the

“Maintenance tools” section in this chap-

ter.

2. Remove the subfloor storage lid in the

cargo area.

3. Take out the jack.

4. Locate the hex-head hoist shaft end

inside the hole.

5. Fit the extension onto the hex-head

hoist shaft end.

6. Fit the wheel nut wrench onto the

extension.

7. Turn the hoist shaft end counterclock-

wise with the wheel nut wrench until the

temporary spare tire is on the ground with

enough cable slack to allow you to pull it

out from under the vehicle.

CAUTION

. Be sure to remove (not simply

keep it open) the subfloor sto-

rage lid before turning the wheel

nut wrench, otherwise the lid

may be damaged.

. Do not put your fingers into the

center hole of the temporary

spare tire while you pulling it

out, because they might be

pinched in between the wheel

and the retainer.

8. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable

In case of emergency 9-3

– CONTINUED –

9-4 In case of emergency

and pull it through the center of the

temporary spare tire.

9. After the temporary spare tire is

removed from the cable, the cable must

be wound up completely by turning the

hoist nut shaft clockwise until you hear a

clicking sound. Also visually inspect the

cable to make certain that there is no

longer any slack present.

WARNING

. Do not use the extension when

turning the wheel nuts. If you did,

you would not be able to achieve

sufficient tightening torque. The

wheel nuts could then come

loose, resu lting in a serious

accident.

. When using the spare tire hoist:

After the temporary spare tire is

removed from the cable, wind the

cable up completely until the

retainer at end of the cable sits

against the underside of the

vehicle. Driving with the cable

not retracted fully could result in

damage to the adjacent under

floor parts and lead to a serious

accident.

. The spare tire holder is designed

to carry only the following kinds

of tires:

. the temporary spare tire that

came with your vehicle

. a full-size flat tire

A full size flat tire should be

stowed in the spare tire holder

in an emergency only. After hav-

ing the full-size flat tire repaired,

immediatelyswapitwiththe

temporary spare tire.

Never stow a full-size tire that is

not flat in the spare tire holder.

Doing so can result in damage to

adjacent under floor parts and

can lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

When using the spare tire hoist:

Do not use air tools or power tools

to turn the spare tire hoist shaft end.

If you do, it could result in severe

mechanical damage to the spare tire

hoist.

& Re-storage of spare tire

1. Turn the spare tire hoist shaft end

counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench to loosen the cable sufficiently

enough to allow the cable end retainer go

through center hole of the temporary

spare tire.

2. Insert the retainer through the center

hole of the temporary tire (with the outside

of the tire facing up).

3. Turn the hoist shaft end clockwise with

the wheel nut wrench to wind the cable up

completely until you hear a few clicking

sounds. Confirm that the temporary spare

tire holding cable has been wound up

completely by shaking the temporary tire.

CAUTION

If the temporary spare tire is not

stored securely, it could damage

adjacent areas of the vehicle and

make an abnormal noise.

4. Place the wheel nut wrench and

extension back into the tool bag and store

the jack and tool bag in their storage

locations.

5. Fit the lid of the cargo area.

CAUTION

. When stowing a flat tire in the

spare tire holder, turn the hoist

shaft end on ly slowly. If it i s

turned quickly, the wheel disc of

the flat tire could be damaged.

. A full-size flat tire should be

stowed in the spare tire holder

in an emergency only. After hav-

ing the flat tire repaired, immedi-

ately swap it with the temporary

spare tire.

. Remember that the tread width of

a flat tire is wider than that of the

temporary spare tire. When car-

rying a flat tire stowed in the

spare tire holder, make sure the

tire does not touch any obsta-

cles.

Temporary spare tire

WARNING

. Never tow a trailer when the

temporary spare tire is used.

The temporary spare tire is not

designed to sustain the towing

load. Use of the temporary spare

tire when towing can result in

failure of the spare tire and/or

less stability of the vehicle and

may lead to an accident.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is un-

able to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for

tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

In case of emergency 9-5

– CONTINUED –

9-6 In case of emergency

CAUTION

Never use any temporary spare tire

other than the original. Using other

sizes may result in severe mechan-

ical damage to the drive train of your

vehicle.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is

designed for emergency use only. Re-

move the temporary spare tire and re-

install the conventional tire as soon as

possible because the spare tire is de-

signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem-

porary spare tire periodically to keep the

tire ready for use. The correct pressure is

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

When using the temporary spare tire, note

the following.

. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary

spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,

a tire chain will not fit properly.

. Do not use two or more temporary

spare tires at the same time.

. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire

has a smaller diameter, so road clearance

is reduced.

1) Tread wear indicator bar

2) Indicator location mark

. When the wear indicator appears on

the tread, replace the tire.

. The temporary spare tire must be used

only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire

gets punctured, replace the wheel with a

rear wheel and install the temporary spare

tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing speed.

Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

& Changing a flat tire

WARNING

. Do not jack up the vehicle on an

incline or a loose road surface.

The jack can come out of the

jacking point or sink into the

ground and this can result in a

severe accident.

. Use only the jack provided with

your vehicle. The jack supplied

with the vehicle is designed only

for changing a tire. Never get

under the vehicle while support-

ing the vehicle with this jack.

. Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground

using the jack. Never swing or

push the vehicle supported with

the jack. The jack can come out

of the jacking point due to a jolt

and this can result in a severe

accident.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-

ever possible, then stop the engine.

2. Set the parking brake securely and

shift in the “P” (Park) position.

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher

and have everyone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

7-seater models

1) Jack handle

2) Jack

3) Spare tire

5-seater models

1) Jack handle

2) Jack

3) Spare tire

5. Take out the jack and jack handle.

The jack and jack handle are stored under

the floor of the cargo area.

6. Remove the spare tire.

Refer to the sections “Spare tire” in this

chapter for its location, instructions and

precautions.

Carefully read the sectio n “Temporar y

spare tire” in this chapter and strictly

follow the instructions.

NOTE

Make sure the jack is well lubricated

before using it.

In case of emergency 9-7

– CONTINUED –

9-8 In case of emergency

Chrome plated wheels

7. Insert the tip (wrapped in vinyl tape or

a cloth) of a flat-head screwdriver into the

slot between the wheel and cap. Use it to

remove the cap. (Only vehicle equipped

with chrome plated wheels)

8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

9. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat

tire.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

10. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle

higher than necessary.

11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

tire.

12. Remove the tire cover if the temporary

spare tire has a cover.

13. Before putting the spare tire on, clean

the mounting surface of the wheel and hub

with a cloth.

14. Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the

wheel studs or nuts when the spare

tire is installed. This could cause the

nuts to become loose and lead to an

accident.

15. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.

CAUTION

There are 2 types of wheel nut

wrenches that apply to different

lengths.

For an aluminum wheel vehicle, the

11.2-inch (285 mm) wheel nut

wrench is equipped as a mainte-

nance tool. And for a chrome plated

wheel vehicle, the 13.2-inch (335

mm) wheel nut wrench is equipped

as well. Confirm the equipped wheel

nut wrench type when you replace a

tire. If the wheel nut wrench is the

different type, it cannot be tightened

to the specified torque.

1) The length of the wheel nut wrench

16. Confirm the length of the equipped

wheel nut wrench.

For an aluminum wheel vehicle, the 11.2-

inch (285 mm) wheel nut wrench is

equipped as a maintenance tool. And for

a chrome plated wheel vehicle, the 13.2-

inch (335 mm) wheel nut wrench is

equipped as well.

In case of emergency 9-9

– CONTINUED –

9-10 In case of emergency

17. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque, following the tightening order in the

illustration.

Wheel nuts tightening torque for tem-

porary spare tire:

74 to 89 lbf·ft (100 to 120 N·m, 10 to 12

kgf·m)

This torque is equivalent to applying the

following load on the edge of the wheel

nut wrench.

When you use a wheel nut wrench of

the 11.2-inch (285 mm) length:

Approximately 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50

kg)

When you use a wheel nut wrench of

the 13.2-inch (335 mm) length:

Approximately 73 to 87 lbs (33 to 38 kg)

Never use your foot on the wheel nut

wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench

because you may exceed the specified

torque. Have the wheel nut torque

checked at the nearest automotive service

facility.

WARNING

Do not use the extension when

turning the wheel nuts. If you did,

you would not be able to achieve

sufficient tightening torque. The

wheel nuts could then come loose,

resulting in a serious accident.

18. Store the flat tire in the spare tire

holder.

Refer to the “Spare tire” section in this

chapter for its location, instructions and

precautions.

CAUTION

. When stowing a flat tire in the

spare tire holder, turn the hoist

shaft end only slowly. If it is

turned quickly, the wheel disc of

the flat tire could be damaged.

. A full-size flat tire should be

stowed in the spare tire holder

in an emergency only. After hav-

ing the flat tire repaired, immedi-

ately swap it with the temporary

spare tire.

. Remember that the tread width of

a flat tire is wider than that of the

temporary spare tire. When car-

rying a flat tire stowed in the

spare tire holder, make sure the

tire does not touch any obsta-

cles.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changing

tools in the passenger compartment

after changing wheels. In a sudden

stop or collisions, loose equipment

could strike occupants and cause

injury. Store the tire and all tools in

the proper place.

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with the warning message

indicat ed by sen ding a signal from a

sensor that is installed in each wheel

when tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven.

Also, this system may not react immedi-

ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a blow-out caused running over

a sharp object).

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, never

brake suddenly and keep driving

straight ahead while gradually redu-

cing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe place. Otherwise an

accident involving serious vehicle

damage and serious personal injury

could occur.

Check the pressure for all four tires

and adjust the pressure to the COLD

tire pressure shown on the vehicle

placard on the door pillar on the

driver’s side. If this light still illumi-

nates while driving after adjusting

the tire pressure, a tire may have

significant damage and a fast leak

that causes the tire to lose air

rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace

it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction of

the tire pressure sensors.

If the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one min-

ute, promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

In case of emergency 9-11

9-12 In case of emergency

Jump starting

WARNING

. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.

Do not let it come in contact with

the eyes, skin, clothing or the

vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you,

thoroughly flush the exposed

area with water immediately. Get

medical help if the fluid has

entered your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and obta in immediate medical

help.

Keep everyone including chil-

dren away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a battery

explodes if a flame or spark is

brought near it. Do not smoke or

light a match while jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if the

discharged battery is frozen. It

could cause the battery to burst

or explode.

. Whenever working on or around

a battery, always wear suitable

eye protectors, and remove metal

objects such as rings, bands or

other metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables and

clamps on them do not ha ve

loose or missing insulation.

Do not jump start unless cables

in suitable condition are avail-

able.

. A running engine can be danger-

ous. Keep your fingers, hands,

clothing, hair and tools away

from the cooling fan, belts and

any other moving engine parts.

Removing rings, watches and

ties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if it is

done incorrectly. If you are un-

sure about the proper procedure

for jump starting, consult a com-

petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle

may be jump started by connecting your

battery to another battery (called the

booster battery) with jumper cables.

& How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

volts and the negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and

accessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated.

(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the discharged

battery.

(2) Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the positive (+) term-

inal of the booster battery.

(3) Connect one end of th e other

cable to the negative (−) terminal of

the booster battery.

(4) Connect the other end of the cable

to the strut mounting nut.

Make sure that the cables are not near

any moving parts and that the cable

clamps are not in contact with any other

metal.

In case of emergency 9-13

– CONTINUED –

9-14 In case of emergency

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle

that has the discharged battery.

6. When finished, carefully disconnect

the cables in exactly the reverse order.

Engine overheating

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has fully cooled down.

When the engine is hot, the coolant

is under pressure. Removing the

cap whil e the engin e is still hot

could release a spray of boiling hot

coolant, which could burn you very

seriously.

If the engine overheats, safely pull off the

road and stop the vehicle in a safe place.

& If steam is coming from the

engine compartment

Turn off the engine and get everyone

away from the vehicle until it cools down.

& If no steam is coming from

the engine compartment

1. Keep the eng ine running at idling

speed.

2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine

compartment.

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If

the fan is not turning, immediately turn off

the engine and contact your authorized

dealer for repair.

3. After the engine coolant temperature

has dropped, turn off the engine.

If the temperature gauge stays at the

overheated zone, turn off the engine.

4. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve

tank.

If the coolant level is below the “LOW”

mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.

5. If there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.

Then remove the radiator cap and fill the

radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot

radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the

radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has been

fully released, remove the cap by pressing

down and turning it.

Towing

WARNING

Never tow AWD vehicles with the

front wheels raised off the ground

while the rear wheels are on the

ground, or with the rear wheels

raised off the ground while the front

wheels are on the ground. This will

cause the vehicle to spin away due

to the operation or deterioration of

the center differential.

If towing is necessary, it is best done by

your SUBARU dealer or a commercial

towing service. Observe the following

procedures for safety.

& Towing and tie-down hooks

The towing hooks should be used only in

an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle

from mud, sand or snow).

CAUTION

. Use only the specified towing

hooks and tie-down hooks. Never

use suspension parts or other

parts of the body for towing or

tie-down purposes.

. Never use the tie-down hook

closest to the muffler under the

vehicle for towing purposes.

. To prevent deformation to the

bumper and the towing hook, do

not apply excessive lateral load

to the towing hooks.

Front towing hook:

1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver

and wheel nut wrench from the tool bag.

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver in vinyl

tape or cloth, insert it into the gap between

the cover and the front bumper, and use it

to pry the cover open.

NOTE

. The cover is attached to the front

bumper with five lugs.

. Do not remove the cover while

holding the slit.

In case of emergency 9-15

– CONTINUED –

9-16 In case of emergency

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until the threads can no longer be

seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using a jack handle.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. D o not use the towing hook

except when towing your vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the SRS airbag

system in a frontal collision.

Rear towing hook:

1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver

and wheel nut wrench from the on board

tool bag.

2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper

using a screwdriver, and you will find a

threaded hole for attaching the towing

hook.

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using a wheel nut wrench.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag.

Put the thread hole cover on the rear

bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hook

except when towing your vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the SRS airbag

system in a frontal collision.

Front tie-down hooks:

The front tie-down hooks are located

between each of the front tires and the

front bumper.

Rear tie-down hooks:

The rear tie-down hooks are located near

each of the jack-up reinforcements.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down hooks only for

downward anchoring. If they are

used to anchor the vehicle in any

other direction, cables may slip off

the hooks, possibly causing a dan-

gerous situation.

& Using a flat-bed truck

This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to

ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the selector lever into the “P”

position.

2. Press the parking brake pedal firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

properly with safety chains. Each safety

chain should be equally tightened and

care must be taken not to pull the chains

so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

In case of emergency 9-17

– CONTINUED –

9-18 In case of emergency

& Towing with all wheels on the

ground

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK” position while the

vehicle is being towed because

the steering wheel and the direc-

tion of the wheels will be locked.

. Remember that the brake booster

and power steering do not func-

tion when the engine is no t

running. Because the engine is

turned off, it will take greater

effort to operate the brake pedal

and steering wheel.

CAUTION

. If transmission failure occurs,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

. Do not run the engine while being

towed using this method. Trans-

mission damage could result if

the vehicle is towed with the

engine running.

. The traveling speed must be

limited to less than 20 mph (30

km/h) and the traveling distance

to less than 31 miles (50 km). For

greater speeds and distances,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

1. Check the transmission and differen-

tial oil levels and add oil to bring it to the

upper level if necessary.

2. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in neutral.

3. The ignition switch should be in the

“Acc” position while the vehicle is being

towed.

4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to

prevent damage to the vehicle.

Rear gate – if the rear gate

cannot be unlocked

In the event that you cannot unlock the

rear gate by operating the power door

locking switches or the remote keyless

entry system, you can unlock it from inside

the cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom-center of the rear gate trim using

flat-head screwdriver.

2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever

behind the rear gate trim panel.

3. Unlock the rear gate by moving the

lever to the right.

4. Open the rear gate from outside by

raising the rear gate handle.

Maintenance tools

Your vehicle is equipped with the following

maintenance tools:

Screwdriver

Towing hook (eye bolt)

Wheel nut wrench

Extension

& Jack and jack handle

7-seater models

5-seater models

The jack and jack handle is stored under

the cargo area.

In case of emergency 9-19

– CONTINUED –

9-20 In case of emergency

For how to use the jack, refer to the “Flat

tires” section in this chapter.

Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2

Washing............................................................. 10-2

Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3

Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3

Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4

Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4

To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4

Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5

Seat fabric ......................................................... 10-5

Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5

Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5

Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument

panel, console panel, switches, combination

meter, and other plastic surface ....................... 10-5

Navigation monitor (if equipped) ........................ 10-6

Appearance care

10-2 Appearance care

Exterior care

& Washing

CAUTION

. When washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result,

the brake stopping distance will

be longer. To dry the brakes,

drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly pressing the brake

pedal to heat up the brakes.

. Do not wash the engine compart-

ment and areas adjacent to it. If

water enters the engine air in-

take, electrical parts or the power

steering fluid reservoir, it w ill

cause engine trouble or a mal-

function of the power steering.

. Since your vehicle is equipped

with a rear wiper, automatic car-

wash brushes could become

tangled around it, damaging the

wiper arm and other compo-

nents. Ask the automatic car-

wash operator not to let the

brushes touch the wiper arm or

to fix the wiper arm on the rear

window glass with adhesive tape

before operating the machine.

NOTE

When having your vehicle washed in

an automatic car wash, make sure

beforehand that the car was h is of

suitable type.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s

beauty is frequent washing. Wash the

vehicle at least once a month to avoid

contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash

the vehicle with hot water and in direct

sunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree

sap, and bird droppings should be washed

off by using a light detergent, as required.

If you use a light detergent, make certain

that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use

strong soap or chemical detergents. All

cleaning agents should be promptly

flushed from the surface and not allowed

to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly

with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the

remaining water off with a chamois or soft

cloth.

! Washing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for

deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-

rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-

derbody components, such as the exhaust

system, fuel and brake lines, brake

cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-

pension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-

side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold

water at frequent intervals to reduce the

harmful effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody

components may accelerate their corro-

sion.

After driving off-road or muddy or sandy

roads, wash the mud and sand off the

underbody.

Carefully flush the suspension and axle

parts, as they are particularly prone to

mud and sand buildup. Do not use a

sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

NOTE

Be careful not to damage brake hoses,

sensor harnesses, and other parts

when washing suspension compo-

nents.

! Using a warm water washer

. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)

or more between the washer nozzle and

the vehicle.

. Do not wash the same area continu-

ously.

. If a stain will not come out easily, wash

by hand. Some warm water washers are

of the high temperature, high pressure

type, and they can damage or deform the

resin parts such as mouldings, or cause

water to leak into the vehicle.

& Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and

apply them according to the manufac-

turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when

the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,

as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of

wax on a painted surface leads to loss of

the original luster and also quickens the

deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied at

least once a month, or whenever the

surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-

ished to the point where the luster or tone

cannot be restored, lightly polish the

surface with a fine-graine d compound.

Never polish just the affected area, but

include the surrounding area as well.

Always polish in only one direction. A

No. 2000 grain compound is recom-

mended. Never use a coarse-grained

compound. Coarser grained compounds

have a smaller grain-size number and

could damage the paint. After polishing

with a compound, coat with wax to restore

the original luster. Frequent polishing with

acompoundoranincorrectpolishing

technique will result in removing the paint

layer and exposing the undercoat. When

in doubt, it is always best to contact your

SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-

list.

NOTE

Be careful not to block the windshield

washer nozzles with wax when waxing

the vehicle.

& Cleaning aluminum wheels

. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels

clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt

is left on too long, it may be difficult to

clean off.

. Do not use soap containing grit to

clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral

cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly

with water. Do not clean the wheels with a

stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed

washing device.

. Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-

num wheels) with water a s soon as

possible when it has been splashed with

sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or

driven on roads treated with salt or other

agents.

Appearance care 10-3

10-4 Appearance care

Corrosion protection

Your SUBARU has been designed and

built to resist corrosion. Special materials

and protective finishes have been used on

most parts of the vehicle to help maintain

fine appearance, strength, and reliable

operation.

& Most common causes of

corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion

are:

1. The accumulation of moisture retain-

ing dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

2. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

when:

1. It is exposed to road salt or dust

control chemicals, or used in coastal

areas where there is more salt in the air,

or in areas where there is considerable

industrial pollution.

2. It is driven in areas of high humidity,

especially when temperatures range just

above freezing.

3. Dampness in certain parts of the

vehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may be

dry.

4. High temperatures will cause corro-

sion to parts of the vehicle which cannot

dry quickly due to lack of proper ventila-

tion.

& To help prevent corrosion

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent

corrosion of the body and suspension

components. Also, wash the vehicle

promptly after driving o n any of t he

following surfaces:

. roads that have been salted to prevent

them from freezing in winter

. mud, sand, or gravel

. coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-

mended that the underbody be given a

very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the

condition of underbody components, such

as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, suspension, steering

system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of

them are found to be rusted, they should

be given an appropriate rust prevention

treatment or should be replaced. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

of maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water

and dirt accumulation under the floor mats

because that could cause corrosion.

Occasionally check under the mats to

make sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your

vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated

garage. In such a garage, corrosion can

be caused by dampness. If you wash the

vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle

into the garage when wet or covered with

snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather

and/or in areas where road salts and other

corrosive materials are used, the door

hinges and locks, and hood latch should

be inspected and lubricated periodically.

Cleaning the interior

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use

organic solvents.)

& Seat fabric

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a

vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the

fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum

cleaner, use a soft blush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface with a tight ly

wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric

thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe

using a solution of mild soap and luke-

warm water then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a

commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use

the cleaner on a hidden place and make

sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.

Use the cleaner according to its instruc-

tions.

NOTE

When cleaning the seat, do not use

benzine, paint thinner, or any similar

materials.

& Leather seat materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the

surface can cause the material to become

brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular

cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber

cloth should be performed monthly, taking

care not to soak the leather or allow water

to penetrate the stitched seams.

A mild detergent suitable for cleaning

woolen fabrics may be used to remove

difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry

cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If

your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended

that the seats and headrests be covered,

or the windows shaded, to prevent fading

or shrinkage.

Minor surface blemishes or bald patches

may be treated with a commercial leather

spray lacquer. You will discover that each

leather seat section will develop soft folds

or wrin kles, which is characteristic of

genuine leather.

& Synthetic leather upholstery

The synthetic leather material used on the

SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-

ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the

soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial

foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic

leather materials may be used when

necessary.

NOTE

Strong cleaning agents such as sol-

vents, paint thinners, window cleaner

or gasoline must never be used on

leather or synthetic interior materials.

& Climate control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel,

console panel, switches,

combination meter, and other

plastic surface

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches.

NOTE

Do not use organic solvents such as

paint thinners or gasoline, or strong

cleaning agen ts that c ontain thos e

solvents.

Appearance care 10-5

– CONTINUED –

10-6 Appearance care

& Navigation monitor (if

equipped)

To clean the navigation monitor, wipe it

with a silicone cloth or with a soft cloth. If

the navigation monitor is extremely dirty,

clean it with a soft cloth moistened with

neutral detergent then carefully wipe off

any remaining detergent.

NOTE

. Do not spray neutral detergent di-

rectly onto the monitor. Doing so could

damage the monitor’s components.

. Do not wipe the monitor with a hard

cloth. Doing so could scratch the

monitor.

. Do not use cleaning fluid that con-

tains thinner, gasoline, or any other

volatile substance. Such cleaning fluid

could erase the let tering on the

switches at the bottom of the monitor.

Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3

Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3

Before checking or servicing in the engine

compartment.................................................... 11-4

When you do checking or servicing in the engine

compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-4

Engine hood ....................................................... 11-4

Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-6

Engine oil............................................................ 11-7

Checking the oil level ......................................... 11-7

Changing the oil and oil filter.............................. 11-8

Recommended grade and viscosity .................... 11-9

Recommended grade and viscosity under severe

driving conditions .......................................... 11-10

Cooling system ................................................ 11-11

Hose and connections...................................... 11-11

Engine coolant ................................................. 11-11

Air cleane r element .......................................... 11-14

Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-14

Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-15

Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-15

Drive belts ........................................................ 11-15

Automatic transmission fluid .......................... 11-15

Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-15

Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-16

Front differential gear oil ................................. 11-17

Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-17

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-17

Rear differential gear oil .................................. 11-18

Checking the gear oil level ............................... 11-18

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-18

Power stee ring fluid ........................................ 11-19

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-19

Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-20

Brake fluid........................................................ 11-20

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-20

Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-21

Brake booster .................................................. 11-21

Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-21

Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-21

Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-22

Replacement of brake pad and lining ............ 11-22

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-22

Parking brake stroke ....................................... 11-23

Tires and wheels.............................................. 11-23

Types of tires................................................... 11-23

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) .......... 11-24

Tire inspection................................................. 11-25

Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-25

Wheel balance ................................................. 11-27

Wear indicators ............................................... 11-28

Tire rotation direction mark.............................. 11-28

Tire rotation..................................................... 11-28

Tire replacement.............................................. 11-29

Wheel replacement .......................................... 11-29

Aluminum wheels ............................................ 11-30

Chrome plated wheels (if equipped) .............. 11-31

Windshield washer fluid.................................. 11-32

Replacement of wiper blades ......................... 11-33

Windshield wiper blade assembly..................... 11-33

Maintenance and service

Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-34

Rear window wiper blade assembly .................. 11-35

Rear window wiper blade rubber....................... 11-35

Battery. .............................................................. 11-37

Fuses ................................................................ 11-38

Main fuse .......................................................... 11-39

Installation of accessories............................... 11-40

Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-41

Headlights (vehicles with HID headlights).......... 11-42

Headlights (vehicles without HID

headlights) ..................................................... 11-43

Parking light (right-hand side)........................... 11-44

Front turn signal light (right-hand side) ............ 11-45

Front fog light.................................................. 11-45

Rear combination lights ................................... 11-46

Back-up light/Tail light ..................................... 11-47

Rear gate light ................................................. 11-47

License plate light ........................................... 11-47

Dome light....................................................... 11-48

Map light ......................................................... 11-49

Vanity mirror light ............................................ 11-49

Door step light................................................. 11-50

Cargo area light ............................................... 11-50

Maintenance schedule

The scheduled main tenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”.

For details of your maintenance schedule,

read the separate “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”.

Maintenance precautions

When maintenance and service are re-

quired, it is recommended that all work be

done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service

by yourself, you should familiarize yourself

with the information provided in this

section on general maintenance and

service for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-

tion. Any problems caused by improper

maintenance and service performed by

you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

. Testing of an All-W heel Drive

vehicle must NEVER be per-

formed on a single two-wheel

dynamometer or similar appara-

tus. Attempting to do so will

result in transmission damage

and in uncontrolled vehicle

movement and may cause an

accident or injuries to persons

nearby.

. Always select a safe area when

performing maintenance on your

vehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehi-

cle. Remember that some of the

materials in the vehicle may be

hazardous if improperly used or

handled, for example, battery

acid.

. Your vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent

to do so. Serious personal injury

may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.

. Always use the proper tools and

make certain that they are well

maintained.

. Never get under the vehicle sup-

ported only by a jack. Always use

a safety stands to support the

vehicle.

. Never keep the engine running in

a poorly ventilated area, such as

a garage or other closed areas.

. Do not smoke or allow open

flames around the fuel or battery.

This will cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is under

pressure, replacement of the fuel

filter should be performed only

by your SUBARU dealer.

. Wear adequate eye protection to

Maintenance and service 11-3

– CONTINUED –

11-4 Maintenance and service

guard against getting oil or fluids

in your eyes. If something does

get in your eyes, thoroughly

wash them out with clean water.

. Do not tamper with the wiring of

the SRS airbag system or seat-

belt pretensioner system, or at-

tempt to take its connectors

apart, as that may activate the

system or it can render it inop-

erative. The wiring and connec-

tors of these systems are yellow

for easy identification. NEVER

use a circuit tester for these

wiring.

If your SRS airbag or seatbelt

pretensioner needs service, con-

sult your nearest SUBARU deal-

er.

& Before checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

WARNING

. Always stop the engine and set

the parking brake firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving.

. Always let the engine cool down.

Engine parts become very hot

when the engine is running and

remain hot for some time after

the engine is stopped.

. Do not spill engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.

This may cause a fire.

. Always remove the key from the

ignition switch. When the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position,

thecoolingfanmayoperate

suddenly even when the engine

is stopped.

& When you do checking or

servicing in the engine com-

partment while the engine is

running

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.

Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from the cooling

fan, belts and any other moving

engine parts. Removing rings,

watches and ties is advisable.

Engine hood

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their original

positions.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

instrument panel.

3. Release the secondary hood release

located under the front grille by moving the

lever toward the left.

4. Lift up the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Lower the hood to a point approxi-

mately 20 in (50 cm) from the closed

position and then give the hood a strong

push down to make it drop.

2. After closing the hood, be sure the

hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position. Do not push

the hood forci bly to close it. It could

deform the metal.

WARNING

Always ch eck that the hood is

properly loc ked before you start

driving. If it is not, it might fly open

while the vehicle is moving and

block your view, which may cause

an accident and serious bodily in-

jury.

CAUTION

When closing the hood, be careful

not to pinch your or other person’s

hands or anything else in the hood.

Maintenance and service 11-5

11-6 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment overview

1) Air cleaner element (page 11-14)

2) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-19)

3) Differential gear oil level gauge

(page 11-17)

4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge

(page 11-15)

5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-20)

6) Fuse box (page 11-38)

7) Battery (page 11-37)

8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-32)

9) Radiator cap (page 11-11)

10) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-7)

11) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-11)

12) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-7)

Engine oil

NOTE

. The engine oil consumption rate is

not stabilized, and therefore cannot be

determined until the vehicle has tra-

veled at least several thousand miles

(kilometers). Even after break-in, when

the vehicle is used under severe driv-

ing conditions such as those men-

tioned in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Book let ”, engine oil is con-

sumed or deteriorated more quickly

than under normal driving conditions.

If you drive your vehicle under these

severe conditions, you should check

the oil level at least at every second

fuel fill-up time, and change the oil

more frequently. Please refer to the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”

for more details.

. If the oil consumption rate seems

abnormally high after the break-in

period, for example more than 1 quart

per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000

kilometers, we recommend that you

contact your SUBARU dealer.

& Checking the oil level

Check the engine oil level at each fuel

stop.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,

and insert it again.

3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly

inserted until it stops with the graphic

symbol “

” on its top appearing as

shown in the illustration.

1) Upper level

2) Lower level

4. Pull out the level gauge again and

check the oil level on it. If it is below the

lower level, add oil to bring the level up to

the upper level.

CAUTION

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

Maintenance and service 11-7

– CONTINUED –

11-8 Maintenance and service

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

If you check the oil level just after stopping

the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan before checking

the level.

To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not

add any additional oil above the upper

level when the engine is cold.

& Changing the oil and oil filter

Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

The engine o il and oi l filter must be

changed more frequently than listed in

the maintenance schedule when driving

on dusty roads, when short trips are

frequently made, or when driving in

extremely cold whether.

1. Warm up the engine by letting the

engine idle for approximately 10 minutes

to ease draining the engine oil.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

3. Remove the oil filler cap.

4. Drain out the engine oil by removing

the drain plug while the engine is still

warm. The used oil should be drained into

an appropriate container and disposed of

properly.

WARNING

Be careful not to burn yourself with

hot engine oil.

5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain

plug with a clean cloth and tighten it

securely with a new sealing washer after

the oil has completely drained out.

6. Open the access cover by removing

the five clips and turning the access cover

counterclockwise. The oil filter will be

exposed.

7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter

wrench.

8. Clean the rubber seal seating area of

the bottom of engine and install the oil

filter by hand turning. Be careful not to

twist or damage the seal.

9. Tighten the oil filter by the amount

indicated in the following table after the

seal makes contact with the bottom of

engine.

Oil filter color Part number

Amount of ro-

tation

Black 15208AA031

3/4 rotation

CAUTION

. Never over tighten the oil filter

because that can result in an oil

leak.

. Thoroughly wipe off any engine

oil that has spil led over the

exhaust pipe and/or under-cover.

If left unremoved, the oil could

catch fire.

10. Reinstall the cover under the oil filter.

11. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.

Oil capacity (guideline):

6.7 US qt (6.3 liters, 5.5 Imp qt)

The oil quantity indicated above is only a

guideline. The necessary quantity of oil

depends on the quantity of oil that has

been drained. The quantity of drained oil

differs slightly depending on the tempera-

ture of the oil and the time the oil is left

flowing out. After refilling the engine with

oil, therefore, you must use the level

gauge to confirm that the level is correct.

12. Start the engine and make sure that no

oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber

seal and drain plug.

13. Run the engine until it reaches the

normal operating temperature. Then stop

the engine and wait a few minutes to allow

the oil drain back. Check the oil level

again and if necessary, add more engine

oil.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-

mended grade and viscosity.

Oil grade:

ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified with

the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst

mark)

or API classification SM with the words

“ENERGY CONSERVING”

These recommended oil grades can be

identified by looking for either or both of

the following marks displayed on the oil

container.

ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)

Maintenance and service

11-9

– CONTINUED –

11-10 Maintenance and service

API Service label

1) Indicates the oil quality by API designa-

tions

2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade

3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving

capabilities

In choosing an oil, you want the proper

quality and viscosity, as well as one that

will add to fuel economy. The following

table lists the recommended viscosities

and applicable temperatures.

When adding oil, different brands may be

used together as long as they are the

same API classification and SAE viscosity

as those recommended by SUBARU.

SAE viscosity number and applicable

temperature

*: 5W-30 is recommended.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel

economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide

better fuel economy. However, in hot

weather, oil of higher viscosity is required

to properly lubricate the engine.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity under severe driv-

ing conditions

If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in

areas with very high temperatures, or

used for heavy-duty applications such as

towing a trailer, use of oil with the following

grade and viscosities is recommended.

API classification SM (or SL):

SAE viscosity No.:

30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50

Cooling system

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off an d has cooled down

completely. Since the coolant is

under pressure, you may suffer

serious burns from a spray of boil-

ing hot coolant when the cap is

removed.

CAUTION

. Vehicles are filled at the factory

with SUBARU Super Coolant that

does not require the first change

for 11 years/137,500 miles (11

years/220,000 km). This coolant

should not be mixed with any

other brand or type of coolant

during this period. Mixing with a

different coolant will reduce the

life of the coolant. Should it be

necessary to top off the coolant

for any reason, use only

SUBARU Super Coolant.

If the SUBARU Super Coolant is

diluted with another brand or

type, the maintenance interval is

shortened to that of the mixing

coolant.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

& Hose and connections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling

fan which is thermostatically controlled to

operate when the engine coolant reaches

a specific temperature.

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate

even when the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge exceeds the normal operating

range, the cooling fan circuit may be

defective. Check the fuse and replace it

if necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have

the cooling system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is neces-

sary, there may be a leak in the engine

cooling system. It is recommended that

the cooling system and connections be

checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.

& Engine coolant

! Checking the coolant level

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the

“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is

empty, remove the radiator cap and refill

as required.

Maintenance and service 11-11

– CONTINUED –

11-12 Maintenance and service

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the caps and check that

the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap

are in the proper position.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill engine

coolant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

! Changing the coolant

Always add genuine SUBARU cooling

system conditioner whenever the coolant

is replaced.

Change the engine coolant and add

genuine SUBARU cooling system condi-

tioner using the following procedures

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”.

1. Remove the under cover.

2. Place a proper container under the

drain plug and loosen the drain plug.

3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the

coolant from the radiator. Then drain the

coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the

drain plug securely.

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has cooled d own

completely. Since the coolant is

under pressure, you may suffer

serious burns from a spray of boil-

ing hot coolant when the cap is

removed.

4. Install the under cover.

1) Fill up to here

5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to

just below the filler neck, allowing enough

room to add genuine SUBARU cooling

system conditioner in the radiator. Add

genuine SUBARU cooling system condi-

tioner until the coolant level reaches the

filler neck. Do not pour the coolant too

quickly, as this may lead to insufficient air

bleeding and trapped air in the system.

Coolant capacity (guideline):

8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill engine

coolant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

1) “FULL” level mark

6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reser-

voir tank’s “FULL” level mark.

7. Put the rad iator cap back on and

tighten firmly. At this time, make sure that

the rubber gasket in the radiator cap is

correctly in place.

8. Start and run the engine for more than

5 minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm.

9. Stop the engine and wait until the

coolant cools down (122 to 1408F [50 to

608C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add

coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and to

the reserve tank’s “FULL” level.

10. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap

back on and tighten firmly.

Maintenance and service 11-13

11-14 Maintenance and service

Air cleaner element

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the

air cleaner element removed. The air

cleaner element not only filters

intake air but also stops flames if

the engine backfires. If the air

cleaner element is not i nstalled

when the engine backfires, you

could be burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment, use a genuine SUBARU air

cleaner element. If it is not used,

there is the possibility of causing a

negative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a

filter screen. When the element is perfo-

rated or removed, engine wear will be

excessive and engine life shortened.

The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is

unnecessary to clean or wash the ele-

ment.

& Replacing the air cleaner

element

Replace the air cleaner element according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” . Un-

der extremely dusty conditions, replace it

more frequently. It is recommended that

you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air

cleaner case cover.

2. Open the air cleaner case cover and

remove the air cleaner element.

3. Install a new air cleaner element.

4. To install the air cleaner case cover,

snap the two clamps on the air cleaner

case cover.

Spark plugs

It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have

the spark plugs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”.

& Recommended spark plugs

SILFR6A (NGK)

Drive belts

The alternator, power steering pump, and

air conditioner compresso r depend on

drive belts. Satisfactory performance re-

quires that belt tension be correct.

It is unnecessary to check belt tension

periodically because your engine is

equipped with an automatic belt tension

adjuster. However, replacement of the belt

should be done according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for replacement.

If a belt is loose, cracked, or worn, contact

your SUBARU dealer.

Automatic transmission fluid

& Checking the fluid level

The automatic transmission fluid expands

largely as its temperature rises; the fluid

level differs according to fluid temperature.

Therefore, there are two different scales

for checking the level of hot fluid and cold

fluid on the level gauge.

Though the fluid level can be checked

without warming up the fluid on the

“COLD” range, we recommend checking

the fluid level when the fluid is at operating

temperature.

! Checking the fluid level when the

fluid is hot

Check the fluid level monthly.

1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise

the temperature of the transmission fluid

up to normal operating temperature; 158

to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

set the parking brake.

3. First shift the selector lever in each

position. Then shift it in the “P” position,

and run the engine at idling speed.

Maintenance and service 11-15

– CONTINUED –

11-16 Maintenance and service

1) Yellow handle

1) HOT range

2) COLD range

3) Upper level

4) Lower level

4. Pull out the level gauge and check the

fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the

lower level on the “HOT” range, add the

recommended automatic transmission

fluid up to the upper level.

! Checking the fluid level when the

fluid is cold

When the fluid level has to be checked

without time to warm up the automatic

transmission, check to see that the fluid

level is between the lower level and upper

level on the “COLD” range. If it is below

that range, add fluid up to the upper level.

Be careful not to overfill.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill au tomatic

transmission fluid when adding it.

If automatic transmission fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a

fire. If automatic transmission fluid

gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to

wipe it off.

& Recommended fluid

Use one of the following types of auto-

matic transmission fluid.

Genuine SUBARU Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid Type-HP

IDEMITSU ATF HP

Castrol Transmax J

NOTE

Using any non-specified type of auto-

matic transmission fluid could result in

damage inside the transmission. When

replacing the automatic transmission

fluid, be sure to use a fluid of the types

specified above.

Front differential gear oil

& Checking the oil level

1) Yellow handle

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,

and insert it again.

1) Upper level

2) Lower level

3. Pull out the level gauge again and

check the oil level on it. If it is below the

lower level, add oil to bring the level up to

the upper level.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill front differ-

ential gear oil when adding it. If oil

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a

fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,

be sure to wipe it off.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-

ture

Maintenance and service

11-17

11-18 Maintenance and service

Rear differential gear oil

& Checking the gear oil level

Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear

differential protector. The differential pro-

tector provides protection to the rear

differential assembly during off-road use.

Removal of the rear differential protector is

not required when checking the oil level.

1) Filler plug

2) Drain plug

1) Filler hole

2) Drain hole

3) Oil level

Remove the plug from the filler hole and

check the oil level. The oil level should be

kept even with the bottom of the filler hole.

If the oil level is below the bottom edge of

the hole, add oil through the filler hole to

raise the level.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill rear differ-

ential gear oil when adding it. If

rear differential gear oil touches

the exhaust pipe, it may cause a

bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

rear differential gear oil gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be an oil leak.

If you suspect a problem, have

the v ehicle checked at your

SUBARU dealer.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-

ture

Power steering fluid

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

Be careful not to burn yourself

because the fluid may be hot.

CAUTION

. When power steering fluid is

being added, use only clean fluid,

and be careful not to allow any

dirt into the tank. And never use

different brands together.

. Avoid spilling fluid when adding

it in the tank.

. Be care ful not to spill power

steering fluid when adding it. If

power steering fluid touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

power steering fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

The power steering fluid expands greatly

as its temperature rises; the fluid level

differs acc ording t o flui d tem pera ture.

Therefore, the reservoir tank has two

different checking ranges for hot and cold

fluids.

Check the power steering fluid level

monthly.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface,

and stop the engine.

2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir

tank.

When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has

been run: Check that the oil level is

between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on

the surface of the reservoir tank.

When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is

run: Check that the oil level is between

“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the

surface of the reservoir tank.

3. If the fluid level is lower than the

applicab le “MIN” line, add the recom-

Maintenance and service 11-19

– CONTINUED –

11-20 Maintenance and service

mended fluid as necessary to bring the

level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.

If the fluid level is extreme low, it may

indicate possible leakage. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for inspection.

& Recommended fluid

Use one of the following types of auto-

matic transmission fluid.

Genuine SUBARU Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid Type-HP

“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid

Brake fluid

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

. Never let brake fluid contact your

eyes because brake fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If brake

fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-

ately flush them thoroughly with

clean water. For safety, when

performing this work, wearing

eye protection is advisable.

. Brake fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause a dangerous loss

of braking performance.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

CAUTION

. Never use different brands of

brake fluid together. Also, avoid

mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake

fluids even if they are of the same

brand.

. When adding brake fluid, be care-

ful not to allow any dirt into the

reservoir.

. Never splash the brake fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the brake

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill brake fluid

when adding it. If brake fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If brake fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add

the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.

Use only brake fluid from a sealed

container.

& Recommended brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake

fluid

Brake booster

If the brake booster does not operate as

described in the following, have it checked

by your SUBARU dealer.

1. With the engine off, depress the brake

pedal several times, applying the same

pedal force each time. The distance the

pedal travels should not vary.

2. With the brake pedal depressed, start

the en gine. Th e pedal should move

slightly down to the floor.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop

the engine and keep the pedal depressed

for 30 seconds. The pedal height should

not change.

4. Start the engine again and run for

approximately 1 minute then turn it off.

Depress the brake pedal several times to

check the brake booster. The brake

booster operates prope rly if the pedal

stroke decreases with each depression.

Brake pedal

Check the brake peda l f ree play and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

& Checking the brake pedal

free play

1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm)

Stop the engine and firmly depress the

brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the

brake pedal up with one finger to check

the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf

(10 N, 1 kgf).

If the free play is not within proper

specification, contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

Maintenance and service 11-21

– CONTINUED –

11-22 Maintenance and service

& Checking the brake pedal

reserve distance

1) More than 2.16 in (55 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-

mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure

the distance between the upper surface of

the pedal pad and the floor.

When the measurement is smaller than

the specification, or when the pedal does

not operate smoothly, contact with your

SUBARU dealer.

Replacement of brake pad

and lining

CAUTION

If you continue to drive despite the

scraping noise from the audible

brake pad wear indicator, it will

result in the need for costly brake

rotor repair or replacement.

The front disc brake and the right rear disc

brake have audible wear indicators on the

brake pads. If the brake pads wear close

to their service limit, the wear indicator

makes a very audible scraping noise

when the brake pedal is applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake

pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

& Breaking-in of new brake

pads and linings

When replacing the brake pad or lining,

use only genuine SUBARU parts. After

replacement, the new parts must be

broken in as follows:

! Brake pad and lining

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40

mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake

pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more

times.

! Parking brake lining

WARNING

A safe location and situation should

be selected for break-in driving.

CAUTION

Pressing the parking brake pedal

too forcefully may cause the rear

wheels to lock. To avoid this, be

certain to press the pedal slowly

and gently.

1.Drivethevehicleataspeedof

approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).

2. Depress the parking brake pedal

SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pressing with a

force of approximately 34 lbf [150 N, 15

kgf].)

3. Drive the vehicle for approximately

220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.

4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking

brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-

dure.

5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the

parking brake stroke is out of the specified

range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut

located on the parking brake pedal.

Parking brake stroke:

5 – 6 notches / 67 lbf (300 N, 30 kgf)

Parking brake stroke

Check the parking brake stroke according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Boo klet”.

When the parking brake is properly

adjusted, braking power is fully applied

by depressing the pedal five to six notches

gently but firmly (approximately 67 lbf, 300

N, 30 kgf). If the parking brake pedal

stroke is not within the specified range,

have the brake system checked and

adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.

Tires and wheels

& Types of tires

You should be familiar with type of tires

present on your vehicle.

! All season tires

The factory-installed tires on your new

vehicle are all season tires.

All season tires are designed to provide

an adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving including snowy and icy road

conditions. However all season tires do

not offer as much traction performance as

winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow

or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL

SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on

the tire sidewall.

! Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capability

tires best suited for highway driving under

dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving

on slippery roads such as on snow-

covered or icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered

or icy roads, we strongly recommend the

use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to

Maintenance and service 11-23

– CONTINUED –

11-24 Maintenance and service

replace all four tires.

! Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving on

snow-covered and icy roads. However

winter tires do not perform as well as

summer tires and all season tires on roads

other than snow-covered and icy roads.

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-

ing system will activate only when the

vehicle is driven. Also, this system may

not react immediately to a sudden drop in

tire pressure (f or example, a blow-out

caused by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm

garage and will then drive the vehicle in

cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire

pressures may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. To avoid this

problem when adjusting the tire pressures

in a warm garage, inflate the tires to

pressures higher than those shown on the

tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an

extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm

) for

every difference of 108F (5.68C) between

the temperature in the garage and the

temperature outside. By way of example,

the following table shows the required tire

pressures that correspond to various out-

side temperatures when the temperature

in the garage is 608F (15.68C).

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

front

rear

308F(−18C)

36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

108F(−128C)

(265, 2.65)

(255, 2.55)

−108F

(−238C)

40 (280, 2.8)

39 (270, 2.7)

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates when you drive the vehicle in

cold outside air after adjusting the tire

pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the

tire pressures using the method described

above. Then, increase the vehicle speed

to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to

see that the low tire pressure warning light

turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire

pressure warning light does not turn off,

the tire pressure monitoring system may

not be functioning normally. In this event,

go to a SUBARU dealer to have the

system inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-

tween tires and the road surface causes

the tires to warm up. After illumination of

the low tire pressure warning light, any

increase in the tire pressures caused by

an increase in the outside air temperature

or by an increase in the temperature in the

tires can cause the low tire pressure

warning light to turn off.

System resetting is necessary when the

wheels are changed (for example, a

switch to snow tir es) and new TPMS

valves are installed on the newly fitted

wheels. Have this work performed by a

SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-

ment.

It may not be possible to install TPMS

valves on certain wheels that are on the

market. Therefore, if you change the

wheels (for example, a switch to snow

tires), use wheels that have the same part

number as the standard-equipment

wheels. Without four operational TPMS

valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS

will not fully function and the warning light

in the instrument panel will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approximately

one minute.

When a tire is replaced, adjustments are

necessary to ensure continued normal

operation of the tire pressure monitoring

system. As with wheel replacement, there-

fore, you should have the work performed

by a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not illuminate briefly after the

ignition switch is turned ON or the

light illuminates steadily after blink-

ing for approximately one minute,

you should have your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significa nt

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting. If the light

illuminates steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

& Tire inspection

Check on a daily basis that the tires are

free from se rious damage, nails, and

stones. At the same time, check the tires

for abnormal wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately if you find any problem.

NOTE

. When the wheels and tires strike

curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-

ment as when the vehicle is driven on a

rough surface, they can suffer damage

that cannot be seen with the naked eye.

This type of damage does not become

evident until time has passed. Try not

to drive over curbs, potholes or on

other rough surfaces. If doing so is

unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed

down to a walking pace or less, and

approach the curbs as squarely as

possible. Also, make sure the tires are

not pressed against the curb when you

park the vehicle.

. If you feel unusual vibration while

driving or find it difficult to steer the

vehicle in a straight line, one of the

tires and/or wheels may be damaged.

Drive slowly to the nearest authorized

SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle

inspected.

& Tire pressures and wear

Maintaining the correct tire pressures

helps to maximize the tires’ service lives

and is essential for good running perfor-

mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust

the pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month (for example,

during a fuel stop) and before any long

journey.

Maintenance and service 11-25

– CONTINUED –

11-26 Maintenance and service

Check the tire pressures when the tires

are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust

the tire pressures to the values shown on

the tire placard. The tire placard is located

on the door pillar on the driver’s side.

Driving even a short distance warms up

the tires and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected by the

outside temperature. It is best to check tire

pressure outdoors before driving the

vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air inside

it expands, causing the tire pressure to

increase. Be careful not to mistakenly

release air from a warm tire to reduce its

pressure.

NOTE

. The air pressure in a tire increases

by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3

kgf/cm

) when the tire becomes warm.

. The tires are considered cold when

the vehicle has been parked for at least

3 hours or has been driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires to

adjust pressure. Doing so will result

in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-

trollability and ride comfort, and they

cause the tires to wear abnormally.

. Correct tire pressure (t read wor n

evenly)

Roadholding is good, and steerin g is

responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so

fuel consumption is also lower.

. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread

worn at shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-

sumption is also higher.

. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread

worn in center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire

magnifies the effects of road-surface

bumps and dips, possibly re sulting in

vehicle damage.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

& Wheel balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when

your vehicle was new, but the wheels will

become unbalanced as the tires become

worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes

the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at

certain vehicle speeds and detracts from

the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can

also cause steering and suspension sys-

tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If

you suspect that the wheels are not

correctly balanced, have them checked

and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.

Also have them adjusted after tire repairs

and after tire rotation.

NOTE

Loss of correct wheel alignment*

causes the tires to wear on one side

and reduces the vehicle’s running

stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer

if you notice abnormal tire wear.

*: The suspension system is designed to hold

each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to

the other wheels and to the road) for optimum

straight-line stability and cornering perfor-

mance.

Maintenance and service

11-27

– CONTINUED –

11-28 Maintenance and service

& Wear indicators

1) New tread

2) Worn tread

3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear

indicator, which becomes vis ible when

the depth of the tread grooves decreases

to 0.071 in (1.8 mm). A tire must be

replaced when the tread wear indicator

appears as a solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indicator

becomes visible, the tire is worn

beyond the acceptable limit and

must be replaced immediately. With

a tire in this condition, driving at

high speeds in wet weather can

cause the vehicle to hydroplane.

The resulting loss of vehicle control

can lead to an accident.

NOTE

For safety, inspect the tire tread reg-

ularly and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become visible.

& Tire rotation direction mark

Example of tire rotation direction mark

1) Front

If the tire has the rotation direction

specification, the tire rotation direction

mark is placed on its sidewall.

When you install a tire that has the tire

rotation direction mark, install the tire with

the direction mark facing forward.

& Tire rotation

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidi rec-

tional tires

1) Front

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires

1) Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To

maximize the life of each tire and ensure

that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to

rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000

km). Move the tires to the positions shown

in the illustration each time they are

rotated.

Replace any damaged or unevenly worn

tire at the time of rotation . After tire

rotation, adjust the tire pressures and

make sure the wheel nuts are correctly

tightened.

After driving approximately 600 miles

(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again

and retighten any nut that has become

loose.

& Tire replacement

The wheels and tires are important and

integral parts of your vehicle’s design;

they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The

tires fitted as standard equipment are

optimally matched to the characteristics

of the vehicle and were selected to give

the best possible combination of running

performance, ride comfort, and service

life. It is essential for every tire to have a

size and c onstruction matching those

shown on the tire placard and to have a

speed symbol and load index matching

those shown on the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts

from controllability, ride comfort, braking

performance, speedometer accuracy and

odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-

rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-

priately changes the vehicle’s ground

clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-

struction, and size. You are advised to

replace the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard equip-

ment.

For safe vehicl e operation, SUBARU

recommends replacing all four tires at

the same time.

WARNING

. All four tires must be the same in

terms of manufacturer, brand

(tread pattern), construction, de-

gree of wear, speed symbol, load

index and size. Mixing tires of

different types, sizes or degrees

of wear can result in damage to

the vehicle’s powertrain. Use of

different types or sizes of tires

can als o dangerously re duce

controllability and braking per-

formance and can lead to an

accident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not use

radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.

Doing so can dang erously re-

duce controllability, resulting in

an accident.

& Wheel replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement

wheels match the specifications of the

wheels that are fitted as standard equip-

ment. Replacement wheels are available

from SUBARU dealers.

Maintenance and service 11-29

– CONTINUED –

11-30 Maintenance and service

WARNING

Use only those w heels that are

specified for your vehicle. Wheels

not meeting specifications could

interfere with brake caliper opera-

tion and may cause the tires to rub

against the wheel well housing dur-

ing turns. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

Aluminum wheels

. Aluminum wheels can be scratched

and damaged easily. Handle them care-

fully to maintain their appearance, perfor-

mance, and safety.

1) The length of the wheel nut wrench

CAUTION

There are 2 types of wheel nut

wrenches that apply to different

lengths.

For an aluminum wheel vehicle, the

11.2-inch (285 mm) wheel nut

wrench is equipped as a mainte-

nance tool. And for a chrome plated

wheel vehicle, the 13.2-inch (335

mm) wheel nut wrench is equipped

as well. Always use a wheel nut

wrench for an aluminum wheel. If

youuseawrenchforachrome

plated wheel, you cannot tighten it

to the specified torque.

. When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to change

a flat tire, always check the tightness of

the wheel nuts after driving approximately

600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,

tighten it to the following specified torque.

A tightening sequence specification for the

wheel nuts can be found in the “Flat tires”

in chapter 9.

Wheel nuts tightening torque for alu-

minum wheel:

74 to 89 lbf·ft (100 to 120 N·m, 10 to 12

kgf·m)

This torque is equivalent to applying

approximately 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg)

at the top of the wheel nut wrench.

. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

. Never let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

. Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly

and completely around the tire, otherwise

the chains may scratch the wheel.

. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap is replaced, be sure to

replace them with genuine SUBARU parts

designed for aluminum wheels.

Chrome plated wheels (if

equipped)

1) The length of the wheel nut wrench

CAUTION

There are 2 types of wheel nut

wrenches that apply to different

lengths.

For an aluminum wheel vehicle, the

11.2-inch (285 mm) wheel nut

wrench is equipped as a mainte-

nance tool. And for a chrome plated

wheel vehicle, the 13.2-inch (335

mm) wheel nut wrench is equipped

as well. Always use a wheel nut

wrench for a chrome plated wheel. If

you use a wrench for an aluminum

wheel, you cannot tighten it to the

specified torque.

. When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to change

a flat tire, always check the tightness of

the wheel nuts after driving approximately

600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,

tighten it to the following specified torque.

A tightening sequence specification for the

wheel nuts can be found in the “Flat tires”

in chapter 9.

Wheel nuts tightening torque for

chrome plated wheel:

89 to 111 lbf·ft (120 to 150 N·m, 12 to 15

kgf·m)

This torque is equivalent to applying

approximately 86 to 108 lbs (39 to 49 kg)

at the top of the wheel nut wrench.

. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

. Never let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

. Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly

and completely around the tire, otherwise

the chains may scratch the wheel.

. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap is replaced, be sure to

replace them with genuine SUBARU parts

designed for chrome plated wheels.

Maintenance and service 11-31

11-32 Maintenance and service

Windshield washer fluid

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

If you spray washer fluid on the windshield

but the windshield washer fluid warning

light illuminates or the supply of washer

fluid drops, check the level of washer fluid

in the tank.

Washer fluid level gauge

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

check the fluid level indicated by the level

gauge (attached to the inside of the cap).

If the level is near the “Low” mark, add

fluid until it reaches the “Hi” level on the

level gauge.

After adding fluid, make sure the wind-

shield washer fluid warning l ight has

turned off.

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield

washer fluid is unavailable use clean

water.

In areas where water freezes in winter,

use an anti-freeze type windshield washer

fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid

contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it

is diluted, as indicated in the following

table.

Washer Fluid

Concentration

Freezing

Temperature

30%

10.48F(−128C)

50% −48F(−208C)

100% −498F(−458C)

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in

the table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

thepipingistoolowfortheoutside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

Adjust the washer fluid concentra-

tion appropriately for the outside

temperature. If the concentration is

inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid

may freeze on the windshield and

obstruct your view, and the fluid

may freeze in the reservoir tank.

Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other materials

on the windshield or the wiper blade

results in jerky wiper operation and streak-

ing on the glass. If you cannot remove the

streaks after operating the windshield

washer or if the wiper operation is jerky,

clean the outer surface of the windshield

(or rear window) and the wiper blades

using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral

detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After

cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper

blades with clean water. The windshield is

clean if beads do not form when you rinse

the windshield with water.

CAUTION

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

wiper blades.

. Whenyouwishtoraisethe

passenger-side wiper arm, first

raise the driver-side wiper arm.

Otherwise, the passenger-side

wiper assembly and driver-side

wiper assembly will touch each

other, possibly resulting in

scratches.

. Return the passenger-side wiper

arm to its original position before

returning the driver-side wiper

arm to its original position.

Otherwise, the passenger-s ide

wiper assembly and driver-side

wiper assembly will touch each

other, possibly resulting in

scratches.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the

wiper blades using the following proce-

dures. Be sure to use genuine SUBARU

wiper blade rubbers as replacements.

& Windshield wiper blade as-

sembly

1. Raise the windshield wiper arm on the

driver’s side.

2. Next, raise the windshield wiper arm

on the passenger’s side.

Maintenance and service 11-33

– CONTINUED –

11-34 Maintenance and service

1) Stopper

3. Remove the wiper blade assembly by

holding its pivot area and pushing it in the

direction shown by the arrow while de-

pressing the wiper blade stopper.

4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

5. Lower the windshield wiper arm on the

passenger’s side slowly while supporting

it by hand.

6. Next, lower the windshield wiper arm

on the driver’s side slowly while support-

ing it by hand.

CAUTION

Do not let go of the wiper arm until it

touches the windshield. Letting the

wiper arm snap onto the windshield

could damage it.

& Windshield wiper blade rub-

ber

1) Metal support

1. Grasp the locked end of the blade

rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the

stoppers on the rubber are free of the

metal support.

1) Metal spines

2. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and

install them in the new blade rubber.

CAUTION

Be sure to install each metal spine

so as to fit its groove completely on

the center ridge of the blade rubber.

Doing otherwise may result in dis-

location and breakage of the spine

during wiper operation.

3. Align the claws of the metal support

with the grooves in the rubber and slide

the blade rubber assembly into the metal

support until it locks.

1) Stopper

4. Be sure to position the claws at the

end of the metal support between the

stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the

rubber is not retained properly, the wiper

blade may scratch the windshield.

& Rear window wiper blade

assembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear

window.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-

terclockwise.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.

& Rear window wiper blade

rubber

Maintenance and service 11-35

– CONTINUED –

11-36 Maintenance and service

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber

assembly to unlock it from the plastic

support.

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.

1) Metal spines

3. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and

install them in the new blade rubber.

4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber

assembly, then slide the blade rubber

assembly into place.

Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support

ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,

the wiper may scratch the rear window

glass.

5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

Battery

WARNING

. Before beginning work on or near

any battery, be sure to extinguish

all cigarettes, matches, and light-

ers. Never expose a battery to an

open flame or electric sparks.

Batteries give off a gas which is

highly flammable and explosive.

. For safety, in case an explosion

does occur, wear eye protection

or shield your eyes when work-

ing near any battery. Never lean

over a battery.

. Do not let battery fluid contact

eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-

cause battery fluid is a corrosive

acid. If battery fluid gets on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately

flush the area with water thor-

oughly. Seek medical help imme-

diately if acid has entered the

eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and seek medical attention im-

mediately.

. To lessen the risk of spa rks,

remove rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never

allow metal tools to contact the

positive battery terminal and any-

thing connected to it WHILE you

are at the same time in contact

with any other metallic portion of

the vehicle because a short cir-

cuit will result.

. Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

. Charge the battery in a well-

ventilated area.

. Battery posts, terminals, and re-

lated accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Batteries also contain

other chemicals known to the

State of California to cause can-

cer. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 amperes

when charging the battery because

it will shorten battery life.

It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

Maintenance and service 11-37

11-38 Maintenance and service

Fuses

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one hav-

ing a higher rating or with material

other than a fuse because serious

damage or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring

harness and electrical equipme nt. The

fuses are located in two fuse boxes. One

is located under the instrument panel

behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s

seat side.

Open the lid that is located above the

hood release knob and pull it toward you

to remove it.

The other one is housed in the engine

compartment.

The spare fuses are stored in the main

fuse box cover in the engine compart-

ment.

The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse

box in the engine compartment.

1) Good

2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical

controls do not operate, inspect the

corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,

replace it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position and turn off all electrical acces-

sories.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

The back side of each fuse box cover and

the “Fuses and circuits” section in chapter

12 in this manual show the circuit for each

fuse.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,

replace it with a spare fuse of the same

rating.

6. If the same fuse blows again, this

indicates that its system has a problem.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

Main fuse

Main fuse box

The main fuses are desig ned to melt

during an overload to prevent damage to

the wiring harness and electrical equip-

ment. Check the main fuses if any

electrical component fails to operate (ex-

cept the starter motor) and other fuses are

good. A melted main fuse must be

replaced. Use only replacements with the

same specified rating as the melted main

fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is

replaced, have the electrical system

checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Maintenance and service 11-39

11-40 Maintenance and service

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing fog lights or any other

electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such

accessories may cause the electronic

system to malfunction if they are incor-

rectly installed or if they are not suited for

the vehicle.

Replacing bulbs

Maintenance and service 11-41

– CONTINUED –

11-42 Maintenance and service

Wattage Bulb No.

1) High beam headlight 12V-65W HB3

Low beam headlight

Vehicles with HID light 12V-35W D1S

Vehicles without HID light 12V-55W H7

Front turn signal/Parking light 12V-28/8W 2357NA

Parking/Front side marker light 12V-5W 168(W5W)

Map light 12V-8W –

Dome light

Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment

12V-5W –

Vehicles without Rear Seat Entertainment

12V-8W –

Door step light 12V-3W –

Vanity mirror light 12V-3W

9) Fog light

12V-55W H3

10)

Cargo area light 12V-13W 912

11)

Tail light 12V-5W 168(W5W)

12)

Brake/tail light 12V-27/8W 1157(W27/8W)

13)

Rear turn signal light 12V-27W 1156(W27W)

14)

Back-up light 12V-16W 921

15)

Rear gate light 12V-5W (W5W)

16)

License plate light 12V-5W

168(W5W)

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire.

& Headlights (vehicles with HID

headlights)

WARNING

High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbs

are used for the low beams of the

headlights. These HID bulbs use an

extremely high voltage. To avoid the

risk of an electric shock and result-

ing serious injury, you should not

attempt to replace them. Neither

should you attempt to replace the

high-beam bulbs, remove/refit the

headlight assemblies, or remove

any headlight-asse mbly compo-

nents. For replacement of the head-

light bulbs (low-beam and high-

beam), removal and installation of

the headlight assemblies, and re-

moval of headlight-assembly com-

ponents, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

& Headlights (vehicles without

HID headlights)

CAUTION

Halogen headlight bu lbs become

very hot while in use. If you touch

the bulb surface with bare hands or

greasy gloves, finger p rints or

grease on the bulb surface develop

into hot spots, causing the bulb to

break. If there are finger prints or

grease on the bulb surface, wipe

them away with a soft cloth mois-

tened with alcohol.

NOTE

. If headlight aiming is required, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer for proper

adjustment of the headlight aim.

. It may be difficult to replace the

bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

! Low beam light bulbs (right-hand

side)

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on

the air intake duct, then remove the air

intake duct.

2. Use a screwdriver to remove the bulb

cover.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

4. Remove the retainer spring.

5. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer

spring securely.

6. Reconnect the electrical connector.

7. Install the bulb cover with the fixing

screws.

8. Install the air intake duct with the clips.

NOTE

Contact your SUBARU dealer for the

bulb replacement of the left-hand side.

Maintenance and service 11-43

– CONTINUED –

11-44 Maintenance and service

! High beam light bulbs

Right-hand side

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on

the air intake duct, then remove the air

intake duct. (right-hand side)

Left-hand side

2. Use a screwdriver to remove the

secured clip of the washer tank. To make

it easy to access the bulb, move the

washer tank to the horizontal direction.

(left-hand side)

3. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb.

4. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

5. Replace the bulb with new one. At this

time , use car e not to touch the bulb

surface.

6. Reconnect the electrical connector.

7. To install the bulb to the headlight

assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.

8. Install the air intake duct with clips.

(right-hand side)

9. Set the washer tank to the original

place and secure it by clip. (left-hand side)

& Parking light (right-hand

side)

1. Remove the bulb socket from the

headlight assembly by turning it counter-

clockwise.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Set the bulb socket into the headlight

assembly and turn it clockwise until it

locks.

NOTE

Contact your SUBARU dealer for the

bulb replacement of the left-hand side.

& Front turn signal light (right-

hand side)

1. Remove the bulb socket from the

headlight assembly by turning it counter-

clockwise.

2. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pushing it and turning counterclockwise.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Set the bulb socket into the headlight

assembly and turn it clockwise until it

locks.

NOTE

Contact your SUBARU dealer for the

bulb replacement of the left-hand side.

& Front fog light

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer if necessary.

Maintenance and service 11-45

– CONTINUED –

11-46 Maintenance and service

& Rear combination lights

1. Remove the two covers by inserting

the tip of a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove

the upper and lower screws. Then, slide

the rear combination light assembly rear-

ward and remove it from the vehicle.

1) Brake/tail light

2) Rear turn signal light

3. Remove the bulb holder from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pushing it and turning counterclockwise.

5. Install a new bulb.

6. Set the bulb holder into the rear

combination light assembly and turn it

clockwise until it locks.

7. Reinstall the rear com bination light

assembly by sliding the two-pronged part

of the combination light assembly securely

to each holder of the vehicle side.

8. Tighten the two mounting screws, and

then close the covers.

& Back-up light/Tail light

1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to remove

the light cover from the rear gate trim.

1) Tail light

2) Back-up light

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and remove it.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

4. Install the bulb socket by turning it

clockwise.

5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.

& Rear gate light

1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to remove

the rear gate light assembly from the rear

gate trim.

2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

3. Install the rear gate light assembly on

the rear gate.

& License plate light

Maintenance and service 11-47

– CONTINUED –

11-48 Maintenance and service

1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver in vinyl

tape or cloth, insert it into the gap between

the license plate light assembly and the

rear gate.

2. Carefully pry the light assembly to

remove it.

3. Remove the bulb socket from the

license plate light assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

new bulb.

5. Set the bulb socket into the license

plate light assembly and turn it clockwise

until it locks.

6. Reinstall the license plate light assem-

bly to the rear gate.

& Dome light

Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment

Vehicles without Rear Seat Entertainment

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at

its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb

straight downward to remove it.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Reinstall the lens.

& Map light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at

its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb

straight downward to remove it.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Reinstall the lens.

& Vanity mirror light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

Maintenance and service 11-49

– CONTINUED –

11-50 Maintenance and service

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Reinstall the lens.

& Door step light

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer if necessary.

& Cargo area light

1. Remove the cargo area light assembly

by prying the edge of the light with a flat-

head screwdriver.

2. Remove the lens from the cargo area

light assembly.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the lens to the cargo area

light assembly.

6. Reinstall the cargo area light assembly

to the roof trim.

Specifications ..................................................... 12-2

Dimensions........................................................ 12-2

Engine ............................................................... 12-2

Electrical system................................................ 12-3

Capacities.......................................................... 12-3

Tires .................................................................. 12-3

Wheel alignment ................................................ 12-4

Fuses and circuits ............................................. 12-5

Fuse panel located in the passenger

compartment ................................................... 12-5

Fuse panel located in the engine

compartment ................................................... 12-7

Bulb chart........................................................... 12-8

Vehicle identification ......................................... 12-9

Specifications

12-2 Specifications

Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& Dimensions

in (mm)

Overall length 191.5 (4,865)

Overall width 73.9 (1,878)

Overall height

Without roof rail 66.4 (1,686)

With roof rail 67.7 (1,720)

Wheel base 108.2 (2,749)

Tread

Front 62.2 (1,580)

Rear 62.1 (1,578)

Ground clearance

8.4 (213)

& Engine

Engine model

EZ36D

(3.6 L, DOHC, non-turbo)

Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder, 4 stroke gasoline engine

Displacement cc (cu-in) 3,630 (222)

Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.62 6 3.58 (92.0 6 91.0)

Compression ratio 10.5 : 1

Firing order

1 – 6 – 3 – 2 – 5 – 4

& Electrical system

Battery type and capacity (5HR) 75D23L (12V-52AH)

Alternator 12V-130A

Spark plugs

SILFR6A (NGK)

& Capacities

Fuel tank 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)

Engine oil

6.7 US qt (6.3 liters, 5.5 Imp qt)

Transmission fluid

10.4 US qt (9.8 liters, 8.6 Imp qt)

Front differential gear oil 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt)

Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)

Power steering fluid 0.9 US qt (0.9 liter, 0.8 Imp qt)

Engine coolant

8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)

& Tires

Tire size

P255/55R18 104H

Wheel size 18 6 8JJ

Pressure Front

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Rear at trailer towing

32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Temporary spare tire

Size T165/80R17

Pressure

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

Specifications

12-3

– CONTINUED –

12-4 Specifications

& Wheel alignment

Toe Front

0 in (0 mm)

Rear 0.0787 in (2 mm)

Camber

Front 0800’

Rear

−0831’

Fuses and circuits

& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 20A

. Trailer hitch connector

Empty

3 15A

. Door locking

4 7.5A

. Front wiper deicer relay

. Moonroof

5 7.5A

. Combination meter

6 7.5A

. Remote control rear

view mirrors

. Seat heater relay

7 15A

. Combination meter

. Integrated unit

8 15A

. Stop light

9 20A

. Mirror heater

. Front wiper deicer

10 7.5A

. Power supply (battery)

11 7.5A

. Turn signal unit

12 15A

. Automatic transmission

unit

. SRS airbag system

(sub)

. Engine control unit

. Integrated unit

Specifications

12-5

– CONTINUED –

12-6 Specifications

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

13 20A

. Cargo socket

14 15A

. Position light

. Tail light

. Rear combination light

Empty

16 10A

. Illumination

17 15A

. Seat heaters

18 10A

. Back-up light

19 7.5A

. Headlight right side re-

lay

20 Empty

21 7.5A

. Starter relay

22 15A

. Air conditioner

. Rear window defogger

relay coil

23 15A

. Rear wiper

. Rear window washer

24 15A

. Audio unit

25 15A

. SRS airbag system

(main)

26 7.5A

. Power window relay

27 15A

. Rear blower fan

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

28 15A

. Rear blower fan

29 15A

. Fog light

30 30A

. Front wiper

31 7.5A

. Auto air conditioner unit

. Integrated unit

32 7.5A

. Headlight left side relay

33 7.5A

. Vehicle dynamics con-

trol unit

& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 30A

. Vehicle dynamics control

unit

2 20A

. Console socket

3 15A

. Headlight (right side)

4 15A

. Headlight (left side)

5 20A

. Backup

6 15A

. Horn

7 25A

. Rear window defogger

8 15A

. Fuel pump

9 15A

. Automatic transmission

control unit

10 7.5A

. Engine control unit

11 15A

. Turn and hazard warning

flasher

12 20A

. Parking switch

13 7.5A

. Alternator

Specifications

12-7

12-8 Specifications

Bulb chart

Description Wattage Bulb No.

High beam headlight 12V-65W HB3

Low beam headlight

Vehicles with HID light 12V-35W D1S

Vehicles without HID light 12V-55W H7

Fog light 12V-55W H3

Front turn signal/Parking light

12V-28/8W 2357NA

Parking/Front side marker light

12V-5W 168(W5W)

Rear combination light

Rear turn signal light 12V-27W 1156(W27W)

Brake/tail 12V-27/8W 1157(W27/8W)

Tail light

12V-5W 168(W5W)

Back-up light

12V-16W 921

License plate light

12V-5W 168(W5W)

Cargo area light

12V-13W 912

Dome light

Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment

12V-5W –

Vehicles without Rear Seat Entertainment

12V-8W –

Map light

12V-8W –

Vanity mirror light

12V-3W –

Door step light

12V-3W –

Rear gate light

12V-5W (W5W)

Vehicle identification

1) Vehicle identification number

2) Certification and bar code label

3) Tire inflation pressure label

4) Vehicle identification number plate

5) Model number label

6) Emission control label

7) Fuel label

Specifications

12-9

————————————————————————————————————————

For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2

Tire information .................................................. 13-2

Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2

Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-5

Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-6

Tire care – maintenance and safety practices...... 13-7

Vehicle load limit – how to determine.................. 13-8

Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load

capacities ...................................................... 13-11

Adverse safety consequences of overloading on

handling and stopping and on tires ................ 13-11

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-11

Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-12

Treadwear ....................................................... 13-12

Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-12

Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-13

Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ................... 13-14

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

For U.S.A.

The following information has been

compiled according to Code of

Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part

575”.

Tire information

& Tire labeling

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire

Identification Number or TIN) are

placed on the sidewall of a tire by

tire manufacturers. These markings

can provide you with useful infor-

mation on the tire.

! Tire size

Your vehicle comes equipped with

P-Metric tire size. It is important to

understand the sizing system in

selecting the proper tire for your

vehicle. Here is a brief review of the

tire sizing system with a breakdown

of its individual elements.

! P Metric

With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters.

To convert millimeters into inches,

divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio

(Section Height divided by Section

Width) helps provide more dimen-

sional information about the tire

size.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used on

light duty vehicles such as passen-

ger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height

7 section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

(5) Rim diameter in inches

! Load and Speed Rating Descrip-

tions

The load and speed rating descrip-

tions will appear following the size

designation.

They provide two important facts

about the tire. First, the number

designation is its load index. Sec-

ond, the letter designation indicates

the tire’s speed rating.

Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical code

which specifies the maximum load

a tire can carry at the speed

indicated by its speed symbol, at

maximum inflation pressure.

For example, “104” means 1,984

lbs (900 kg), “100” means 1,764 lbs

(800 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs (600

kg).

WARNING

Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting

a load rated tire on any vehicle

does not mean the vehicle can

be loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical

system describing a tire’s capability

to travel at established and prede-

termined speeds.

For example, “H” means 130 mph

(210 km/h).

WARNING

. Speed ratings apply only to

the tire, not to the vehicle.

Putting a speed rated tire on

any vehicle does not mean

the vehicle can be operated

at the tire’s rated speed.

. The speed rating is void if

the tires are worn out, da-

maged, repaired, retreaded,

or otherwise altered from

their original condition. If

tires are repaired, re-

treaded, or otherwise al-

tered, they may not be sui-

table for original equipment

tire designed loads and

speeds.

! Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard

sidewall. The TIN is composed of

four groups. Here is a brief review

of the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

(1) Manufact urer ’s Identification

Mark

(2) Tire Size

(3) Tire Type Code

(4) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01” to represent

the first full week of the calendar

year; the second two figures repre-

sent the year. For example, 0101

means the 1st week of 2001.

! Other markings

The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.

! Maximum permissible inflat ion

pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which this tire may be

inf lated. For example, “300 kPa

(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3

– CONTINUED –

13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

! Maximum load rating

The load rating at the maximum

permissible weight load for this tire.

For example, “MAX. LOAD 730 kg

(1609 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI)

MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the

vehicle. Putting a load rated

tire on any vehicle does not

mean the vehicle can be

loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

! Construction type

Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

BELTED RADIAL”

! Construction

The generic name of each cord

material used in the plies (both

sidewall and tread area) of this tire.

For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1

NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-

STER”

! Uniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG)

For details, refer to “Uniform tire

quality grading standards” in this

chapter.

& Recommended tire inflation pressure

! Reco mmended cold tire inflation pressure

Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires is as follows,

Tire size

P255/55R18 104H

Wheel size 18 6 8JJ

Pressure Front

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Rear at trailer towing

32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Temporary spare tire

Size T165/80R17

Pressure

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5

– CONTINUED –

13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

! Vehicle placard

The vehicle placard is affixed to the

driver’s side B-pillar.

Example:

The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire

inflation pressure on each tire at

maximum loaded vehicle weight,

seating capacity and loading infor-

mation.

! Adverse safety consequences

of under-i nflation

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to flex severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and failure of the

tire(s). Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

! Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper in-

flation

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month and

before any long journey. Check the

tire pressures when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to

adjust the tire pressures to the

specific values. Driving even a

short distance warms up the tires

and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected

by the outside temperature. It is

best to check tire pressure out-

doors before driving the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air

inside it expands, causing the tire

pressure to increase. Be careful not

to mistakenly release air from a

warm tire to reduce its pressure.

& Glossary of tire terminology

. Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

. Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Recommended inflation pres-

sure

The cold inflation pressure recom-

mended by a vehicle manufacturer.

. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand,

and/or model name molding that

is higher or deeper than the

same molding on the other side-

wall of the tire, or

(2) The outward facing sidewall

of an asymmetrical tire that has

a particular side that must al-

ways face outward when mount-

ing on a vehicle.

. Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be

replaced) of floor mats, leather

seats and cross bars to the extent

that these items are available as

factory-installed equipment

(whether installed or not).

. Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and

coolant and air conditioning.

. Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of curb weight, accessory

weight, vehicle capacity weight and

production options weight.

. Normal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants (3 occupants).

. Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehi-

cle, 2 in front, 1 in rear seat.

. Production options weight

The combined weight of those

installed regular production options

weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in

excess of those standards items

which they replace, not previously

considered in curb weight or acces-

sory weight.

. Vehicle capacity weigh t

The total weight of cargo, luggage

and occupants that can be added to

the vehicle.

. Vehicle maximum load on a tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the maximum

loaded vehicle weight and dividing

by two.

. Vehicle normal load on a tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal oc-

cupant weight and dividing by two.

& Tire care – maintenance and

safety practices

. Check on a daily basis that the

tires are free from serious damage,

nails, and stones. At the same time,

check the tires for abnormal wear.

. Inspect the tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become visi-

ble. When a tire’s tread wear

indicator becomes visible, the tire

is worn beyond the acceptable limit

and must be replaced immediately.

With a tire in this condition, driving

at even low speeds in wet weather

can cause the vehicle to hydro-

plane. Possibl e re sulting loss of

vehicle control can lead to an

accident.

. To maximize the life of each tire

and ensure that the tires wear

uniformly, it is best to rotate the

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-7

– CONTINUED –

13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Rotating the tires involves switch-

ing the front and rear tires on the

right-hand side of the vehicle and

similarly switching the front and

rear tires on the left-hand side of

the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept

on its original side of the vehicle.)

Replace any damaged or unevenly

worn tire at the time of rotation.

After tire rotation, adjust the tire

pressures and make sure the wheel

nuts are correctly tightened. A

tightening torque specification and

a tightening sequence specification

for the wheel nuts can be found

“

Flat tires” in chapter 9.

& Vehicle load limit – how to

determine

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by avail-

able cargo space. The load limit of

your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the

driver ’s side B-pillar. Locate the

statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”

on your vehicle’s placard.

Thevehicleplacardalsoshows

seating capacity of your vehicle.

The total load capacity includes the

total weight of driver and all pas-

sengers and their belongings, any

cargo, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike

carrier, etc., and the tongue load of

a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity

can be calculated by the following

method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total

weight of occupants + total weight

of optional equipment + tongue

load of a trailer (if applicable))

For towing capacity information and

weight limits, refer to the “

Trailer

towing” section in chapter 8.

! Calculating total and load ca-

pacities varying seating con-

figurations

Calculate the available load capa-

city as shown in the following

examples:

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 1,157 lbs (525 kg), which

is indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 525 kg or

1,157 lbs”.

For example, if the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 882 lbs (400

kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total

weight from the vehicle capacity

weight of 1,157 lbs (525 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 121 lbs (55 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing

176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the

same vehicle (bringing the number

of occupants to two), the calcula-

tions are as follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 55 lbs (25

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 55 lbs (25 kg) or more.

Example 2A

Vehicle capacity weight of the

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-9

– CONTINUED –

13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

vehicle is 1,157 lbs (525 kg), which

is indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 525 kg or

1,157 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)

plus cargo weighing 705 lbs (320

kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted

with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs

(10 kg), to which is attached a

trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).

10% of the trailer weight is applied

to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue

load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 88 lbs (40 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

Example 2B

For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing

40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to three), and a child

restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5

kg) is installed in the vehicle for the

child to use, the calculations are as

follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 105 lbs (48

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 105 lbs (48 kg) or more.

& Determining compatibility of

tire and vehicle load capaci-

ties

The sum of four tires’ maximum

load ratings must exceed the max-

imum loaded vehicle weight

(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the

maximum load ratings of two front

tires and of two rear tires must

exceed each axle’s maximum

loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original

equipment tires are designed to

fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle

weight is referred to Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). And each

axle’s maximum loaded capacity is

referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-

ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each

axle’s GAWR are shown on the

vehicle certification label affixed to

the driver’s door.

The GVWR and front an d rear

GAWRs are determined by not only

the maximum load rating of tires but

also loaded capacities of the vehi-

cle’s suspension, axles and other

parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the

vehicle cannot necessarily be

loaded up to the tire’s maximum

load rating on the tire sidewall.

& Adverse safety conse-

quences of overloading on

handling and stopping and

on tires

Overloading could affect vehicle

handling, stopping distance, vehicle

and tire as shown in the following.

This could lead to an accident and

possibly result in severe personal

injury.

. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.

. Heavy and/or high-mounted

loads could increase the risk of

rollover.

. Stopping distance will increase.

. Brakes could overheat and fail.

. Suspension, bearings, axles and

other parts of the body could break

or experience accelerated wear

that will shorten vehicle life.

. Tires could fail.

. Tread separation could occur.

. Tire could separate from its rim.

& Steps for Determining Cor-

rect Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11

– CONTINUED –

13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the “XXX” amount equals

1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be

five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in

your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capa-

city is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 6

150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your ve-

hicle.

Uniform tire quality grading

standards

This information indicates the rela-

tive performance of passenger car

tires in the area of treadwear,

traction, and temperature resis-

tance. This is to aid the consumer

in making an informed choice in the

purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall be-

tween tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-

perature A

The quality grades apply to new

pneumatic tires for use on passen-

ger cars. However, th ey do not

apply to deep tread, winter type

snow tires, space-saver or tempor-

ary use spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 12 inches

or less, or to some limited produc-

tion tires.

All passenger car tires must con-

form to Federal Saf ety Require-

ments in addition to these grades.

& Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under con-

trolled conditions on a specified

government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1-

1/2) times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

& Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spe-

cified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accel-

eration, cornering, hydroplan-

ing, or peak traction charac-

teristics.

& Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified indoor labora-

tory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of perfor-

mance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire

that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive

speed, underinflation, or ex-

cessive loading, either sepa-

rately or in combination, can

cause heat buildup and possi-

ble tire failure.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-13

13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Reporting safety defects

(U.S.A.)

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a

crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately in-

form the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying Subaru of

America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehi-

cles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between

you, your dealer, or Subaru of

America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,

you may call the Vehicle Safety

Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write

to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington,

DC 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor ve-

hicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

Index

14-2 Index

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-20

Warning light ................................................. 3-15, 7-21

Accessories....................................................... 5-4, 11-40

Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-9

Active head restraint..................................................... 1-5

Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-14

Air filtration system..................................................... 4-11

Air flow ....................................................................... 4-2

Air flow mode selection................................................. 4-3

Alarm system ............................................................ 2-15

All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-18

Aluminum wheel cleaning............................................ 10-3

Aluminum wheels...................................................... 11-30

Antenna system........................................................... 5-2

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-20

Arming the system ..................................................... 2-16

Armrest..................................................................... 1-12

AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-13

Audio control button ................................................... 5-27

Audio input jack ......................................................... 5-29

Audio set .................................................................... 5-4

Auto-dimming mirror/compass...................................... 3-38

Automatic climate control system ................................... 4-5

Automatic transmission ............................................... 7-12

Capacities............................................................. 12-3

Fluid.................................................................... 11-15

MANUAL mode ..................................................... 7-15

Selector lever ........................................................ 7-13

Shift lock release ................................................... 7-17

SPORT mode........................................................ 7-17

Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ................. 3-13

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-17

AUX unit operation ..................................................... 5-29

Battery .................................................................... 11-37

Jump starting ......................................................... 9-12

Replacement (remote keyless entry system) .............. 2-10

Booster seat .............................................................. 1-37

Brake

Assist.................................................................... 7-19

Booster ....................................................... 7-19, 11-21

Fluid ................................................................... 11-20

Pad and lining...................................................... 11-22

Parking ....................................................... 7-29, 11-23

Pedal .................................................................. 11-21

System.................................................................. 7-19

Brake pedal

Free play............................................................. 11-21

Reserve distance.................................................. 11-22

Brake system............................................................. 7-19

Warning light.......................................................... 3-16

Braking

..................................................................... 7-18

Tips ...................................................................... 7-18

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings................... 11-22

Bulb

Chart .................................................................... 12-8

Replacing ............................................................ 11-41

Capacities ................................................................. 12-3

Cargo area

Cover ................................................................... 6-13

Light....................................................................... 6-2

Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-15

Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3

Center

Console .................................................................. 6-6

Ventilators ............................................................... 4-4

Changing

Flat tire ................................................................... 9-6

Oil and oil filter ...................................................... 11-8

Charge warning light .................................................. 3-13

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator

lamp...................................................................... 3-12

Checking

Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-21

Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-22

Engine oil level ...................................................... 11-7

Fluid level ........................................ 11-15, 11-19, 11-20

Gear oil level ........................................................ 11-18

Child restraint systems ............................................... 1-31

Installation with A/ELR seatbelt................................ 1-34

Lower and tether anchorages .................................. 1-38

Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-41

Child safety .................................................................... 5

Locks ................................................................... 2-19

Chime

Key........................................................................ 3-4

Seatbelt ........................................................ 1-18, 3-10

Chrome plated wheels ............................................... 11-31

Cleaning

Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3

Interior .................................................................. 10-5

Ventilation grille ...................................................... 4-10

Climate control system

Automatic ............................................................... 4-5

Clock ........................................................................ 3-21

Coat hook.................................................................. 6-11

Coolant ................................................................... 11-11

Cooling system ........................................................ 11-11

Corrosion protection............................................ 8-10, 10-4

Cruise control ............................................................ 7-30

Indicator light ................................................. 3-20, 7-33

Set indicator light............................................ 3-21, 7-33

Cup holder ................................................................. 6-7

Front passenger’s.................................................... 6-7

Rear seat (5-seater models)/Second-row seat (7-seater

models) passenger’s .............................................. 6-8

Third-row seat (7-seater models) ............................... 6-8

Daytime running light system ....................................... 3-27

Differential gear oil

Front................................................................... 11-17

Rear ................................................................... 11-18

Dimensions................................................................ 12-2

Disarming the alarm system......................................... 2-17

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-19

Dome light ......................................................... 6-2, 11-48

Door

Locks..................................................................... 2-4

Index 14-3

14-4 Index

Open warning light ................................................. 3-17

Step light ............................................................. 11-50

Drive belts................................................................ 11-15

Driving

All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-18

Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 7

Drinking ..................................................................... 6

Drugs ........................................................................ 6

Foreign countries ..................................................... 8-4

Pets .......................................................................... 7

Snowy and icy roads ................................................ 8-9

Tips........................................................................ 8-4

Tired or sleepy............................................................ 7

Electrical system........................................................ 12-3

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system........................................................... 3-17, 7-22

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-17

Engine

Compartment overview ........................................... 11-6

Coolant................................................................ 11-11

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 5, 8-2

Hood .................................................................... 11-4

Oil........................................................................ 11-7

Overheating .......................................................... 9-14

Starting................................................................... 7-7

Stopping ................................................................. 7-8

Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2

Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-6

Floor mat................................................................... 6-12

Fluid level

Automatic transmission ......................................... 11-15

Brake.................................................................. 11-20

Power steering ..................................................... 11-19

Fog light

Bulb.................................................................... 11-45

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-21

Switch................................................................... 3-32

Folding mirror switch................................................... 3-41

Front

Differential gear oil................................................ 11-17

Fog light (bulb) ..................................................... 11-45

Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-28

Seats ..................................................................... 1-2

Turn signal light.................................................... 11-45

Front fog light............................................................. 3-32

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-21

Front seats

Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-3

Reclining ................................................................ 1-3

Fuel ........................................................................... 7-2

Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2

Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-3

Gauge.................................................................... 3-8

Requirements ......................................................... 7-2

Fuses

..................................................................... 11-38

Fuses and circuits ...................................................... 12-5

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .............................. 8-12

Glove box ................................................................... 6-5

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-12

Hazard warning flasher ........................................... 3-5, 9-2

Head restraint adjustment

Front seat ............................................................... 1-5

Rear (5-seater models)/Second-row

(7-seater models) ................................................. 1-11

Third-row .............................................................. 1-15

Headlight

Beam leveler ......................................................... 3-29

Flasher ................................................................. 3-27

Indicator light......................................................... 3-21

Headlights........................................................ 3-26, 11-42

High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-20

High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-27

Horn......................................................................... 3-42

Hose and connections ............................................... 11-11

Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-3

Light....................................................................... 3-4

Illuminated entry .......................................................... 2-9

Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-28

Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-3

Indicator light (security indicator light) ................. 2-4, 3-19

Indicator light

Cruise control ................................................ 3-20, 7-33

Cruise control set ........................................... 3-21, 7-33

Front fog light......................................................... 3-21

Headlight............................................................... 3-21

High beam............................................................. 3-20

Immobilizer ............................................................. 2-4

Security.......................................................... 2-4, 3-19

Selector lever/Gear position ..................................... 3-20

SPORT mode ........................................................ 3-20

Traction control system OFF ............................ 3-18, 7-25

Turn signal ............................................................ 3-20

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.................. 3-18, 7-25

Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-38

Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2

Jack and jack handle .................................................. 9-19

Jump starting ............................................................. 9-12

Key

Number .................................................................. 2-2

Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-4

Replacement........................................................... 2-4

Keyless entry system ................................................... 2-8

Keys .......................................................................... 2-2

Leather seat materials................................................. 10-5

License plate light..................................................... 11-47

Light

Back-up (Station wagon)

....................................... 11-47

Index 14-5

14-6 Index

Cargo area.................................................... 6-2, 11-50

Control switch........................................................ 3-26

Dome ........................................................... 6-2, 11-48

Door step............................................................. 11-50

Front fog............................................................... 3-32

Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-4

License plate........................................................ 11-47

Map ............................................................. 6-3, 11-49

Rear combination.................................................. 11-46

Rear gate................................................................ 6-3

Vanity mirror ............................................................ 6-4

Vanity Mirror ......................................................... 11-49

Loading your vehicle .................................................. 8-11

Low fuel warning light........................................... 3-8, 3-17

Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-14

Lower and tether anchorage........................................ 1-38

Lumbar support ........................................................... 1-6

Main fuse................................................................. 11-39

Maintenance

Precautions ........................................................... 11-3

Schedule .............................................................. 11-3

Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-27

Tools .................................................................... 9-19

Malfunction indicator lamp

(check engine warning light) ..................................... 3-12

Map light........................................................... 6-3, 11-49

Maximum load limits................................................... 8-20

Meters and gauges ...................................................... 3-5

Mirrors...................................................................... 3-38

Moonroof................................................................... 2-24

Multi function display................................................... 3-23

New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2

Odometer ................................................................... 3-6

Oil filter ..................................................................... 11-8

Oil level

Engine .................................................................. 11-7

Front differential gear ............................................ 11-17

Rear differential.................................................... 11-18

Oil pressure warning light ............................................ 3-13

On-pavement and off road driving.................................. 8-5

Outside mirrors .......................................................... 3-39

Outside temperature indication ..................................... 3-22

Overhead console ....................................................... 6-7

Overheating engine .................................................... 9-14

Parking

Brake.................................................................... 7-29

Brake stroke ........................................................ 11-23

Light ................................................................... 11-44

Light switch ........................................................... 3-32

Tips ...................................................................... 7-29

Parking your vehicle ................................................... 7-29

Periodic inspections

..................................................... 8-4

Petrol fuel................................................................... 7-2

Power

Door locking switch .................................................. 2-6

Outside mirrors ...................................................... 3-41

Seat ....................................................................... 1-3

Steering................................................................ 7-18

Steering fluid ........................................................ 11-19

Windows............................................................... 2-20

Precautions against vehicle modification ............... 1-30, 1-70

Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-7

Printed antenna ........................................................... 5-2

Rear

Air conditioner ......................................................... 4-8

Combination lights................................................. 11-46

Gate............................................................. 2-22, 9-18

Gate light ...................................................... 6-3, 11-47

Seats ..................................................................... 1-7

Rear differential

Gear oil ............................................................... 11-18

Oil temperature warning light ................................... 3-14

Rear seat

Folding down........................................................... 1-9

Reclining................................................................. 1-9

Rear turn signal ........................................................ 11-46

Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-21

Rear window

Defogger button ..................................................... 3-37

Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 3-35

Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-35

Recommended

Automatic transmission fluid................................... 11-16

Brake fluid ........................................................... 11-21

OIL grade and viscosity.............. 11-9, 11-10, 11-17, 11-18

Power steering fluid .............................................. 11-20

Spark plugs ......................................................... 11-15

Refueling.................................................................... 7-3

Remote engine start system ......................................... 7-8

Remote keyless entry system ....................................... 2-8

Replacement

Brake pad and lining............................................. 11-22

Wiper blades........................................................ 11-33

Replacing

Air cleaner element............................................... 11-14

Battery (remote keyless entry system)....................... 2-10

Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-12

Replacing bulbs ....................................................... 11-41

Back-up light (Station wagon)................................. 11-47

Back-up light/Tail light ........................................... 11-47

Cargo area light ................................................... 11-50

Dome light ........................................................... 11-48

Door step light ..................................................... 11-50

Front fog light....................................................... 11-45

Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-45

Headlight............................................................. 11-42

License plate light................................................. 11-47

Map light ............................................................. 11-49

Parking light......................................................... 11-44

Rear combination light .......................................... 11-46

Rear gate light ..................................................... 11-47

Vanity mirror light.................................................. 11-49

Index 14-7

14-8 Index

Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-11

Roof molding and crossbar ......................................... 8-16

Roof rail and crossbar ................................................ 8-13

Safety

Precautions when driving ............................................. 4

Symbol ...................................................................... 2

Warnings ................................................................... 2

Seat

Fabric................................................................... 10-5

Heater .................................................................... 1-6

Memory function ...................................................... 1-4

Seatbelt ......................................................................... 4

Maintenance.......................................................... 1-27

Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-28

Safety tips............................................................. 1-16

Warning light and chime ................................. 1-18, 3-10

Seatbelts .................................................................. 1-16

Security ID plate .......................................................... 2-3

Security indicator light........................................... 2-4, 3-19

Selector lever ............................................................ 7-13

Position indicator ................................................... 3-20

Shift lock release ....................................................... 7-17

Shock sensors........................................................... 2-19

Shopping bag hook .................................................... 6-12

Snow tires........................................................ 8-10, 11-24

Snowy and icy roads .................................................... 8-9

Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-10

Spare tire.................................................................... 9-2

Spark plugs.............................................................. 11-15

Specifications............................................................. 12-2

Speedometer .............................................................. 3-6

SPORT mode ............................................................ 7-17

SPORT mode indicator light......................................... 3-20

SRS

Curtain airbag ........................................................ 1-58

Frontal airbag......................................................... 1-48

Side airbag ............................................................ 1-58

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)... 4, 1-44

SRS airbag system

Monitors ................................................................ 1-69

Servicing ............................................................... 1-70

Warning light.......................................................... 3-11

Starting the engine ...................................................... 7-7

State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-5

Steering wheel

Power ................................................................... 7-18

Tilt ........................................................................ 3-41

Stopping the engine..................................................... 7-8

Storage compartment................................................... 6-5

Sun shade................................................................. 2-25

Sun visors .................................................................. 6-4

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-44

Synthetic leather upholstery ......................................... 10-5

Tachometer................................................................. 3-7

Temperature gauge...................................................... 3-9

Temperature warning light

AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-13

Rear differential oil.................................................. 3-14

Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-5

Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-38, 1-41

Tie-down hooks ......................................................... 9-15

Tilt steering wheel ...................................................... 3-41

Tire

Chains.................................................................. 8-11

Inspection ............................................................ 11-25

Pressures and wear .............................................. 11-25

Replacement ........................................................ 11-29

Rotation............................................................... 11-28

Types .................................................................. 11-23

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)........................................ 3-14, 7-27, 9-11, 11-24

Tires......................................................................... 12-3

Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-23

Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-38, 1-41

Towing...................................................................... 9-15

All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-18

Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-17

Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 9-15

Weight .................................................................. 8-20

Traction Control system

OFF indicator light.......................................... 3-18, 7-25

OFF switch ........................................................... 7-26

Trailer

Connecting............................................................ 8-18

Hitch .................................................................... 8-18

Hitches ................................................................. 8-23

Towing.................................................................. 8-20

Towing tips............................................................ 8-26

Trip meter ................................................................... 3-7

Turn signal

Indicator lights........................................................ 3-20

Lever .................................................................... 3-28

Under-floor storage compartment.................................. 6-15

Valet mode ................................................................ 2-17

Vanity mirror

Light ................................................................... 11-49

Vehicle

Capacity weight...................................................... 8-12

Identification .......................................................... 12-9

Symbols .................................................................... 3

Vehicle Dynamics Control

Operation indicator light................................... 3-18, 7-25

System.................................................................. 7-23

Warning light.................................................. 3-18, 7-25

Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2

Warning and indicator lights .......................................... 3-9

Warning light

ABS.............................................................. 3-15, 7-21

All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-18

AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-13

Brake system......................................................... 3-16

Charge.................................................................. 3-13

CHECK ENGINE .................................................... 3-12

Door open ............................................................. 3-17

Index 14-9

14-10 Index

Low fuel.......................................................... 3-8, 3-17

Low tire pressure ................................................... 3-14

Oil pressure .......................................................... 3-13

Rear differential oil temperature ............................... 3-14

Seatbelt ........................................................ 1-18, 3-10

SRS airbag system ................................................ 3-11

Vehicle Dynamics Control ............................... 3-18, 7-25

Windshield washer fluid .......................................... 3-18

Warranties ..................................................................... 1

Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-20

Washing ................................................................... 10-2

Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3

Wear indicators......................................................... 11-28

Wheel

Alignment.............................................................. 12-4

Aluminum............................................................. 11-30

Balance ............................................................... 11-27

Chrome plated wheels ........................................... 11-31

Replacement ........................................................ 11-29

Windows................................................................... 2-20

Windshield

Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-32

Wiper and washer switches..................................... 3-34

Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-33

Wiper deicer.......................................................... 3-36

Winter

Driving.................................................................... 8-7

Tires............................................................ 8-10, 11-24

Winter tire ........................................................ 8-10, 11-24

Wiper and washer...................................................... 3-33

————————————————————————————————————————

000134

GAS STATION REFERENCE

Fuel

Use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or

higher.

& Fuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and

Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti

Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel” section in this manual.

& Fuel capacity

16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)

& Engine oil

Use only API classification SM with the words “ENERGY

CONSERVING” and the ILSAC certification mark (starburst

mark) displayed on the container.

& Engine oil capacity

6.7 US qt (6.3 liters, 5.5 Imp qt)

& Cold tire pressure

Tire size P255/55R18 104H

Wheel size 18 6 8JJ

Pressure

Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Rear at trailer towing 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Temporary spare tire

Size T165/80R17

Pressure

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

Subaru 2009 Tribeca Special Edition

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Subaru 2009 TRIBECA SPECIAL EDITION Questions and Answers

Related Products

Subaru 2026 Solterra Touring XT Leather

Subaru 2026 Solterra Touring XT

Subaru 2026 Solterra Limited XT

Subaru 2026 Solterra Limited

Vevor YB06-11 High Flow Catalytic Converter Direct Fit Exhaust Manifold for Subaru Impreza Legacy Forester Outback 06-12

Subaru 2026 Solterra Premium